TEXAS ASSOCIATION OF PRIVATE AND PAROCHIAL SCHOOLS
CONSTITUTION
ARTICLE I
The name of the organization will be the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools.
ARTICLE II
The Purpose of TAPPS is and shall be to organize, to stimulate, to encourage and to promote the academic, athletic and fine arts programs in an effort to foster a spirit of fair play, good fellowship, true sportsmanship and wholesome competition for boys and girls.
ARTICLE III
Membership:
- Membership in TAPPS is limited to private and parochial schools in the state of Texas, with students enrolled in grades 9-12.
- Private schools are defined as those schools that are established, conducted and primarily supported by a non-government agency -or- primarily supported by student tuition.
- Parochial schools are defined as those schools that are controlled by, supported by, or within the jurisdiction of a church parish.
- All member schools shall submit the annual contract and payment of annual dues and event fees to the state office by September 1 of the current year.
- Applications for membership of new schools must be made to the state office in writing by the school's chief administrator. Applications will be considered by the Executive Board and its decision will be reported to the membership. Note: Former TAPPS member schools having withdrawn in good standing will be required to follow all procedures as outlined in Article III of the Constitution. Any former TAPPS member school not in good standing will be required to follow all procedures as outlined in Article III of the Constitution and in the By-Laws - Probation and Sanctions. New members accepted will be placed in a district by the means of:
- realignment which takes effect in even years or
- odd years with the approval of a district that could adapt its schedule to accommodate the new member school. Any new addition to a district will not compete in any sport/event until the beginning of each school year. Exception: Football is a two-year contract, so a new school may have to compete as an independent until it can be absorbed into a schedule or added during realignment.
- A TAPPS member school shall not be a member of another organization for the purpose of concurrent athletic competition. Nor shall a member school come into conflict that would prevent its participation in TAPPS District or State competition. (Fine Arts Competition See By-Laws Section 202.A).
- Each member school shall be represented by a delegate who will have voting privileges for that member school in association business. The delegate from each school must be a professional (contracted) faculty member of that school and registered as a delegate in the TAPPS State Office.
- The executive management, control, and final authority of this association belong to the Executive Board consisting of nine (9) members. Any new member to the Board is nominated by the President for appointment. This Board and all new board members must be approved by a majority vote of the Board. A President shall be elected from the nine board members by the board members. The Vice-President and Treasurer shall be appointed by the President with the majority approval of the Board. Board members are appointed to a place (numbered 1 through 9) and serve two-year terms, including the President. Each board member is subject to re-election within the Board. Re-elections will occur within the Board at the March meeting. Place(s) 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 shall be elected in odd numbered years, while place(s) 2, 4, 6 and 8 shall be elected in the even numbered years.
- A majority of the Board must be present to act on association business. A majority number of votes of the quorum in attendance shall be required in order for the board to pass any motion.
ARTICLE IV
- State Academic, Art, Athletics and Fine Arts championships will be conducted each year. A state champion will be recognized in both boy and girl designated sports/events.
- The general operations of TAPPS will follow the guidelines as set by the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws, Athletic, Academic, Art and Fine Art Plans.
ARTICLE V
Eligibility qualifications for competition. A student/athlete:
- has not reached 19 years of age prior to September 1 of the current school year; and
- initially enrolled in the ninth grade not more than four years ago nor in the tenth grade not more than three years ago. A student may participate in TAPPS contests during a normal program of high school courses over a period of four consecutive calendar years after the student first enrolls in the ninth grade. Students who never entered the ninth grade but were placed into the tenth grade have three consecutive years from their first entry into tenth grade to complete their high school eligibility. NOTE: If a player competes for or against a varsity team before enrolling in the ninth grade, the Player’s four years of eligibility begins on the date of competition for or against the varsity team. It is a violation to allow students not yet in high school to participate with or against high school students.
- has not graduated from high school or other school of equal or higher status; and
- is a full time, day student at the member school; and
- allowed to participate in TAPPS competition or contests only if the student is in good and regular standing which included but not limited to:
- enrollment in at least four accredited academic courses
- failing no more than one course during the grading period
- in determining whether or not the student is passing his or her work from the beginning of the semester to seven days before contest must be considered.
- the length of time for ineligibility after a grading period shall be at least two weeks;
- NOTE:see Section 77 for details
- is enrolled in an accelerated Christian education school he/she must be proceeding toward graduation on a credit basis and on a passing basis with a regularly checked procedure by each school to ensure they are in good academic standing. If a question of eligibility arises, a school may be required to present the student’s transcript concerning eligibility to the state office; and/or
- must meet guidelines of TAPPS transfer rule. See By-Laws - Transfer Rule; and
- shall not take part in any competition or contest of TAPPS if participant has received money or gifts or valuable consideration for participating in any sport or contest, with the exception of FFA or 4-H participation. NOTE: TAPPS reserves the right in the Executive Board to assess and make the final judgment of whether or not money or valuable consideration were given, or if either TAPPS rules and regulations and/or amateur status were violated; and
- has not been induced for athletic purposes.
ARTICLE VI
The Amending Process: Amendments to the State Constitution of TAPPS must be proposed in writing to the Executive Board by member schools. A proposed amendment will be included on the agenda only if it is endorsed in writing by at least two other member schools and if it is submitted to the state office prior to the summer Convention and Coaches Clinic. The Executive Board shall make a recommendation to the membership for each amendment submitted. Ratification of amendments shall be a 2/3 vote of the membership.
ARTICLE VII
TAPPS shall deem all games in which an ineligible player participates to be a loss even if the team had obtained a victory in said game/games. Participation will include but not be limited to dressing in the team uniform, playing in a game against any opponent or any other act which TAPPS considers to be participation.
General Bylaws-Sections 1-129
Subchapter A – Definitions and General Provisions
Section 1 – Definitions
In the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules, unless the context requires otherwise:
- Calendar week means 12:01 a.m. on Sunday through midnight on Saturday.
- Constitution means the Constitution of the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools.
- Contest includes competition.
- Contest Rules means the rules governing TAPPS contests and competitions adopted by the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools.
- District means a grouping of participant schools within an established classification that is determined to facilitate reasonable competition among the schools in TAPPS contests for a two-year period (designated as region in some instances).
- District Executive Committee means the committee of superintendents or designated representatives of participant schools within an assigned district.
- Director means the director of the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools.
- Enrollment begins the day of a student’s registration and attendance in the minimum number of required daily class periods and ceases with the last day of attendance.
- Fan(s) means devotees of a germane activity, e.g., spectators at a sporting event or a performance involving school students.
- High school means a school that offers instruction in the ninth, tenth, eleventh or twelfth grades, or any combination thereof, whether all of the grades are offered instruction in the same building.
- (Not playing for TAPPS Honors - Withdrawn from TAPPS District Participation)): A school may play as a “withdrawn team” if
- the school declares withdrawn status prior to realignment
- If the team is placed in a TAPPS district and later withdraws from competition in the district to play a non-TAPPS schedule
- During the first year of an alignment, the school must compete as a non-TAPPS school for the remainder of the Alignment Cycle.
- During the second year of an alignment, the school may not return to TAPPS competition for the following Alignment Cycle.
- This ‘Withdrawn Team” is subject to all TAPPS rules.
- A $250 per school fee is owed to TAPPS for withdrawal.
- If a team is placed in a district and later withdraws without competing in interscholastic competition for that season, the district shall approve reentry into the district. A $250 per school fee is owed to TAPPS for the withdrawal. All provisions of Section 9 apply.
- Junior high school means a school that offers instruction in the seventh and eighth grades, whether it also offers instruction in the sixth or ninth grade, and whether it occupies a building separate from an elementary or high school.
- TAPPS means the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools.
- TAPPS contest means competition between a TAPPS school, any other school (TAPPS or non-TAPPS member), and any organized homeschool group in any contest listed in Section 73.
- Nonparticipating school means a member school that has not elected to participate in the germane activity.
- Participant school means member private or parochial school for which the annual event fee has been paid.
- Probation - A given period of time during which a member school, employee(s) of the member schools or a specific program of the member school is subject to critical examination and evaluation to determine if the subject on probation is in compliance with the TAPPS constitution, By-Laws, and contest rules. If the component, while on probation, is found to be in violation of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws or Contest rules, that component will be subject to more stringent sanctions.
- Inducement means to encourage students to come to or remain at a member school for the purpose of participating in TAPPS events. Inducement includes but is not limited to the following: offer or acceptance of the payment of tuition; offer or acceptance of board; offer or acceptance of lodging;
- offer or acceptance of transportation;
- offer or acceptance of a job for parent or student;
- offer or acceptance of the payment of athletic camp registration;
- offer or acceptance of payment of cash;
- offer or acceptance of a University or College Scholarship;
- offer or acceptance of free or reduced cost private instruction;
- offer or acceptance of any other valuable consideration to induce the student to enroll in a participant's school.
- Region means a grouping of districts of participant schools that is determined to facilitate reasonable competition among schools certified to represent their districts in League contests.
- School week means the week beginning at 12:01 a.m. on the first instructional day of a calendar week and ends at the close of instruction on the last instructional day of the calendar week, excluding holidays.
- Sponsor means any person who is principally responsible, or responsible by delegation of or directing or coaching any student in TAPPS contests.
- TAPPS Executive Board means the State Executive Board of the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools as described in Article III, #6 of the Constitution.
- Summer months or summer vacation means from the time TAPPS activities end in May until TAPPS activities begin for the new school year as published in the TAPPS calendar.
- Traditional school year means an approximate nine consecutive months instructional period with an approximate three-month vacation during the summer months.
- Valuable consideration means any tangible or intangible property or service, including anything that is wearable, usable or salable.
- Varsity means a contest entry at the highest level of competition as provided for in the fine arts and athletic plans at which the team, team member, or individual student is designated by the school to represent it in TAPPS district, bi-district, region, state or non-conference contests.
- Athletic Executive Committee means the elected committee described in Section 24 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- Fine Arts Executive Committee means the appointed committee described in Section 25 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- Coach:
- Any person who interacts with students in practice or competition in an extracurricular activity including but not limited to:
- Training
- Teaching a skill
- Instruction
- Tutoring
- Drilling
- Exercising
- Preparing
- For TAPPS purposes, coaches positions include but are not limited to all of the following arrangements:
- Paid
- Unpaid
- Full-time
- Part-time
- Stipend Only
- Volunteer
- Team or
- Skills only (pitching, kicking, serve/serve return, goalkeeper, etc.)
- Recreational Opportunities – Open Gym or Open Weight Room
- Schools may provide recreational opportunities for students with advance approval of the school board or administration
- The dates and times of the recreational opportunities (open gym times) shall be announced, posted, or publicized so that every student attending the school is aware of the opportunity to participate.
- Activities shall be on a first come, first serve basis
- School Coaches are responsible for notifying student athletes in their sport that any attendance to or participation in the open gym is strictly voluntary, never required, and is in no way a prerequisite for making a team or gaining playing time.
- No instruction may be given during the open gym.
- Someone other than the coach may be appointed to supervise the gym or facilities.
- Coaches should not participate with their athletes in the athletes’ sport.
- Coach participation with their students places the responsibility on the coach and school to prove they are not violating Sunday and off-season regulations.
- Use of facilities may be restricted to that school’s student body. Note: If only members of an athletic team are participating in their sport in an open recreational facility, it could be deemed a violation of off-season regulations.
- Open Gyms
- During open gyms, the following are acceptable:
- Attendance may be taken
- School equipment may be used
- During open gyms the following are not acceptable:
- Mandatory Attendance
- Posting workouts
- Directing activities
- Demonstrating techniques
- Charting of student achievement
- Grouping of student by performance level or other criteria
- Organizing teams
- Organizing contests or drills
- Open Weight Room
- During open weight, the following are acceptable:
- Attendance may be taken
- School equipment may be used
- Posting workouts
- Directing activities
- Demonstrating techniques
- Charting of student achievement
- Grouping of student by performance level or other criteria
- During open weight rooms the following are not acceptable:
- Mandatory Attendance
- Camp is defined as an organized event with
- a definite beginning and ending date not to exceed 7 consecutive days
- where specific instruction and training in a
- Sport,
- Position,
- skill or
- activity is offered.
- Camp participation should not be mandatory.
- Guardianship (also known as conservatorship) In regards to student eligibility for varsity participation, the board or appointed committee shall determine eligibility. If the student is residing with a guardian, the following conditions may allow a student to participate upon approval and not wait one year from the application for eligibility.
- If a student’s parents are alive but a guardian of his/her person has been established by the appropriate authority and recorded in the county clerk’s office more than one year prior to application,
- If a student’s parents are alive but no legal guardian of his/her person has been established by the appropriate authority and recorded in the county clerk’s office, guardianship may be established if the student has resided with and been supported by the guardian for more than three (3) years prior to application,
- If a student’s parents are deceased and the student resides with and is supported by grandparents, aunt/uncle or brother/sister for TAPPS eligibility purposes.
- If students are placed in a Boarding Facility, as licensed by the state of Texas as a child care facility. This includes students whose parents are living or deceased.
- Gender Identity
- TAPPS recognizes a student’s gender as that which is denoted on the student’s birth certificate as entered at or near the time of the student’s birth.
- TAPPS shall recognize a birth certificate as presented from
- a recognized authority of the State of Texas or
- another such governing body authorized to issue birth certificates for citizens of their jurisdiction in keeping with part A above.
Section 2 – Computation of Time to Act
- Counting after an event. When action is required within a specified period of time after a specific act or occurrence, counting starts the day after the act or occurrence. Do not count Saturday, Sunday or federal or state holidays.
- Counting before an event. When action is required within a specified period of time before a specific occurrence, counting ends the day before the act or occurrence. Count backwards beginning with the day prior to the event to find the date action must be taken. Do not count Saturday, Sunday or federal or state holidays.
Section 3 – Scheduling Restrictions/Accommodation
- In order to provide at least one day of respite from involvement in interscholastic activities each week, TAPPS and TAPPS member schools shall not schedule contests or practices on Sunday. Travel on Sundays is a decision left to the governance of each member school.
- Schools founded on religious tenets that observe the Sabbath other than Sunday may schedule practice or competition on Sunday provided they have notified TAPPS of this request prior to September 1 of each year.
- Under no circumstance shall a school schedule practice or competition which would require the student athlete to participate for seven (7) consecutive days.
- TAPPS shall not schedule practice or contests on Christmas and Easter.
- Individual member schools shall establish their competition schedules in keeping with their individual guiding principles and governance.
- In determining contest dates, member schools should demonstrate the utmost respect for other member schools’ religious observances governing the schools ability to participate.
- Team Sports:
- No member school shall be required to participate on a day of Sabbath observance or a day of traditional religious holidays, to include but not limited to the following:
- Christmas, Easter, Yom Kippur.
- This requirement applies to contests , practices and travel.
- Schedules subject to change in consideration for those schools submitting a request for accommodation for religious observance include
- District
- Post-District
- State
- State Contests
- Any request for accommodation for religious observance must be forwarded to the TAPPS office.
- Individual Competitions:
- Based on the nature of the individual competitions, competitors must compete on the same day and conditions as all other contestants.
- Individual contests are therefore not subject to accommodation for religious observance.
- District, Regional and State competition schedules shall be construed so that religious days of observation are considered when setting the dates of competition.
- Weather related or other emergency situations, which by nature are not planned nor predictable, may necessitate changes that conflict with religious days of observance.
Section 6 - Application for TAPPS Membership
TAPPS has developed the following basic requirements for membership based upon research of those schools applying for and gaining acceptance to the organization. While TAPPS encourages private and parochial schools to view TAPPS membership as an option, schools that are unable to meet their participation goals and commitments harm the district and organization structure. The membership requirements are in place to protect both the applicant schools and the existing member schools.
- Applicant schools must meet the requirements for membership presented in Article III of the TAPPS Constitution
- Requirements at the time of application
- have students in grades 9-12 at the time of application and acceptance for participation
- have a minimum of 20 students in grades 9-12. This is an average of 5 students per grade
- have participated in athletic interscholastic contests at the High School level
- have the recommendation of at least three (3) current TAPPS member schools
- Schools must participate in at least six (6) TAPPS activities upon acceptance
- Boys and girls activities may be counted separately
- Fine Art activities will be included as one activity each
- If the applicant school is a member of an organization similar to TAPPS for extracurricular activities, the school must be in good standing with that organization and eligible for continuing membership in that organization
- Initial request for information
- Complete the Information Request form located on the TAPPS website
- TAPPS office will contact Head Administrator for a phone interview
- Application process
- Phone interview
- After the phone interview, schools meeting the requirements for membership will be forwarded an application for TAPPS membership
- School must complete and return the application with all requested documentation to the TAPPS office
- The Application for Membership must be accompanied with a $200 non-refundable application fee
- Board interview
- Upon receipt of the application and supporting documentation, applicant schools shall be scheduled to interview with the TAPPS executive board
- The interview may be in person or other options as determined by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- Notification
- TAPPS will notify applicant school of acceptance or denial
Subchapter B – Membership in TAPPS
Section 7 – Qualifications for Membership
A member school in good standing is defined as a private or parochial school as described in Article III of the TAPPS Constitution which has:
- returned its annual contract and paid its annual dues and fees by the deadline indicated on the current TAPPS calendar (September 1);
- has met deadlines in submitting required forms and reports to district and state offices;
- has met obligations in regard to competition in scheduled contests;
- has followed the rules and guidelines of the TAPPS Constitution and By-Laws;
- has not been involved with litigation against TAPPS within the past five (5) years; and
- has been approved by an annual majority vote of the TAPPS Executive Board.
- Maintain the minimum number of events required by membership as outlined in Section 6 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- The first two years a school is a member of the organization, shall be considered a probationary time during which the school’s membership may be subject to review and termination with or without cause.
- If a school voluntarily withdraws membership in TAPPS, the school must wait three realignment cycles before application for reinstatement in TAPPS.
Section 8 – School’s Eligibility to Participate
- General. Unless its right to participate has been suspended or revoked by the TAPPS Executive Board, a school that is a member of TAPPS and has paid the annual TAPPS membership dues and event fees for the particular activity is eligible for competition.
- Exception: Some member schools that do not meet the criteria of private or parochial school as described in Article III of the TAPPS Constitutions that were approved for membership prior to the current definition of private or parochial school, shall remain members of TAPPS so long as they are in good standing and operate as they did when accepted as members of TAPPS.
Section 9 – Membership Dues
- Annual Dues. A school shall pay annual membership dues in an amount determined by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- Event Fees. Each high school that wishes to participate in TAPPS contests shall pay an annual event fee based on the number of activities indicated on the annual contract. The amount of the events fee is determined by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- A school may request to withdraw from an event for which an event fee was paid, however,
- the school must request the withdrawal on the TAPPS form
- there will be a fee of not less than the event fee charged for this action
- A school may request to add an event after submitting their annual contract. In order for the request to be considered,
- the school must request the addition on the TAPPS form
- there will be an additional fee of not less than the event fee charged for this action
- the school must notify the TAPPS office more than 30 days prior to the first competition in the event
- payment must be received in the TAPPS office prior to adding the school to an event or district.
- Special Fee. Events may be assessed a special fee as determined by the TAPPS Executive Board.
Section 10 – Membership and Right to Participate
Each school is responsible for having READ and COMPLIED with the Constitution, By-Laws and Academic, Art, Athletic and Fine Art plans. TAPPS requires all member schools to give each administrator and coach the proper information concerning the particular contest or event and that each school is in compliance with all TAPPS rules and regulations. Each of the following are specific requirements.
- Return the annual contract and certificate of accreditation by the specified date; and
- Pay all dues and fees in full by the specified date; and
- fill out and file the proper eligibility form for each sport and send copies to the District President and TAPPS State office by the specified date; and
- Complete all transfer requirements as set by the TAPPS Constitution, Article V, Item 7 (See By-Laws – Transfer Rule, Section 104); and
- Complete the membership contract and return within the yearly assessment by September 1 of the current year; and
- Complete and mail in by the designated deadline all season reports required; and
- Require a school representative to attend any meeting designated “mandatory” by the TAPPS Executive Board; and
- Comply with the “letter and spirit of the rules and regulations” of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws, Athletic, Academic, Art and Fine Art plans; and
- Respond to all requests made by the TAPPS Executive Board and TAPPS State office by the deadline indicated in the correspondence or on the Official TAPPS calendar; (examples include but not limited to: Referendum votes, annual contract, directory information, enrollment forms, surveys, questionnaires; and
- Make provisions for liability and medical insurance on all coaches and players for all TAPPS events.
- The member school must provide the name of the insurance carrier in item #10 when submitting their annual contract.
- RIGHT TO PARTICIPATE. A member school’s right to continue to participate in TAPPS contests may be continued by the school’s timely payment of its annual dues and of the school’s events fee.
- ACCREDITATION.
- A member school shall maintain the accreditation of the school.
- Accreditation must be with one of the following agencies approved by TEA:
- National Christian Schools Association
- Independent Schools Association of the Southwest
- Southern Association of Colleges and Schools
- Texas Alliance of Accredited Private Schools
- Lutheran Schools Accreditation Commission
- Accreditation Commission of the Texas
- Association of Christian Schools International
- Texas Catholic Conference Education Department
- International Christian Accrediting Association
- Texas Seventh Day Adventist School System
- Southwestern Association of Episcopal Schools
- Association of Christian Teachers and Schools
- Accreditation Commission of the Texas Association of Baptist Schools
- Texas Education Agency See the website for more information
- If a school is not accredited, the school must submit a written statement regarding the school’s academic plan and reason for lack of accreditation. Documentation may be requested by the TAPPS Director or Executive Board to confirm the school’s commitment to student success and achievement of educational goals.
- The accreditation of each TAPPS school is subject to review by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- Fees. No school will be allowed to participate in any event on the district level if they have not paid their events fees for that event to the State Office. A district allowing ineligible schools to participate could forfeit their playoff position in that contest or event.
Section 11 – Event Passes
- The number of events passes each school receives will be determined by the Executive Board.
- The TAPPS card will admit cardholder, spouse and minor children in their company free of charge.
- Passes issued from the following professional organizations will be honored for the cardholder only:
- TASO
- THSBOA
- THSADA
- THSCA
- TGCA
- TABC
- TSMCA
- CCAT
- TTFCA
- TTCA
- TISCA
- TETA
- TAVC
- THSBCA
- TSMCA
- These passes will be good for any TAPPS contest; including regular season, district, post district and tournaments.
- All TAPPS schools are required to honor the Official TAPPS Pass and the passes from the organizations listed above.
- Schools failing to honor a TAPPS Pass will be subject to sanctions by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- The coach of a team at a championship event will not need a pass; the coach’s spouse may use the coach’s pass for admittance.
- Students or minor children may not present the TAPPS Pass for admittance without the adult holder present.
- Lost passes will not be replaced by the TAPPS office.
- Additional passes may be purchased for $350.00 each.
Section 12 – Legal Action
- In the event that any civil judicial action, including but not limited to a TRO or Temporary Injunction, is brought against TAPPS, the Executive Board, the Fine Arts Executive Committee, the Athletic Executive Committee, any District Committee, any ad hoc or other Committees of the organization, any officer or member of such Boards or Committees, or a TAPPS Member School, for any decision, interpretation, implementation, execution or enforcement of the provisions of the TAPPS Constitution and/or By-Laws, the following actions may be taken:
- stripping awards from teams and/or individual;
- probation of the individual student seeking judicial action and/or the TAPPS member school he/she attends;
- Disqualification from participation for the individual student and/or the full team seeking judicial relief for a full year from the conclusion of the legal action;
- If a lawsuit or judicial action as described in 1 above is filed by a TAPPS Member School, its employee, representative, volunteer, student, or parent or guardian of a student, TAPPS and all of its related representatives and parties shall be reimbursed for any and all expenses and fees in connection with the investigation, defense and resolution of said action.
- Written notice shall be provided for the payment of all expenses and fees incurred as described in 2 above to the party who brought the action. If, within 90 days after receiving said notice, the expenses and fees remain unpaid, the TAPPS Executive Board shall suspend from participation in all TAPPS activities the student(s) and/or TAPPS Member School for a period of one to three years.
(Section 13-15 reserved for expansion)
Subchapter C – Organization and Administration
Section 16 – Composition of TAPPS
Subchapter C
ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Section 16
COMPOSITION OF TAPPS
SEE CONSTITUTION ARTICLE III, 1.
Section 17 – TAPPS Binding Actions
TAPPS shall be bound only by those of its actions that are reasonably undertaken by TAPPS officers, pursuant to the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules, or to the written resolution or motion passed by the affirmative vote of a 2/3 majority of the members of the TAPPS membership. Actions taken pursuant to this section shall be referred to as binding actions.
Section 18 – Liability Insurance
TAPPS will pay the premium on and be covered by a liability insurance policy. The policy will be in effect as follows:
- All official TAPPS contests and events in which TAPPS secures the site will be covered. This does not include district, bi-district, and some regional events or non-TAPPS activities attended by a TAPPS member school.
- Minimum coverage limits shall be:
- $1,000,000.00 bodily injury
- $1,000,000.00 property damage.
- The TAPPS insurance will not cover participants while actively engaged in practice or games. TAPPS recommends that all member schools provide Liability or Medical insurance for their staff and students who participate in all TAPPS events.
- TAPPS liability insurance will be funded for by using membership assessment monies as directed by the Executive Board.
- This information will be updated as information comes to TAPPS from selected insurance agents.
Section 19 – TAPPS Leadership
- DIRECTOR. The TAPPS Executive Board appoints a person to serve at its pleasure as the Director of Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools. The Director is an employee of TAPPS.
- SUPERVISION. The Director of TAPPS has the responsibility:
- to serve as the chief administrative officer of TAPPS;
- to employ, in accordance with all applicable employment policies of the TAPPS Executive Board, all TAPPS staff and consultants;
- for day to day operation of TAPPS state organization;
- to work within the guidelines set by the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws, Contest Rules and Executive Board;
- to work closely with the TAPPS Executive Board President on contractual and fiscal matters, board meeting agenda, and other association business;
- for the administration of all events/contests sponsored;
- to prepare the annual budget for TAPPS and submit for approval to the TAPPS Executive Board;
- to take such other, further, and reasonable actions that are necessary or desirable under and consistent with:
- the binding actions taken by the TAPPS Executive Board;
- the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws, and Contest Rules;
- the law.
- ASSOCIATE DIRECTOR. The TAPPS Executive Board approves a person to serve at its pleasure as the Associate Director of the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools. The Associate Director is an employee of TAPPS.
- ASSISTANT DIRECTOR. The TAPPS Executive Board approves a person to serve at its pleasure as the Assistant Director of the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools. The Assistant Director is an employee of TAPPS.
- SUPERVISION. The Associate / Assistant Director has the responsibility:
- To assist the TAPPS Director in the day to day operation of the Association;
- To act as the chief administrative officer of TAPPS in the absence of the Director;
- To become familiar with the duties of the TAPPS staff;
- To perform those duties assigned by the Director;
- To be considered for the role of TAPPS Director when that position is available.
Section 20 – Executive Board
- The executive management, control and final authority of this association belong to the TAPPS Executive Board.
- Composition
- Nine (9) Members as denoted in Article III of the TAPPS Constitution
- The Board members shall occupy one of the nine (9) places
- Members elected to the board shall be subject to reelection as noted in the following:
- Nominations for the odd numbered places shall be accepted and voted upon at the March board meeting each odd numbered year.
- Nominations for the even numbered places shall be accepted and voted upon at the March board meeting each even numbered year.
- In the event a board member cannot finish the elected term, the place shall be filled in accordance with the selection criteria listed herein.
- Requirements
- Full time employee of a TAPPS member school
- Active in the administration, athletic or fine art endeavors of the member school
- New Members must have served TAPPS as active member of one of the leadership committees which include
- Leadership Advisory Council
- Athletic Executive Committee
- Fine Art Executive Committee
- Selection
- Members shall be nominated for open positions on the Executive Board
- Nominees must be presently serving or have served on one of the committees.
- Self-nominations shall be accepted
- Nomination shall include
- Submission of letter of interest
- Submission of resume
- Members of the TAPPS Executive Board shall make final selection based on nominations submitted
- Term
- Board members shall be elected at the March board meeting
- Board member term shall begin with the June board meeting of the election year
- Board member term shall end with the June meeting two years after election
- There is no limit to the number of terms to which a board member can elected
- Duties
- Fulfill the obligations as required by the TAPPS Constitution and By-Laws.
- Establish such guidelines, regulations, policies and procedures as authorized by the TAPPS Constitution and Bylaws
- Establish and levy annual dues and fees.
- Oversight of the financial operations of the organization
- Develop and establish the organization’s annual budget
- Employ an Executive Director and staff as necessary to oversee and direct the daily operations of the associations
- Oversee the membership of the organization including:
- Interview / acceptance of new schools
- Annual review of member school contracts
- Review of member relations and conduct
- Approve and insure events are conducted in accordance with established TAPPS rules, protocols and design.
- Authority
- The TAPPS Executive Board is the full and final authority of the organization
- Assign responsibility for operation of the organization to
- Athletic Executive Committee
- Fine Art Executive Committee
- Ad hoc committees as established by the Executive Board
- TAPPS staff
- The board has the authority to
- Initiate and require investigation
- Impose penalty and sanctions
- Hear appeal of previous decisions
Section 21 – Leadership Advisory Council
Section 22 – Athletic Executive Committee
- Composition:
- The AEC will be comprised of one elected member from each classification and three at large members. The elected AEC shall make recommendations to the TAPPS Executive Board for an additional three members. The Board will appoint at large members from the list of nominations presented by the AEC.
- Members are not eligible for election or selection if their school is represented with a sitting member on the Executive Board. Every effort will be made to not overlap representation with the Fine Arts committee. The Executive Board shall make final determination should participation on the AEC come into question.
- AEC elected members shall be elected every two years in even numbered years to run with re-classification. If an AEC member moves to a different classification during their term, then the sitting AEC will appoint an interim member to serve the rest of that term. Appointed AEC members shall be re-appointed at the end of each classification year.
- Appointed members are only eligible for reappointment for 3 consecutive terms. There are no term limits for elected AEC members.
- Elections shall be held by the end of August whenever possible. Special elections or amended election dates shall be at the discretion of the Executive Board.
- Criteria of Elected and Appointed AEC Members:
- Serve or Served as a District President, Vice President or existing AEC member and
- Be employed in a Full time Position with TAPPS Member School
- Appointed members must have been on the most recent AEC election ballot.
- Responsibilities:
- Athletic Policy
- Review all athletic policies as shown in Sections 103 – 199 of the TAPPS Bylaws
- Make recommendation on athletic policy to the Executive Board
- Advise the TAPPS board on policy impact and financial implications.
- General Policy
- Review general policies as shown in Sections 1 -129 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- Make recommendation on general policies to the Executive Board
- Governance
- Facilitate and assist District Executive Committees in meetings regarding potential TAPPS violations by students or school personnel.
- The District shall determine any violations
- The District will issue any sanctions necessary.
- In the event of an appeal, the AEC representative will report findings to the Board at the appeal meeting.
- A committee of a minimum of 3 AEC members may be created to conduct an intermediary hearing with issues that may cross districts or classifications. The AEC will issue sanctions in these situations. In the event of an appeal, the AEC representative(s) will report findings to the Board at the appeal meeting.
- The AEC will also hear appeals and issue sanctions involving athletic competition governed in the Athletic Bylaws.
- Local mentorship of AEC members to Athletic Directors.
- The AEC may be directed to create ad hoc committees to assist with sport specific concerns.
Section 23 – Fine Arts Executive Committee
- Composition
- The Fine Arts Executive Committee shall be a selected body consisting of not more than ten (10) members.
- Term of office
- Each term shall be no longer than 3 years
- An FAEC representative may be selected for no more than two consecutive terms.
- Governance
- General Governance (Sections 1-129 of the TAPPS By-Laws)
- Recommend changes to governance to the Executive Board
- Review and recommend changes to governance presented by membership
- General Athletic Governance (Sections 130-142)
- Recommend changes to governance to the Executive Board
- Review recommend changes to governance presented by membership
- Fine Art Activities (Sections 199-263)
- Recommend changes to governance to the Executive Board
- Review recommend changes to governance presented by membership
- Duties of the FAEC
- Mentoring
- Mentoring Fine Art Directors new to the position in TAPPS
- Provide Educational Training at TAPPS sponsored events.
- Assist District / Regional meetings pertaining to
- Planning
- Disciplinary issues.
- Alignment
- Fall Activities
- Spring Activities
- Championship Planning
- Approve Championship Formats
- Approve / Assist in planning of District or Regional Events
- Activities hosted by TAPPS
- Committee members shall attend and represent TAPPS at Regional or State events hosted by TAPPS.
- Committee members shall provide assistance as necessary for Fine Art events with duties to include:
- Event Management
- Awards
Section 24 – District Executive Committee
- JURISDICTION. The district executive committee shall decide reports of violations concerning eligibility and other violations of the Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules that occur within its district. A person who represents a school involved in a report may not participate in the committee’s decision.
- COMPOSITION. The district executive committee is composed of the superintendents of participant schools competing in the assigned TAPPS playing district. The superintendent may designate administrators to represent participant schools on the district executive committee. The superintendent may appoint an alternate to serve in the event the superintendent or the designated representative cannot attend a meeting.
- DISTRICT ORGANIZATION.
- Organizational Meeting. The temporary district president shall call a district meeting to organize the district. Subsequent regular and special business meetings shall be called by the district president as needed or upon the request of a member of the committee.
- New District. In each new district a temporary president shall be appointed by the TAPPS Director. This temporary president shall serve until the district executive committee elects a president.
- Temporary President. Until a president for the current school year’s district has been elected, the president of the previous district executive committee or the person appointed by the TAPPS Director shall serve as temporary president and be authorized to call meetings of the participant schools.
- Vice President. The district executive committee shall elect a vice president to represents a participant school involved in a matter which would prevent the president from casting a vote.
- Vacancies. In the event a president or vice president has been elected by the committee and becomes for any reason unable to serve, the district executive committee shall elect another president or vice president. The vice president shall serve in the capacity of acting president until the committee elects a new president.
- Failure to create a district executive committee in accordance with the above procedures will result in sanctions against the district and the schools involved.
- MEETINGS. In accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, a district executive committee may hold meetings.
- CONDUCT OF BUSINESS. The president of the district executive committee shall direct the work of the committee pursuant to the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules. The business of the committee may be conducted informally.
- VOTES. Each participant school in the assigned district shall have one vote.
- VOTING ON BUSINESS ITEMS. In order to take binding actions on items of business, the committee must vote in accordance with the Constitution.
- VOTING ON QUESTIONS BEFORE THE COMMITTEE.
- Inquiry Concerning Involvement. Prior to calling for a vote, the district president shall ask each member if he or she or the participant school represented is involved in the question.
- Determination of Involvement. Involvement in a question shall be determined on a factual, case by case, basis.
- Involved Not Entitled to Vote. A member of the committee shall not be entitled to vote in a case in which he or she or the participant school represented is involved. This includes the representative from the school:
- that is making a report of violation;
- that is being charged with a violation;
- that the student in question is leaving; or
- that the student in question is changing to.
- Transferal of Case. If the president determines that fewer than three members of the committee remain entitled to vote in the case, the president may immediately transfer the record of the case to the TAPPS Executive Board for disposition.
- RESPONSIBILITIES. In addition to those responsibilities found elsewhere in the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules for a district executive committee, it shall have the following responsibilities:
- Enforcement. The district executive committee shall enforce all rules contained in the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules. This includes assessing a penalty for every rule violation.
- Investigations. The district executive committee shall investigate the eligibility of contestants.
- Assist Other Participant Schools. The district executive committee shall furnish, upon the request of participant schools in the district, a list of eligible players submitted by each participant school.
- Disputes; Eligibility Questions. The district executive committee shall try to settle within the district all disputes and shall decide all questions of eligibility according to the Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules. The district executive committee may, by majority vote, request the TAPPS Executive Board to assume original jurisdiction of disputes or eligibility questions.
- Notification of Appeals. The district executive committee shall make appeals in writing to the president of the TAPPS Executive Board, through the TAPPS Director.
- Determination of Tie Breaker Process. The district executive committee shall determine in writing prior to a contest’s season the method to determine the district representatives in the event two or more schools are tied in win/loss percentages.
- Other Required or Desirable Actions. The district executive committee shall take such other action that is reasonable, necessary or desirable, and consistent with the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules, and the law.
- The District Executive Committee shall appoint a representative from the district schools to report the district standings as required by TAPPS in each team sport.
- PERMISSIBLE ZONES. The district executive committee, by majority vote, may subdivide for contest purposes into geographic zones. The zones of a district shall contain an equal number of teams, or as nearly equal as possible. For example: a 16-team district shall be divided 8-8; a 14-team district shall be divided 8-6 unless by unanimous vote the district wants a 7-7 division. Districts with fewer than 14 schools shall divide into zones with an equal number of teams, or as nearly equal as possible.
- PROHIBITED ACTIONS.
- Eligibility Questions. The district executive committee does not have the authority to vote a student eligible when that student does not meet the requirements of the TAPPS Constitution or By-Laws.
- Subdividing into Zones. The district executive committee may not subdivide into zones for contest purposes according to the size of the schools, previous success, or win/loss records.
- CONSEQUENCES OF UNAUTHORIZED COMMITTEE ACTION. The TAPPS Executive Board shall have the authority to reject for post-district competition any participant school or its representative contestant whose district executive committee is found to have failed to comply with any rule of the Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules, or the TAPPS Executive Board.
Section 25 – Responsibilities of the Superintendent / Head Admin.
The superintendent/headmaster of a member school:
- shall exercise direction and management of all TAPPS contests and scrimmages in which schools in the district compete, including appointing a game administrator for all home TAPPS varsity athletic team contests;
- shall enforce all rules of eligibility with respect to the students in their school;
- shall be responsible for fully cooperating with persons who are appointed by the District President, the TAPPS Executive Board, Fine Arts/Athletic Executive Committees or the TAPPS Director, to investigate allegations against the school, student representatives, or school district personnel;
- shall promptly report to the district executive committee any violation of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules by a student or participant school within the school or other schools unless the violation has already been reported;
- shall provide the district executive committee with full disclosure when a student’s grade, given by a teacher, is modified by an administrator in such a manner that affects TAPPS eligibility;
- shall determine that the events fee is paid;
- shall require the Professional Acknowledgment Form for all of the school’s coaches and sponsors of TAPPS academic, art and music activities (grades 9-12); a Student Acknowledgment of Rules Form from each competing student (Fine Arts and Athletics); and a completed Medical History and Physical Examination form for all athletes at the beginning of each school year. These forms shall be kept on file in the superintendent’s office.
- shall require an annual orientation for all 9-12 grade TAPPS directors, sponsors, advisers and coaches regarding TAPPS rules, expectations regarding appropriate conduct during TAPPS contests, goals and purposes;
- shall approve all athletic and fine arts schedule; and
- shall insure that results from all TAPPS contests are reported within 48 hours as prescribed in the TAPPS manual.
Subchapter D – Violations and Protests
Section 26 – Violations / Penalties Reported to the TAPPS Office
Failure to follow rules listed in the constitution, by-laws and athletic manual is a violation.
The minutes of the district meeting, including violations and penalties imposed by the District Executive Committee are to be sent in writing to the state office within three working days.
Section 27 – Conduct Subject to Protest
- PROTEST OF PARTICIPANT SCHOOL. A participant school may protest an act or omission that is a violation of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws or Contest Rules, but may not protest a contest judge’s / referee’s or other official’s decision.
- PROTEST OF AN INDIVIDUAL. If an individual protests an act or omission that is a violation of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws or Contest Rules,
- the superintendent should try to resolve the protest within 15 days.
- If the individual is not satisfied with the disposition of the protest, the superintendent shall notify the individual that the individual may file the protest with the District Executive Committee.
- If still dissatisfied with the District Executive Committee’s disposition of the case, and if further information is forthcoming, the case may referred to the
- Athletic Executive Committee
- Fine Arts Executive Committee
- If still dissatisfied with the District Executive Committee’s decision, the case may be referred to the TAPPS Executive Board to determine if there is substance to rehear the case.
- PROTEST OF DISTRICT EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE DECISION. If an individual or school is not satisfied with the decision and/or sanctions of the District Executive Committee,
- The Individual or School may file a protest with the TAPPS office to be directed to the
- Athletic Executive Committee; or
- Fine Arts Executive Committee
- If still dissatisfied with the District Executive Committee’s decision, the Individual or School may file an appeal of the case to be referred to the TAPPS Executive Board to determine if there is substance to rehear the case.
Section 28 – Filing a Protest
The superintendent or designated administrator must file the protest in writing with either the executive committee or the TAPPS Executive Board, whichever is appropriate. The protest must be filed within a reasonable time, not to exceed ten days from the date of official notification from TAPPS. The committee shall determine on a case-by-case basis what is a reasonable time, however, there is no time limit to protest eligibility or any other rule which imposes mandatory penalties.
Section 29 – Report of a Violation
A superintendent, principal, school administrator, teacher, coach, or sponsor may report an alleged violation of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and/or Contest Rules by his or her school. The report must be in writing and filed with the district executive committee or the TAPPS Executive Board, whichever is appropriate, within a reasonable time. The committee shall determine on a case-by-case basis what is a reasonable period of time, however, there is no time limit to protest eligibility or any other rule which imposes mandatory penalties.
Section 30 – Investigation of Protests or Allegations
- DIRECTOR’S INVESTIGATION. The Director shall investigate each protest or allegation filed that is within the jurisdiction of the TAPPS Executive Board and report all findings to the appropriate committee.
- SUBMISSION OF RECORDS. In response to a request by the TAPPS Executive Board, Athletic Executive Committee, Fine Arts Executive Committee, district executive committee, or Director, a member school shall submit its records that are germane to the protest filed or being investigated.
- INVESTIGATION BY OTHERS. The district executive committee, or an ad hoc committee approved by the district executive committee, may investigate protests or allegations within the district.
Evidence Review
Section 31 – Probations and Sanctions
- A school that returns its membership contract but fails to submit the contract by September 1 of the current year, or the completed enrollment form by the published due date, is considered late and will result in the following Executive Board actions.
- Failure to comply with any part(s) of Section 10 “Membership and Right to Participate” may result in the member school being placed on probation. Failure to correct the situation and demonstrate positive membership in the state organization will lead to:
- The school’s being able to participate on the district level, but not the play-offs.
- Ultimately a year (or more) suspension from membership in TAPPS may be handed down by the Executive Board.
- Schools leaving TAPPS while on probation will serve that probation upon re-admittance to TAPPS.
- TAPPS member schools eligible for participation in state athletic play-offs or state fine arts competition, but refuse to participate in the play-offs, will be sanctioned.
- No member of that team will be considered for all state recognition.
- Schools must submit in writing a detailed explanation for nonparticipation.
- The member school will be assessed a fee of not less than $100, which must be received by the TAPPS office prior to the school participating in any other TAPPS sponsored event (District, Regional, or State). Exception: See Section 141.A.13 for the exception to this rule.
- Probation – either the District Executive Committee or the TAPPS Executive Board may place a member school, employee(s) of the school, or specific program of the member school on probation for a given period of time in order to examine and evaluate if the subject on probation is in compliance with the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and/or Contest Rules. The District Executive Committee may place schools on probation for up to one year. The Executive Board may place schools on probation for up to three years, followed by reevaluation.
(Sections 32-34 reserved for expansion.)
Subchapter E – Committee Meetings and Appeals
Section 35 – Committee Meetings and Appeals
When it is necessary for a district executive committee, the Fine Arts Executive Committee, Athletic Executive Committee or the TAPPS Executive Board, to make a determination with regard to the applicability of TAPPS rules to persons within the jurisdiction of TAPPS, including eligibility cases or alleged violations of TAPPS rules, the applicable committee shall have the option of making a decision on the matter based upon written submissions or convening an informal meeting to discuss the matter in an effort to achieve an equitable resolution. Cases involving school district personnel shall be heard by the Fine Arts Executive Committee or the Athletic Executive Committee pursuant to the rules adopted by the TAPPS Executive Board. Final appeals shall be heard by the TAPPS Executive Board.
If a decision is made to hold an informal meeting (hearing), the interested parties should be given written notice of the meeting and invited to attend. All decisions by committees shall be in writing, whether based upon a written submission or testimony at an informal meeting.
(Sections 36-39 reserved for expansion.)
Section 40 – Appeals
- APPEALS TO TAPPS Decisions by a district executive committee may be appealed to the Executive Board which shall have the discretion to either accept or decline to hear the appeal. If the appeal is heard:
- The appeal may be
- Referred back to the original committee
- Granted
- Rejected-The committee hearing the appeal may accept the sanctions presented, reduce the sanctions or add additional sanctions based on their findings.
- An appeal to the Executive Board shall carry a minimum fee of $200. This fee shall be nonrefundable and due within 10 days of the appeal.
- An additional fee may be charged for any in person appeal in which the board must convene outside of its posted meeting schedule.
- APPEAL PROCEDURE
- Method of appeal shall be determined by the Executive Board. Methods of appeal may include the following:
- Appeal by email – All information, representing both sides of appeal, is submitted to the TAPPS Office on the appeal form located on the TAPPS website, which in turn is forwarded to the appropriate executive committee for decision without discussion. TAPPS office will contact both parties involved in the appeal, make sure all documentation and written testimony is complete before faxing it to the Board. The executive committee’s decision may be appealed to the TAPPS Executive Board, whose decision is final.
- Appeal by conference call –
- All information, representing both sides of appeal, is submitted to the TAPPS Office on the appeal form located on the TAPPS website
- At the request of the person making the appeal, a conference call hearing is held.
- IN PERSON APPEAL–
- All information, representing both sides of appeal, is submitted to the TAPPS Office on the appeal form located on the TAPPS website
- Parties involved in an appeal can wait for the next scheduled board/committee meeting and appear for a hearing in person.
- Appealing party is responsible for all costs associated with the special meeting if the timing of the issues requires a special meeting of the committee or board.
- Appeal of a District, Executive Committee, or Executive Board action must be received in the TAPPS office within ten days of notification of findings. After ten calendar days, the District, Executive Committee or Board action will become final if no appeal has been received.
- A member school may have a legal representation present at an appeal to provide advice for the school. However, only the school personnel will be allowed to make a presentation or direct questioning to the ruling body.
- APPEALS OF DISTRICT ASSIGNMENT.
- Decisions of the TAPPS Executive Board may be appealed by participant schools affected by the decision.
- Schools whose original appeals are denied by the TAPPS Executive Board may not appeal.
(Sections 41-44 reserved for expansion.)
Subchapter F – Rules and Amendments
Section 45 – Official Interpretations of Rules
- APPLICATION TO TAPPS EXECUTIVE BOARD. Anyone may request through the TAPPS State Office that the TAPPS Executive Board issue an Official Interpretation of a TAPPS rule.
- BINDING EFFECT OF OFFICIAL INTERPRETATION. The Official Interpretation of any of these rules by the TAPPS Executive Board shall be the final, authoritative explanation of the rules so interpreted; no other interpretation by any person is binding on TAPPS.
- RELIANCE ON OTHER INTERPRETATIONS. Anyone relying on an interpretation other than the TAPPS Executive Board, except as provided for under Section 46, below, regarding official TAPPS staff interpretations, risks the consequences, including the imposition of penalties.
- CONTENTS. The TAPPS Executive Board in determining its Official Interpretations of the rules of TAPPS shall state clearly and concisely:
- the language of the interpretation; and
- any consequent instructions to the Director for his subsequent execution or administration of actions on the Board’s behalf including the publication of brief summaries of the Official Interpretations in the TAPPS News briefs and in the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules.
Section 46 – Official Staff Interpretations
- AUTHORIZED INTERPRETATIONS. Those staff members of TAPPS who are authorized by the Director may issue written staff interpretations of general applicability that constitute binding actions of TAPPS so long as the conditions set out below have been fulfilled in advance.
- CONDITIONS FOR ISSUANCE. If a person requests a staff interpretation in writing, and accompanies the request with an application for an Official Interpretation by the TAPPS Executive Board, then the staff member may issue a written statement of general applicability that implements, interprets, or prescribes TAPPS policy or procedure or practice requirements. This statement shall be referred to as a staff interpretation.
- EFFECT OF STAFF INTERPRETATION. The statement issued to the applicant may be relied upon until the TAPPS Executive Board issues its order on the application.
- NO ORAL REQUESTS ACCEPTED. No oral requests for staff interpretation will be accepted.
- NO ORAL OR WRITTEN OPINIONS BINDING. No oral or written opinions will be considered staff interpretations and they will not be considered binding on TAPPS. Persons relying upon oral or written opinions do so at their own risk.
Section 47 – Rules of Construction
- GENERAL CONSTRUCTION. Generally, the rules of TAPPS shall be broadly construed to give reasonable effect to the intentions, purposes, and objectives of TAPPS. However, rules involving eligibility, rules involving violations, and rules involving penalties shall be strictly construed.
- MANDATORY, PERMISSIVE, DIRECTORY, FACTUAL. Rules are mandatory if the word “shall” is written; permissive if the word “may” is written, directory if the word ”should” is written; and state factual or expected events of past, present, or future times by writing those tenses of the verb “to be” or in the present tense.
- TAPPS CONSTITUTION PREVAILS OVER CONTEST RULES. Where any term or section of the Contest Rules is found to be inconsistent with the Constitution, the Constitution shall prevail and apply and the remaining terms and sections of the Contest Rules shall continue in effect.
- STATE LAW PREVAILS OVER TAPPS CONSTITUTION, BY-LAWS AND CONTEST RULES. Where any term or section of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules is found to be inconsistent with the laws of the State of Texas, the laws shall prevail and the remaining terms and actions of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules shall continue in effect.
- EFFECT OF TITLES. The titles appearing throughout the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules are for descriptive purposes only.
(Sections 48-51 reserved for expansion.)
Section 52 – Proposed Amendments to the By-Laws and Contest Rules
Amendment Proposal Form
Process Flow Chart
Subchapter G – Classifications and Districts
Section 57 – Establishing Classifications
- Before May 1 of each even numbered year, TAPPS shall establish classifications for TAPPS contests, and shall assign each participant school wishing to compete in TAPPS
- activities to an appropriate district, division, and region, where applicable.
- These classifications, divisions, regions, and districts shall be maintained for the next two school years.
- TAPPS shall publish the classification, division, region, and district assignments for each participant school.
Section 58 – Classification Based on Enrollment
- ENROLLMENT. Participant schools shall be assigned to a classification on the basis of an average enrollment of three dates taken from the previous school year and one date taken from the current school year. The formula used to determine enrollment shall be:
- Enrollment Dates and Calculation.
- Enrollment on each of the three (3) transfer deadlines from the previous school year for grades 9-12;
- three times the enrollment on the Fall transfer deadline of the current school year for grades 9-12;
- the sum of 1 and 2 above to be divided by six to produce the average enrollment used in determining classification for the next two year cycle.
- The alignment cycle shall begin the Fall of the next even numbered school year. Other formulas may be reviewed by the Executive Board or appointed committee for use in the classification process.
- Enrollment of New Participant School. New schools shall be assigned to a classification based on
- previous enrollment figures;
- current enrollment; or
- projected enrollment as determined by the Executive Board.
- CLASSIFICATIONS (CLASSES). Participating high schools shall be divided into classifications for the 2020-21 and 2021-22 school years according to the following enrollments:
2022-24 General Alignment Table
Classification | Minimum | Maximum |
6A | 410 | And up |
5A | 245 | 409 |
4A | 149 | 244 |
3A | 100 | 148 |
2A | 67 | 99 |
1A | Up to | 66 |
Section 59 – Competition by a New School
- NEW MEMBER SCHOOL
- A participant school just admitted to TAPPS for competition shall be assigned to a classification, division, region, and district, and the member schools of that district shall be notified by TAPPS.
- If district schedules are already set with all schools playing the maximum number of games and tournaments allowed, the district is not required to change the schedule to admit the new school, until schedules for the next year are established
- SCHEDULING NEW SCHOOL
- District schools having open dates during the district schedule or within two weeks of the beginning of the district schedule are to schedule the new school where possible
- If by using open dates, the new school can play all district schools as required, the new school may compete for district honors
- If the new school cannot play all district schools as required, it cannot be considered for district honors
- DISTRICT CORRESPONDENCE. The new school is to be included in all district correspondence, meetings, and communication in order to establish relations with the member schools of the district
- COMPETING FOR HONORS. If a new school cannot compete for district honors due to the schedule, the new school shall not be required to pay event fees for that activity
- Due to two-year contracts, it may be two years before a new school can be included in a football district.
Section 60 – District Reassignment by Agreement
A school may seek reassignment to a new district by agreement.
- After the district assignments have been published, and within the time frame posted for filing appeals, if a school seeks to change its district assignment by agreement, it must:
- obtain the unanimous written approval of the schools in the district to which it was assigned (email confirmation will suffice); and,
- obtain the unanimous written approval of the schools in the district to which it wants to be assigned (email confirmation will suffice); and,
- promptly inform TAPPS of the proposed reassignment.
- If TAPPS determines that the school is entitled to be reassigned, TAPPS shall reassign the school as it proposed and notify all the schools and districts affected by the district reassignment.
- Final approval of all district assignment(s) rests with the TAPPS Executive Board.
Section 61 – Appeal of District Assignment
- APPEAL REVIEW. The TAPPS Executive Board is responsible for assigning all schools to classifications, divisions, regions, and districts. The TAPPS Executive Board serves as the FINAL review for appeals.
- APPEAL
- A school may appeal its assignment to a classification, division, region or district, after the district assignments have been posted and within the time frame posted for filing appeals.
- The school shall file its appeal on the form provided for realignment appeals located on the TAPPS website.
- REVIEW. Upon timely receipt of an appeal, the TAPPS Executive Board shall review the request, taking into consideration all information as to the impact of the request on all member schools and what is in the best interest of the association.
- MEMBER INVOLVED. If a member of the TAPPS Executive Board is involved in or affected by the appeal, that member shall abstain from all deliberations and voting.
- GROUNDS FOR CLASSIFICATION REVIEW. With respect to classification decisions, a ground for review is an error in the enrollment basis. Schools may not appeal to be assigned to a smaller classification or division based on evidence that they submitted figures that were too high, unless original documents verifying the error(s) are presented to TAPPS. Additional grounds for review may be established by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- DECISION OF THE BOARD. After review of the appeal, the TAPPS Executive Board shall issue a decision in writing. TAPPS shall promptly notify each school and district affected by the Board’s decision.
Section 62 – Final District Assignments and Contracting Games
- When all reviews and appeals of classification decisions and assignments to districts have been made, the classifications and assignments to districts shall be final on the date shown on the TAPPS calendar.
- Until the classification and district assignments are final, contracts for contests by schools are not effective.
- A school may be disqualified for district honors for up to two years in that sport for contracting games with schools prior to the finalization of the reclassification and realignment process.
- All football games shall be contracted with a fully executed copy of the agreement kept on file by both schools, and submitted to the TAPPS office.
(Sections 63-66 reserved for expansion.)
Subchapter H – Non Discrimination Policy
Section 67 – Non-Discrimination Policy
No student otherwise eligible under TAPPS Constitution shall be denied, because of race, color, sex, or national origin, the equal opportunity:
- to try out for and if selected, participate in the Fine Arts Plan contests offered by the member school district;
- to try out for and, if selected, participate in
- Cross Country,
- Golf,
- Swimming and Diving,
- Tennis, or
- Track and Field
- Wrestling
- Individual Athletic Plans
- Schools that offer any of these plans may not permit mixed or unequal plans for boys and girls. Each of the above named activities is classified as an individual sport and therefore, female students may not participate on boys teams as the opportunity exists to participate at the district, regional and state levels as an individual.
- to try out for and, if selected, participate in the corresponding Athletic Plans as follows:
Corresponding Athletic Plans |
Boys Plans | Girls Plans |
Boys Basketball | Girls Basketball |
Boys Soccer | Girls Soccer |
Schools offering these plans may not permit boys to participate on girls’ teams, nor girls to participate on boys’ teams, nor permit mixed team participation.
- TAPPS football – girls may participate, but any accommodations shall lie with the member school and not the host school for any contest.
- TAPPS Volleyball is for girls only. Boys may not participate in TAPPS Volleyball.
- TAPPS Wrestling is for boys only. Girls may not participate in TAPPS Wrestling.
- Exceptions: If one of the following conditions exists, a female student may try out for and, if selected, participate on the corresponding boys’ team:
- the school does not have the corresponding Girls’ Basketball Plan to the TAPPS Boys’ Basketball Plan it offers; or
- the school does not have the corresponding Girls’ Soccer Plan to the TAPPS Boys’ Soccer Plan it offers;
- the female student desires to participate in the high school Baseball Plan, however, girls shall not participate in both baseball and girls’ softball at the same time.
Section 68 – Exceptions to Non-Discrimination Policy
Only girls eligible under Article V of the TAPPS Constitution may try out for and participate under the High School Athletic Plans designated for girls’ teams. Boys shall not play on girls’ teams.
(Section 69-72 reserved for expansion.)
(Subchapter I reserved for expansion.)
Subchapter J – Contests
Section 72 – Henderson Cup
- OVERALL STATE CHAMPION. In order to recognize state champions in Art, Academics, Vocal and Instrumental Music, and various team sports, TAPPS awards an Overall State Championship Trophy – The Henderson Championship Cup to the school in each classification that accumulates the most points in all competitions. The HENDERSON CUP shall keep the traveling trophy for one year, then return it for presentation to the next year’s winner. A plate shall be added to the trophy each year indicating the school name and year of the latest recipient.
- POINTS
- Awarded as outlined in the chart below
- Ties:
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
State Champion | 10 points |
State Runner up | 8 points |
Regional winner or 3rd place in State | 6 points |
Area winner or 4th place in State | 4 points |
Bi-district winner or 5th place in State | 2 points |
Playoff Qualifier or 6th place in State | 1 point |
Section 73 – TAPPS Contests
TAPPS shall conduct ANNUAL CONTESTS, as follows:
- Academics
- Ready Writing
- Spelling
- Science
- Social Studies
- Number Sense
- Calculator
- Mathematics
- Advanced Mathematics
- Spanish
- Current Events and Issues
- Literary Criticism
- Persuasive Speaking
- Poetry Interpretation
- Prose Interpretation
- Original Oratory
- Solo Acting
- Duet Acting
- Lincoln-Douglas Debate
- Art
- Drawing Black and White
- Drawing Color
- Communication Design
- Computer Rendered Art
- Painting
- Printmaking
- 2D Mixed Media
- Photography Black and White
- Photography Color
- Sculpture
- Relief
- Fashion Design, Textile Arts, and Jewelry Design
- Applied/Industrial Design
- Pottery, Ceramics, Plastic Arts
- Senior Portfolio
- On-Site Drawing
- Art History
- Seek & Sketch – Black and White
- Seek and Sketch – Color
- Short Film
- Vocal Music
- Male Solo
- Female Solo
- Small Ensemble
- Pop/Show Ensemble
- Sacred Ensemble
- Large Ensemble
- Piano Solo
- Band Music
- Woodwind Solo
- Brass Solo
- Percussion Solo
- Piano Solo
- Small Ensemble
- Handbell Ensemble
- Medium Ensemble
- Jazz Band
- Large Ensemble
- String Music
- String Solo
- Piano Solo
- Small Ensemble
- Medium Ensemble
- Large Ensemble
- Drumline
- Fall Band
A. Marching Band
B. Field Band
- One Act Play
- Spirit
- Cheer
- Dance
- Robotics
- Athletics
- Baseball -Boys
- Basketball -Boys
- Basketball -Girls
- Cross Country -Boys
- Cross Country -Girls
- Fall Soccer -Boys
- Football ( 6-man) -Boys
- Football (11-man) -Boys
- Golf -Boys
- Golf -Girls
- Softball -Girls
- Swimming/Diving -Boys
- Swimming/Diving -Girls
- Tennis -Boys
- Tennis -Girls
- Track and Field -Boys
- Track and Field -Girls
- Volleyball -Girls
- Winter Soccer -Boys
- Winter Soccer -Girls
- Wrestling -Boys
Section 74 – Official Calendar Published
Before June 15 the Director shall announce the official calendar for TAPPS contests for the coming year.
Section 75 – Scheduling Contests
The TAPPS Executive Board shall establish dates for district certification, playoff games and state championship games.
- Districts will design their schedules to complete the district contest, including makeup or playoff games, prior to the district certification deadline.
- If it appears not to be feasible to hold a contest at the scheduled place or time because of weather, facilities, or other cause, the Director shall determine where, when, or if the contest will be held.
(Section 76 reserved for expansion.)
Subchapter K – Eligibility
Section 77 - No Pass, No Play
This section applies to the eligibility of students based on grades.TAPPS rules in this section provide the minimum requirements. Member school rules may be more restrictive.
- Time Frame
- The rules presented in this section govern student eligibility
- During the school year and
- the school year grading periods.
- No Pass / No Play requirements do not apply to
- Summer participation
- Breaks between semesters/trimesters(exception: District Contests)
- Activities
- Athletics
- Fine Arts
- Courses
- All courses in which a student is enrolled
- Course structure includes the following
- Brick and Mortar
- Virtual
- Dual Credit
- Grading
- Passing grade levels shall be established by the TAPPS member school.
- Any additional grade points for Honors/Accelerated courses shall be local control.
- Grading may be numerical or pass/fail.
- A grade of incomplete shall be considered a failing grade for purposes of establishing student eligibility if not resolved within one week of the end of the grading period.
- Students whose courses are graded on a semester basis are still required to have a grade review at no later than nine weeks for eligibility purposes in alignment with the member school grading periods.(including Dual Credit)
- Grading Periods
- Grading periods shall be established by the TAPPS member school.
- For the purpose of this section, student grades must be reviewed after each grading period.
- For the purpose of this section, grades must be checked no longer than each 9 weeks.
- Period of Ineligibility
- Students failing more than one course are ineligible for a minimum of two weeks.
- The period of ineligibility shall begin no later than 1 week after grades are announced and shall continue for 14 days.
- A student who continues to fail more than one course (not limited to the initial courses) shall be ineligible on a week to week basis until such time as the student is failing no more than one course.
- A student who is failing no more than one course after the 14 days shall be considered eligible to participate in activities.
Section 78 – Border Schools – International Commuter Student Eligibility
This section applies to those students who attend a TAPPS member school located near an international border.
- In order to establish eligibility, these students must
- Reside with their parents
- In a residence no more than 75 miles from the school
- Not reside on a temporary basis with any other party either in the
- United States or
- foreign country
- Students are in good standing with all local regulations regarding commuting across international borders.
- Students must be full time day students at the TAPPS member school
- The Transfer Process as described in Section 104 of the TAPPS Bylaws must be followed for all students.
- All students who are not citizens of the United States are subject to the eligibility restrictions set forth in Section 102 of the TAPPS By-Laws. This includes but is not limited to eligibility being withdrawn (Section 102) if the student
- Receives advanced training or
- participates on any international team
- Students who meet the above conditions shall be subject to the eligibility considerations as citizen students.
- The TAPPS member school shall maintain records which verify residency and status which shall include
- Visa or Passport
- Proof of Residence
- Lease or purchase agreement for housing
- Utility bills for this primary student residence.
- Or any other documentation as requested by TAPPS.
Section 79 – Boarding School
For the purposes of Student Eligibility, TAPPS will review and approve schools to be Approved Boarding Schools. The TAPPS Executive Board will approve all Boarding schools.
- DEFINITION
- A boarding school is a residential private school.
- Students actually live in dormitories or resident halls on school owned property.
- The dormitories are supervised by members of the school’s staff who are usually faculty.
- Reasonable payment for Boarding is made to the school.
- REQUIREMENTS
- Make application to the TAPPS Executive Board
- Meet with the TAPPS Executive Board
- Gain approval from the TAPPS Executive Board
- DOCUMENTATION
- Transfer Forms will be obtained from all incoming 9-12th grade students who have participated in athletics at their previous school.
- Boarding School Questionnaire will be obtained from all Students if directed by the board
- Attested to by Student
- Attested to by Parent
- All International Student documentation will be kept on file and available for review
- Application
- I-20
- Room and Board Agreement
- Medical Release
- Copy of Passport
- Copy of Visa
- Other Documentation as requested by TAPPS
- MEETINGS
- Schools shall attend all scheduled TAPPS Approved Boarding School meetings
- ELIGIBILITY
- Day students who attend the Boarding School are subject to all TAPPS rules and regulations, including Section 80 for those students who do not live with their parents.
- The eligibility of students attending and residing in boarding schools as defined in this section is established as outlined below. For TAPPS purposes, the number of students in the boarding program does not include those not yet in high school or those whose four years of high school eligibility has been exhausted.
- Schools in which boarding students account for 50% of the total high school student enrollment.
- School must register with and be approved by TAPPS as a Boarding School.
- Students must be reported to TAPPS as BOARDING STUDENTS in TAPPS database
- Student eligibility will be established with attendance at the school and after transfer approval if required.
- Schools in which boarding students account for less than 50% of the total high school enrollment.
- School must register with and be approved by TAPPS as a Boarding School.
- Approved Boarding schools may assist in the placement of students in the school operated boarding facility as defined in part A of this section.
- Students must be reported to TAPPS as BOARDING STUDENTS in TAPPS database
- Student eligibility shall be established by the following:
- Application
- Documentation
- Committee Approval
- Students who reside in the Boarding School program and subsequently leave the program to live with a guardian will be subject to all provisions of Section 80 – Students not Living with Parents – but application and required documentation are not required.
- Students who are granted eligibility as a boarding student, who leave the boarding program to reside with a guardian are not eligible for varsity participation for a period of one year.
- GUARDIANSHIP
- Regardless of the student’s age, to be eligible for participation in TAPPS, a student must live with
- Parent(s),
- approved relatives,
- approved guardians or
- other approved adults.
Section 80 – Students Not Living With Parents
- Students not Living with Parents must submit the approved application prior to participation at the school.
- The approval process cannot begin until enrollment at the new school and withdrawal from the previous school.
- Students not Living with Parents are ineligible if they have been induced to come to or remain at a member school. Inducement includes but is not limited to the following:
- Offer or acceptance of the payment of tuition
- Offer or acceptance of a reduction in tuition payments (outside of School Financial Aid Programs)
- Offer or acceptance of board
- Offer or acceptance of lodging
- Offer or acceptance of transportation
- Offer or acceptance of a job for a parent or guardian
- Offer or acceptance of payment for athletic camp registration
- Offer or acceptance of payment for summer conditioning programs, or conditioning camps
- Offer or acceptance of cash payments
- Offer or promise of University or college scholarships
- Offer or acceptance of free or reduced cost private instruction
- Offer or acceptance of any other valuable consideration
- Students not Living with Parents must complete the application and certification process in order to establish eligibility at the TAPPS member school.
- Students not Living with Parents who attend a member school’s elementary/junior high school for one or more years may be eligible for Varsity Athletic participation upon entering high school.
- Students not Living with Parents may be eligible for Varsity Athletic participation upon review and approval by TAPPS in the following instances:
- If a student’s parents are alive but a guardian of his/her person has been established by the appropriate authority and recorded in the county clerk’s office more than one year prior to application,
- If a student’s parents are alive but no legal guardian of his/her person has been established by the appropriate authority and recorded in the county clerk’s office, guardianship may be established if the student has resided with and been supported by the guardian for more than three (3) years prior to application,
- If a student’s parents are deceased and the student resides with and is supported by grandparents, aunt/uncle or brother/sister for TAPPS eligibility purposes.
- If students are placed in a Boarding Facility, as licensed by the state of Texas as a child care facility. This includes students whose parents who are living or deceased
- Students not residing with Parents at least five (5) days per week must be complete the Student not living with Parent process prior to Varsity participation.
- For purposes of this section,
- the term family member refers to biological or adopted parents, siblings, grandparents, aunts and uncles.
- Cousins and other family members do not qualify for TAPPS purposes.
- The Host family and the Guardian must be the same person
- Previous Athletic Participation Form is required on all students in accordance with Section 104 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- If a change in guardianship occurs, a new Students not Living with Parents Form must be submitted to the TAPPS Executive Board for review and approval. The student will not be eligible for interscholastic participation until such approval is made.
- Regardless of the student’s age, to be eligible for participation in TAPPS, a student must live with
- Parent(s),
- approved relatives,
- approved guardians or
- other approved adults.
Section 81 – High School Graduate
- COMPLETION OF HIGH SCHOOL. A person is considered a high school graduate if that person received a diploma or other certificate signifying successful completion of high school from a high school or other institution of equal or higher rank, participated as a graduate in the graduation exercises of a high school, or complied with the requirements for graduation during a normal four-year program, whether or not the student participated in the graduation exercise.
- GED TESTING PROGRAM. A student who receives an equivalency credential based on the General Education Development Testing Program is not considered a high school graduate, if that student remains in or returns to high school, and has not otherwise met the requirements for high school graduation.
Section 82 – Full-Time Day Student
A person is considered a full-time day student if that person:
- is enrolled in a participant school whose annual contract, dues and fees are current.
- is enrolled in at least four academic classes for which:
- Credit is given toward graduation at the member school and reflected on the student’s transcript; and,
- A grade is given and calculated in overall GPA.
- Courses which satisfy this requirement include:
Core Courses
Bible/Theology/Religion Courses
Fine Arts Courses
Dual Credit
- Courses which do not satisfy this requirement include:
Study Hall
Teacher’s Aide
Courses for which no grade is given
Athletics/PE Courses
- is attending the required classes:
- On the campus of the participant school; or,
- Dual credit courses may be taken on the campus of the participant school, online, or at the location designated by the university.
- PACES or similar Self-Paced Curriculum if approved by the participant school and follows the requirements of section II. above.
- is in compliance with written transfer and admission and attendance policies of the member school.
- A full time student at a TAPPS member school may not be concurrently enrolled in or seeking graduation from another school or homeschool program and/or participate in activities sanctioned by TAPPS on
- A sports team at another school
- A homeschool sports team
- Any other such group organized for interscholastic competition.
Section 83 – Regular Attendance
- A student is in regular attendance even though he or she is absent for ten class days or less after enrolling in school because of illness or other unavoidable cause, if the parent or guardian submits a written statement certifying this as the reason for the absence and the principal approves the absence.
- Students who are not enrolled during the current academic year, at the member school, are ineligible to participate in any extracurricular activity, including, but not limited to off season workouts and spring training.
- A student who drops out of a member school, transfers to another school, becomes homeschooled, or is expelled from a member school must re-establish eligibility at the TAPPS member school by following the transfer guidelines outlined in section 104 of the TAPPS Bylaws in order to participate in varsity athletic competition. This applies to all students, regardless of whether they participated in athletics at the new school/home school.
Section 84 – Four Year Normal Program of High School Courses
- A student may participate in TAPPS contests during a normal program of high school courses over a period of four consecutive calendar years after the student first enrolls in the ninth grade.
- This includes enrollment in a home school, online or other alternative school program.
- Students who never entered the ninth grade but were placed into the tenth grade have three consecutive years from their first entry into tenth grade to complete their high school eligibility.
Section 85 – 8th Grade Participation
- Students not yet in high school may not compete with or against high school students.
- Eighth grade students currently enrolled in another school cannot participate for the member school.
- Contact football camps and spring football practice for eighth grade students not currently enrolled in and attending the member school are not permitted.
- Students in the Seventh and Eighth grade are allowed to participate in the school’s largest musical ensembles in band, fall band, drumline, orchestra and vocal competition. Please see music rules for further clarification.
Section 86 – Participation of Seniors on Junior Varsity Teams
- Seniors (12th graders or students who are playing their last season due to age) may compete on a member school’s junior varsity team(s).
- Seniors (12th graders or students who are playing their last season due to age) may participate on the high school’s sub-varsity teams only if their participation is required in order for the school to field a sub-varsity team.
- The purpose for playing a junior varsity (JV) schedule is to allow younger, inexperienced players the opportunity to participate and gain game condition experience. In some cases, unless one or more seniors are allowed to play on the JV, the school might not have enough players to field a JV team, therefore depriving the younger players an opportunity to play. Member schools should be very careful that seniors playing on the JV are not taking playing time from younger players nor should seniors be included on the JV in order to make the team stronger.
- It should be made clear to the opponent prior to the contest if seniors are participating on the sub-varsity team.
Section 87 – Solicitation of Students
The following rules apply to all TAPPS member schools in regards to high school students and those entering high school. For those TAPPS member schools which provide educational opportunities prior to high school, these rules extend to students in all grades provided at the TAPPS member school.
- SOLICITATION Unlike public schools, our member schools are not aided by geographically drawn attendance zones to provide a given student enrollment base. Families choose private and parochial schools for a variety of reasons other than geographic location, such as religious affiliation, parental participation, class size, academic programs, faculty and staff. For our member schools to survive, it is essential to solicit families to choose one of our member schools to educate their child / children.
- Forms of Acceptable Solicitation
- Billboard Advertising
- Mailings
- Open House
- Campus Visits to feeder schools
- Visits to churches
- Those things that promote the school to prospective families.
- Examples of Unacceptable Solicitation The unacceptable solicitation of students by school personnel, school volunteers, parents, or any other third party is a violation of TAPPS rules and may result in the loss of the affected student’s eligibility to participate in TAPPS events.
- School personnel campus visits targeting athletes
- Mailings to specific athletes or groups of athletes
- Open House for athletes
- Tryouts or combines for athletes
- Those things that target specific students for their athletic ability
- Materials that negatively reflect on other TAPPS member schools
- INDUCEMENT What is not to be included in the solicitation or retention of students is the inducement of students by a member school. The inducement of students by school personnel, school volunteers, parents, or any other third party is a violation of TAPPS rules and may result in the loss of the affected student’s eligibility to participate in TAPPS events. Inducement includes but is not limited to the following:
- Offer or acceptance of the payment of tuition
- Offer or acceptance of a reduction in tuition payments (outside of School Financial Aid Programs)
- Offer or acceptance of board
- Offer or acceptance of lodging
- Offer or acceptance of transportation
- Offer or acceptance of a job for a parent or guardian
- Offer or acceptance of payment for athletic camp registration
- Offer or acceptance of payment for summer conditioning programs, or conditioning camps
- Offer or acceptance of cash payments
- Offer or promise of University or college scholarships
- Offer or acceptance of free or reduced cost private instruction
- Offer or acceptance of any other valuable consideration
- TAMPERING Tampering is not to be included in the solicitation of students by school personnel, school volunteers, parents, or any other third party. Tampering is a violation of TAPPS rules and may result in the loss of the affected student’s eligibility to participate in TAPPS events. Tampering occurs when any of the aforementioned people directly or indirectly
- Entices
- Induces
- Persuades
- Recruits
- Targets for athletic purposes
- Or attempts to entice, induce, persuade, recruit or target any student to attend a TAPPS member school while the student is registered at another school.
Section 88 – Burden of Proof for Eligibility
If a student’s eligibility to compete in a TAPPS contest is questioned, the student has the burden in any proceeding to establish that he or she is eligible.
Section 89 – Burden of Proof in Allegations of Violations
If at any level, it is determined that a complaint or report of a violation has enough validity to hold a hearing, the burden to disprove the allegation rests with the accused.
Section 90 – Denial to Renew Membership
Being that Article III.6 states the executive management, control, and final authority of this association belong to the Executive Board; and being that the Executive Board votes each year whether to accept or deny any school desiring membership into TAPPS by application or contract renewal; the TAPPS Board reserves the right to deny membership to any school that it determines has brought discredit to the integrity of TAPPS or is a detriment to the good reputation of the TAPPS organization.
(Section 91 reserved for expansion.)
Section 92 – Eligibility for Fine Art Contests
Subject to the other sections of this Subchapter, an individual is eligible to participate in a TAPPS academic/art contest fine art contests as a representative of a participant school if that individual meets all the requirements set forth in the TAPPS Constitution and By-Laws.
(Sections 93-101 reserved for expansion.)
Section 97 – Eligibility for Music Contests
Subject to the other sections of this subchapter, an individual is eligible to participate in a TAPPS music contest as a representative of a participating school if that individual meets all the requirements of the TAPPS Constitution and By-Laws.
(Sections 98-101 reserved for expansion.)
Section 102 – Eligibility of Foreign Students
For the purpose of establishing a student’s eligibility to participate in TAPPS sponsored activities, any student who is not a citizen of the United States must be approved by the process defined in Section 102 of the TAPPS Bylaws prior to participation. The student’s eligibility will not begin until TAPPS approval. Schools should forward application and information to the TAPPS office when students first attend the school in order to begin the approval process.
- Foreign Students must meet the following guidelines to be considered for eligibility at TAPPS member schools:
- Has produced a copy of a valid visa.
- Has not received advanced training (defined as training which is above and beyond that which is normally provided in TAPPS schools) in the germane activity, such as pre-Olympic training, being nationally ranked or having similar status in a sport (home country or United States, or participation on a national team.
- School may appeal to the Executive Board for relief from this provision
- Relief would be limited to one exception per school year
- A one year sit out period would be required of any student being granted eligibility to participate in TAPPS activities
- Has met the eligibility requirements as outlined in Article V of the TAPPS Constitution.
- Has not graduated from high school or other school of equal or higher status.
- Initially enrolled in the ninth grade not more than four (4) years ago or tenth grade not more than three years ago.
- Is a full time, day student at the certified member school.
- $30 fee will be charged for each submission.
- Foreign Students are ineligible if they have been induced for athletic purposes to come to or remain at a member school. Inducement includes but is not limited to the following:
- Offer or acceptance of the payment of tuition;
- Offer or acceptance of board;
- Offer or acceptance of lodging;
- Offer or acceptance of transportation;
- Offer or acceptance of a job for parent(s) or student;
- Offer or acceptance of the payment of athletic fees;
- Offer or acceptance of the payment of athletic camp registration and fees.
- Payment of cash;
- Promise of a University or College scholarship;
- Reduction of entry requirements of member school;
- Use of outside agents or agencies that are connected (i.e. school, parents or school personnel employed by agent or agency) to enrolling school to locate students, pay tuition, payment of athletic fees, provide or arrange board, lodging and/ or transportation; and
- Any other valuable consideration.
- FOREIGN EXCHANGE STUDENTS
- Foreign Exchange Students are students who are certified through a Council on Standards for International Educational Travel (CSIET) United States Foreign Exchange Program.
- Students may qualify as Foreign Exchange Students for only one year during their academic career for eligibility purposes. This includes attendance at TAPPS member schools and nonmember schools.
- Students are eligible for one year, provided they are enrolled at and attend a certified member school.
- They are under the age of 19 prior to September 1 of the current school year.
- They may not have graduated in their own country.
- FOREIGN RESIDENT STUDENTS residing with family members.
- Students who reside with a family member must apply and be approved prior to competition.
- For TAPPS eligibility purposes, the term family members includes Parents, Grandparents, Aunts and Uncles, Brothers and Sisters.
- Cousins and other family members do not qualify as family members for TAPPS eligibility purposes.
- If a court has appointed guardianship of the minor to a guardian(s), the guardian shall be considered as parent and eligibility shall begin with approval by TAPPS.
- A Power of Attorney or Notarized Statement of Guardianship does not change the status of the guardian to family member.
- Upon approval of the Foreign Student Committee, students residing with a family member may be granted immediate VARSITY eligibility without having to sit out a year.
- If at any time the student ceases to reside with a family member and resides with a guardian who is not a family member as described above, the student’s varsity eligibility status is suspended until approval is granted by the Foreign Student Committee.
- If a change in guardianship occurs, a Change in Guardianship form must be submitted to the TAPPS office for review and approval. The student will not be eligible for varsity participation until such approval is made.
- FOREIGN RESIDENT STUDENTS residing IN TAPPS APPROVED BOARDING PROGRAMS - Foreign Students who are enrolled and attend a boarding school are under the same guidelines as Citizen Students, provided the boarding school at which they are enrolled and attending is a certified member school.
- Boarding Schools are schools that have been identified by the TAPPS Board as being a boarding school.
- Boarding Schools must apply to the TAPPS Executive Board to be identified as such.
- FOREIGN RESIDENT STUDENTS residing with GUARDIAN - Foreign Students who live in the United States with someone other than immediate family members (The Host family and the Guardian must be the same person) are eligible to participate at the Varsity level provided the approval process has been completed .
- A Previous Athletic Participation Form is required on all students in accordance with Section 104 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- If a change in guardianship occurs, a Change in Guardianship form must be submitted to the TAPPS office for review and approval. The student will not be eligible for varsity participation until such approval is made.
- Schools enrolling Foreign Students should review the information posted on the TAPPS website.
Section 103 – Amateur Athletic Status
An amateur participates in athletics for the aesthetic, physical, mental, and social benefits derived there from. Therefore, the purpose of such participation is playing for the intrinsic rewards rather than for valuable consideration. The amateur rule is a safeguard against exploitation and commercialization of high school students. It poses a responsibility on the student at all times (whether in school or outside school) to abide by the letter and intent of amateurism. Schools are charged with the responsibility of informing students of all applicable subsections of this rule and enforcing this rule. Administrators and coaches must ensure that athletes receive only services specifically permitted by written rule. Any breach of the rule undermines the educational goals of interscholastic athletics.
- NOT AN AMATEUR. For purposes of competing in an athletic contest, a student in grades 9-12 is not an amateur if that individual, within the preceding 12 months received money or other valuable consideration for participating in a TAPPS sponsored school sport or received valuable consideration for allowing his or her name to be used in promoting a product, plan, or service related to a TAPPS contest or accepted money or other valuable consideration from school booster club funds for any non-school purpose.
- EXCEPTIONS:
- Seniors may sign a letter of intent or scholarship agreement which contains the conditions of a scholarship with a post-secondary institution.
- For purposes of competing in an athletic contest, the participant school, school district or a student’s parent(s) may provide medical examination and services, athletic insurance, transportation and other travel expenses incurred in competing away from home, or supplies and services during and in connection with a game or practice period.
- Participant schools may permit student athletes to attend contests by permit admission through a pass gate.
- STATUS REGAINED. If a student did not realize that accepting the valuable consideration was a violation of the amateur rule, and returns the valuable consideration within 30 days after being informed of the violation, that student may regain athletic eligibility as of the date the valuable consideration is returned. If a student fails to return it within 30 days, that student remains ineligible for one year from when he or she accepted it. During the period of time a student is in possession of valuable consideration, he or she is ineligible for all varsity athletic competition. Any games or contests in which the student participated during that time may be forfeited as the minimum penalty.
- TEAM VIOLATION. If the team violates this section, the penalty shall be assessed against the team and not against each individual.
Section 104 – Transfer Rule
Purpose of the Transfer Rule
- The TAPPS Transfer Rule
- has been developed to protect, not inhibit students who wish to participate in interscholastic competition.
- is preventative and is devised to eliminate the incentive to transfer schools once a student (family) has initially enrolled in and attended a school of their choice.
- is designed to protect students who have previously participated in interscholastic competition at any school from being replaced by students who transfer for athletic or other purposes, including the effects of student, or family, shopping for schools or being recruited for athletic purposes.
- encourages fair play, discourages the abuses of overenthusiastic promotion of school programs, and protects the integrity of interscholastic athletic programs for both member schools and the TAPPS organization.
- Transfer Rule Application
- All students transferring to a TAPPS member school must complete the Transfer Process to establish eligibility.
- The transfer rules apply to all students who attended traditional schools, participated with Home School teams, or any other such team organized for interscholastic competition.
- Transferring students may not participate in any interscholastic competition (Scrimmage, Sub-Varsity or Varsity) until the transfer process is complete and the student is approved by the TAPPS OFFICE.
- The eligibility roster for all sports in which a student will participate, along with the completed transfer form, shall be on file with the TAPPS State Office before the transferring student is eligible to participate in any level interscholastic competition.
- Transfer Deadlines
- Transfer Deadlines are posted on the approved TAPPS calendar located on the TAPPS website. The transfer deadlines are included on the calendar for
- Fall
- Winter
- Spring
- In order to be eligible to compete in a given season, the student must be
- Withdrawn from the previous school
- Enrolled in the new school and
- in attendance at the new school prior to or on the date of the Transfer Deadline for that season.
- Senior Transfer Deadline
- Students transferring to a new school for their senior year must be withdrawn from their previous school, enrolled and attending the new school by the date shown on the TAPPS calendar.
- The senior transfer deadline applies to all activities throughout the school year.
- If a senior transferring student arrives at the new school after the date shown on the TAPPS calendar, an appeal can be made to the TAPPS Executive Board by completion of the Senior Transfer Appeal Form along with payment of any fees owed.
- Transfer Rule Process and Procedures
- The approval process cannot begin until the student is
- enrolled at the new school and
- withdrawn from the previous school.
- For students who transfer to a member school during the school year, the transfer process must be initiated within two weeks of their first day of attendance at the new school.
- The Transfer Process begins with the completion of the student profile in the TAPPS database.
- All students transferring to a new school
- must complete the Student Transfer Form in the TAPPS database.
- must complete a Previous Athletic Participation Form if they participated in athletics at a previous school during the current or previous school year.
- if the student participated in a sport in either sub-varsity (JV) or varsity in the 9th, 10th, 11th, or 12th grade during the current or previous school year.
- Participation includes practices
- held before the beginning of school for Fall Activities
- in Cross Country, Fall Soccer, Football and Volleyball.
- If the new student did not compete either during the current or the previous school year, a PAPF is not required.
- TAPPS must approve the student’s participation prior to the student participating at any level at the new school. Approval shall be made through the TAPPS database.
- Prior to approval by the TAPPS office
- The student may practice or participate in off season activities.
- The students may not participate in any interscholastic competition (Scrimmage, Sub-Varsity or Varsity) until the transfer process is complete and the student is approved by the TAPPS OFFICE.
- Please see Article VII of the TAPPS Constitution for the definition of participation.
- The TAPPS office shall review the STF and PAPF (if required) to determine the student’s eligibility
- If questions arise,
- the TAPPS office shall notify the school for clarification.
- A letter of explanation or other documents as requested shall be provided to the TAPPS office.
- The TAPPS office shall notify district schools of the Transfer Student approval.
- Approval by the TAPPS office or district committee does not preclude additional review of the student’s eligibility by TAPPS should additional information be presented regarding the student’s previous participation or compliance with eligibility standards
- If any district school raises an objection,
- The district president shall notify the TAPPS office
- a district meeting may be held in order to determine the student’s eligibility as determined by the TAPPS office
- The student will not be eligible until the meeting is held and eligibility is determined.
- After a district hearing, any party to the decision may appeal the decision to the TAPPS Executive board by completing the Appeal Form and the payment of any required fees.
- Previous Student / New School Personnel Interaction
- A student who transfers to a TAPPS member school shall not be eligible for Varsity competition in a sport for a period of one year if:
- a coach in that sport at the new school coached or trained the student at the previous school during the previous 12 months.
- a coach in that sport at the new school coached or trained the student on an AAU, select, club, 7 on 7, 6 on 6 or similar team during the previous 12 months.
- a coach at the new school provided individual or group instruction to the student during the previous 12 months.
- a coach at the new school provided skills training, fitness training, personal training or other such training to the student during the previous 12 months.
- EXCEPTION to the rule:
- Adopted or birth children are eligible if their parent who is the coach changes schools.
- If the previous school attended by the student and coach has closed, the above rule does not apply.
- Camps as defined in section 1, hosted by a member school are not subject to this rule.
- Removal of the coach after the student contact with the school does not provide relief from this section.
- Summer Participation
- Participation in the following activities
- Sand Volleyball, 6 on 6 or 7 on 7
- Including leagues ot tournaments
- The student must be withdrawn from the previous school and fully enrolled in new school prior to practices or contests with the new school
- Ineligible at the Previous Schools
- Students ineligible at the previous school cannot regain immediate eligibility at the new school without the approval of TAPPS.
- If a student has been placed in an ALTERNATIVE SCHOOL or similar scholastic setting for disciplinary reasons by the previous school district, the student is not eligible to participate in TAPPS activities until the length of the alternative school placement has been served at the new school.
- If a student has been expelled from the previous school, the student is not eligible to participate in TAPPS activities until the following school year.
- If a student has been removed from an activity or team by the previous school, TAPPS shall determine the student’s eligibility to participate at the new school in accordance with the new school’s published guidelines.
Section 105 – Eligibility Forms
- Eligibility Forms for TAPPS are due each year and must be submitted to the TAPPS Office PRIOR to interscholastic competition in each
- Sport, including
- Tournaments or meets hosted by schools
- Tournaments or meets hosted for high school participation
- Fine Arts competition.
- Schools should list all high school students participating in the activity (both varsity and sub-varsity) should be listed.
- Separate forms should be submitted for boys and girls sports. For co-ed activities, a separate list is not necessary.
- For students who may be added for participation after the initial eligibility report has been filed:
- Add the STUDENT to the ACTIVITY ROSTER
- Save the ROSTER
- The Eligibility Form will be automatically updated to reflect the addition.
Section 106 – Proof of Age
- A date of birth shall be denoted as that which is entered on the student’s birth.
- TAPPS shall recognize a birth certificate as presented from
- a recognized authority of the State of Texas or
- other such governing body authorized to issue birth certificates for their citizens of their jurisdiction in keeping with Section 1
- If no birth certificate is available, other credible evidence may be submitted for review. The TAPPS Executive Board shall determine if such evidence meets acceptable standards for application.
Subchapter L Awards
Section 107 – Limitations of Awards
- A participant school may give awards such as letter jackets, letter sweaters, blankets, individual letters, patches, rings, watches, trophies, medals, plaques, or certificates for participation in TAPPS activities. Cash awards are not permitted.
- AMATEUR STATUS. See Section 103 for rules governing amateur athletic status.
- INDIRECT AWARD. An award given to a second party to be held for later delivery to the student is considered received by the student when the award is given to the second party. This conduct is a violation by the participant school or school district.
(Sections 108-110 reserved for expansion.)
Subchapter M – Records
Section 111 – Open Records
- As a non-profit, private association, that receives no federal or state funding, the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools (TAPPS) is not subject to the Texas Public Information Act (Open Records Act), Chapter 552 of the Government Code.
- The Director shall collect, assemble, and maintain all records of official TAPPS business within the TAPPS State Office and, except as otherwise provided by law, all information so collected, assembled, or maintained by TAPPS in connection with its transaction of official business is public information under the provisions of the Open Records Act and is available for public inspection and disclosure during normal business hours.
- The above named materials, records and documents are available only on a “need to know” basis.
- The TAPPS Executive Board shall determine which individual(s) or groups have a “need to know”.
Section 112 – Requests for Inspection of Records
- NOTICE. A request to inspect TAPPS records must be made with reasonable prior notice in writing.
- PROPER IDENTIFICATION. A person requesting to inspect TAPPS records must establish proper identification and a need to know.
- PRODUCTION BY DIRECTOR. The Director shall upon written request produce information for inspection or duplication. If a requested record is in storage, the Director shall notify the requesting party in writing and shall set a time when the record will be available.
- NO REMOVAL OF RECORDS. No person shall remove an original record from the offices of TAPPS.
- PRODUCTION COSTS. Any expense incurred in the reproduction, preparation or retrieval of records shall be paid by the person requesting the record at the rate of $1.00 per page.
- MAILING CHARGES. TAPPS may, at the rate of $1.00 per page, mail upon request reproduced records to any person who so requests, and has a need to know. If TAPPS mails the requested records, a charge for postage may be included in the charge for reproduction.
- COSTS OF COMPUTERIZED DOCUMENTS PRODUCTION. Requests for documents or records kept by TAPPS on computer will be billed at the rate of $1.00 per page.
Section 113 – Contest Records
Each school year, the Director shall collect, assemble, maintain and publish the previous year’s list of the winners of the TAPPS state contests.
(Sections 114-117 reserved for expansion.)
Subchapter N – Publications
Section 118 – TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules
The Director shall publish the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules, and all amendments thereto shall be posted to the TAPPS website upon approval of the TAPPS Executive Board.
Section 119 – TAPPS News Briefs
- The Director shall post new/current and updated material on the TAPPS web site.
- OFFICIAL INTERPRETATIONS. The Director shall post on the TAPPS website, the TAPPS Executive Board’s Official Interpretations of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules.
- TAPPS EXECUTIVE BOARD ORDERS. The Director shall post on the TAPPS website, any other written order of the TAPPS Executive Board when the order requests such distribution.
- DISTRICT EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE ABSTRACTS. The Director may post on the TAPPS website, abstracts of written orders of district executive committees in cases when the orders request such distribution.
- OTHER MATTERS: DISCLAIMER. The Director may post any other writing submitted for distribution, but only with appropriate and prominently displayed disclaimers that the writing does not constitute, under the provisions of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules, an Official Interpretation or an official staff interpretation.
- PARTICIPANT SCHOOLS, MEMBERS, DISTRICTS PENALTIES. The Director shall post at least annually on the TAPPS website, the list of participant schools, member school districts, and contest districts that are currently being penalized.
- SCHOOL PERSONNEL PENALTIES. The Director shall post at least annually on the TAPPS website, the list of school district personnel who are currently being publicly penalized.
Section 120 – Forms
The Director shall publish to the TAPPS website or other landing page all forms required under the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules.
Section 121 – Other Publications
The Director may publish other documents that are necessary or desirable for the activities of TAPPS.
Section 122 – Publication Charges
Except as otherwise provided above, the Director shall establish and charge reasonable prices for all TAPPS publications.
(Sections 123-126 reserved for expansion.)
Subchapter O – Finances
Section 127 – Annual Report
This section involves policies of the TAPPS Executive Board.
- SUBMISSION OF ANNUAL REPORT, BUDGET. The TAPPS Director annually prepares a report on the financial and programmatic conditions and activities of TAPPS and a budget for the next year and submits them to the TAPPS Executive Board.
- APPROVAL OF BUDGET REQUIRED. The TAPPS budget shall be approved by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- AUDIT. All of the financial affairs of TAPPS are audited in accordance with the policies of TAPPS Executive Board.
- AUTHORIZED EXPENDITURES. All expenditures of TAPPS funds shall be authorized consistent with the rules, regulations, and practices of the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws, and Contest Rules, and the TAPPS Executive Board.
Section 128 – Sources of Income
TAPPS sources of income are as follows:
- membership dues (based on the school overall classification)
- 1A $400
- 2A $450
- 3A $500
- 4A $550
- 5A $600
- 6A $650
- event fees (a fee is charges for each activity entered);
- contest fees ( an entry fee may be charged for those events designated by the Executive Board);
- publication sales (programs);
- filing fees (new school applications, appeals, etc);
- admission – gate, at the prices established by the Executive Board;
- proceeds from radio and television broadcasting and telecasting contracts;
- merchandise sales; and
- income from advertising and licensing the use of trademarks and logos.
Section 129 – Media
It is the intent of the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools (TAPPS) to provide media access to the TAPPS Regional and State events. TAPPS understands that different media concerns have different needs and attempts to address those concerns as follows.
- CREDENTIALED MEDIA PERSONNEL
- Approval
- Submit MEDIA REQUEST FORM
- Must be approved prior to event.
- Limitations
- Media Personnel are limited to four (4) people per recognized media outlet
- Includes Print, Photography, Digital and Video Media
- Access
- Pass grants admission to event
- Floor or Field access as allowed by event host
- Pass may be revoked by TAPPS Administrator
- SCHOOL MEDIA
- Approval
- Submit SCHOOL MEDIA REQUEST FORM
- Must be approved prior to event.
- Limitations
- School Media are limited to two (2) people per school
- Includes Print, Photography, Digital and Video Media
- Access
- Pass does not grant admission to event
- Floor or Field access limited to designated areas
- Pass may be revoked by TAPPS Administrator
- ON SITE PHOTOGRAPHY
- TAPPS does not recognize one official photographer for TAPPS events. Those wishing to work events shall:
- Complete the MEDIA REQUEST FORM found on the TAPPS website under the forms tab.
- Submit the form to the TAPPS office for approval prior to the event.
- Make payment to TAPPS in the amount of $150. per event.
- Baseball and Softball are considered two (2) separate events.
- FLASH PHOTOGRAPHY
- The use of electronic flash equipment is prohibited at all indoor events.
- The use of a strobe flash is allowed.
- If either team head coach, or event director at individual sport events, request strobe flash be discontinued, their request shall be honored.
- RADIO
- If permitted by TAPPS for the event.
- Radio broadcasts, whether over air or internet, are limited to one per team per game.
- Each station or broadcaster will be limited to two (2) media passes per game.
- TAPPS does not guarantee power, phone or internet access at the event sites.
- Upon approval, Broadcasters should contact the event host if additional resources are necessary upon approval from the TAPPS office.
- To Broadcast a TAPPS game, the following steps apply:
- Complete the MEDIA REQUEST FORM found on the TAPPS website under the FORMS tab.
- Submit the form to the TAPPS office for approval prior to the event.
- Make payment to TAPPS in the amount of
- Live Broadcast $300 per game
- Delayed Broadcast $150 per game
- Baseball and Softball are considered two (2) separate events.
- INTERNET RADIO BROADCASTS
- If permitted by TAPPS for the event.
- Radio broadcasts, whether over air or internet, are limited to one per team per game.
- Each station or broadcaster will be limited to two (2) media passes per game.
- TAPPS does not guarantee power, phone or internet access at the event sites.
- Upon approval, Broadcasters should contact the event host if additional resources are necessary upon approval from the TAPPS office.
- To Broadcast a TAPPS game, the following steps apply:
- Complete the MEDIA REQUEST FORM found on the TAPPS website under the FORMS tab.
- Submit the form to the TAPPS office for approval prior to the event.
- Make payment to TAPPS in the amount of
- Live Broadcast $300 per game
- Delayed Broadcast $150 per game
- Baseball and Softball are considered two (2) separate events.
- TELEVISION
- If permitted by TAPPS for the event.
- Television broadcasts limited to one per team per game if approved TAPPS.
- Each station or broadcaster will be limited to four (4) media passes per game.
- TAPPS does not guarantee power, phone or internet access at the event sites.
- Upon approval, Broadcasters should contact the event host if additional resources are necessary upon approval from the TAPPS office.
- To Broadcast a TAPPS game, the following steps apply:
- Complete the MEDIA REQUEST FORM found on the TAPPS website under the FORMS tab.
- Submit the form to the TAPPS office for approval prior to the event.
- Make payment to TAPPS in the amount of
- Live Broadcast (per TAPPS approval) $600 per game
- Delayed Broadcast $200 per game
- Baseball and Softball are considered two (2) separate events
- INTERNET VIDEO BROADCASTS
- If permitted by TAPPS for the event.
- Internet video broadcasts,are limited to one per team per game.
- Each station or broadcaster will be limited to two (4) media passes per game.
- TAPPS does not guarantee power, phone or internet access at the event sites.
- Upon approval, Broadcasters should contact the event host if additional resources are necessary upon approval from the TAPPS office.
- To Broadcast a TAPPS game, the following steps apply:
- Complete the MEDIA REQUEST FORM found on the TAPPS website under the FORMS tab.
- Submit the form to the TAPPS office for approval prior to the event.
- Make payment to TAPPS in the amount of
- Live Broadcast $600 per event.
- Delayed Broadcast $300 per event
- Baseball and Softball are considered two (2) separate events
- VIDEOTAPES, CDs, DVD or other DIGITAL MEDIA
- If permitted by TAPPS for the event.
- Video, CD, DVD, and Digital Media,are limited as necessary by TAPPS.
- Entity will be limited to four (4) media passes per game.
- TAPPS does not guarantee power, phone or internet access at the event sites.
- Upon approval, Broadcasters should contact the event host if additional resources are necessary upon approval from the TAPPS office.
- To Broadcast a TAPPS game, the following steps apply:
- Complete the MEDIA REQUEST FORM found on the TAPPS website under the FORMS tab.
- Submit the form to the TAPPS office for approval prior to the event.
- Make payment to TAPPS in the amount of
- Event Fee $100 per event.
- Additional Fees 15% of Gross Sales
- Baseball and Softball are considered two (2) separate events
- INTERNET MAGAZINES / SITES / MESSAGE BOARDS
- If permitted by TAPPS for the event.
- TAPPS will consider requests on an individual basis. Those wishing to work events shall:
- Complete the MEDIA REQUEST FORM found on the TAPPS website under the FORMS tab.
- Submit the form to the TAPPS office for approval prior to the event.
- Make payment to TAPPS in the amount of $150. per event.
- Baseball and Softball are considered two (2) separate events.
- FLASH PHOTOGRAPHY
- The use of electronic flash equipment is prohibited at all indoor events.
- The use of a strobe flash is allowed.
- If either team head coach, or event director at individual sport events, request strobe flash be discontinued, their request shall be honored.
- The following sites will not be granted media credentials:
- Personal page internet site publishers
- Paid Subscription-based internet sites
- Internet sites associated in any way with the promotion of alcohol, tobacco, gambling, political election issues/candidates or lewd subject matter as determined by TAPPS,
- Any site determined by TAPPS to be in poor taste or out of compliance with the TAPPS mission
- Sites that do not produce original content on a daily basis. These sites are at the discretion of TAPPS.
- TAPPS USAGE – TAPPS will be provided with
- up to 15 Digital images,
- a complete copy of any DVD or similar instrument ,
- and free access to any live or delayed broadcast.
- NOTIFICATION TO MEDIA – TAPPS member schools shall
- notify local media of these requirements,
- insure payment will be made to TAPPS for all broadcasts if broadcast is initiated by the schools involved.
- CONTRACTS
- Contracts for photography, radio, TV or video for sale must be made through the Director at the TAPPS State office.
- FEES All fees shall be
- PAID IN FULL prior to event
- FEES are paid to TAPPS.
Athletic Bylaws - Sections 130-198
Subchapter A - Athletic Plan
Section 130 – Purpose of High School Athletics
NOTE: Rules that list the sport or sports to which they apply shall apply only to the sport(s) listed.
The purposes of the athletic program for the participant schools are:
- to assist, advise and aid the private and parochial schools in organizing and conducting interscholastic athletics;
- to devise and prepare eligibility rules that will equalize and stimulate wholesome competition between schools of similar size, and reinforce the curriculum;
- to regulate competition so that students, schools, and their fans can secure the greatest educational, social, recreational and aesthetic benefits from the contests;
- to reinforce the concept to all participant schools that athletics is an integral part of the educational program;
- to preserve the game for the overall benefit of the contestant and not sacrifice the contestant to the game;
- to promote the spirit of good sportsmanship and fair play in all contests;
- to promote among the players, schools and fans a spirit of friendly rivalry and a respect for the rules; and
- to forward the concept of accepting decisions of sports officials without protest and treating officials as co-partners in the educational process of competition.
Section 131 – Athletic Codes
The Athletic Code and the Athletic Code for Coaches carry the force of rule. Member schools, participant schools and/or covered school district personnel who violate any of the provisions of these codes will be subject to penalty.
- THE ATHLETIC CODE. The general Athletic Code means to:
- Play the game in the spirit of fairness and sportsmanship, observing all rules, both in letter and intent.
- Coach and sponsor the teams and individuals without resorting to unethical tactics, trickery which attempts to skirt the rules, or any unfair tactic which detracts from sound educational principles.
- Accept decisions of sports and school officials without protest, and without questioning their honesty or integrity, and extend protection and courtesy to sports officials from participants, school personnel, and spectators remembering that officials are guests.
- Regard opponents as guests, putting clean play and good sportsmanship above victory at any cost. Win without boast and lose without bitterness. Victory is important, but the most important thing in sports is striving to excel and the positive feelings it fosters between those who play fair and have no excuse when they lose. The development of re-creative aspects and positive human relations should be stressed in all competitions.
- Provide information or evidence as soon as possible regarding eligibility of any contestant or school to the local administration, then to the proper district executive committee. To withhold information is considered dishonorable and contrary to good sportsmanship. Schools guilty of violating this section may be subject to penalty as described in Sections 23 and 25 including disqualification from district honors in the germane activity. Covered school district personnel guilty of violating this section may be subject to the range of penalties as described in Sections 23 and 25.
- Not provide inducement for athletic purposes. Inducement means to encourage a student to change schools for the purpose of participating in TAPPS activities by offering the student or the student’s parent cash, waiver of tuition, board or lodging, transportation, a job, or other valuable consideration to induce the student to enroll in a participant school.
- Avoid tampering with students whether the student is enrolled in a TAPPS or other school.
- THE ATHLETIC CODE FOR COACHES. The code for athletic sponsors includes the principles described in Subsection 131 and the purposes listed in Section 130. Further, the coach’s code includes:
- Being aware of, understanding, and following all rules governing the competition for which the coach is responsible.
- Informing one’s immediate supervisor in writing the next school day after a contest if ejected from that contest for unsportsmanlike actions, or, in football, if given two 15-yard unsportsmanlike penalties during one contest, knowing that such conduct requires automatic penalty
- Abstaining from removing the team from the contest in protest.
- Treating athletes based on what is best for the education, general welfare, and health of the student.
- Professional loyalty to other coaches.
- Adhering to in season and out of season practice regulations.
- Adhering to policies which do not force athletes to specialize or restrict them from participation in other sports.
- Allowing students to participate in one school sport without requiring, as a prerequisite, participation in another school sport.
- Abstaining from any practice which would bring financial gain to the coach by using a student’s participation in a camp, clinic, league, or other non-school athletic event, such as a rebate for each player sent to a particular camp or from each player using a particular product. Coaches shall not charge a fee for private instruction to student athletes during the school year. The restriction on charging fees for private instruction applies only to those students who are:
- in grades 9-12;
- from the coach’s school; and
- participating in the sport for which the coach is responsible.
- Abstaining from any practice that makes a student feel pressured to participate in non-school activities.
- Avoiding any coaching practice which would endanger the welfare or safety of any player.
- Emphasizing the academic progress of all participants by a regular, documented check of their academic standing, both in season and out of season.
- Scheduling games and practices to avoid unnecessary loss of study or class time.
- Utilizing the best and most current teaching, coaching, and training methods through affiliation with professional associations and publications.
- Abstaining from any practice that solicits teachers to modify a participant student’s grade for eligibility purposes.
- Avoiding any actions that encourage, condone, or tolerate the use of performance enhancing drugs by any student athlete.
- Emphasizing a chemical awareness program that informs and educates students of the damaging effects of anabolic steroids and other illegal drugs.
- Disclosing to opposing schools any known conflict of interest with an assigned sports official prior to a contest.
- All coaches with less than five (5) years coaching experience in either public or private schools must complete the NFHS Fundamentals of Coaching course prior to coaching at a TAPPS member school. See Section 138.
- Individuals who are under suspension or are ineligible to coach in recognized athletic leagues (TAPPS, UIL, NCAA, etc.) are not eligible to participate in TAPPS as Athletic Director, Coach, Assistant Coach or other such capacity, whether paid or unpaid for these services.
- Intentional Participation of Ineligible Student
- If a coach knowingly and intentionally allows participation by an ineligible player, sanctions include, but not limited, to the following:
- forfeiture of all games in which player participated;
- removal of team from playoffs;
- public reprimand and
- probation for coach and school.
- Coach is suspended for a minimum of
- 5 games in football and
- 10 games in all other team sports,
- subject to review by TAPPS leadership
- Suspensions will carry over to the next season if necessary.
- A team sport tournament counts as 2 games.
- Suspensions in individual sports will be for 5 events, excluding dual matches.
Section 132 – School Authority
- SCHOOL AUTHORITY RESPONSIBLE. Responsibility for the proper administration, contracts, arrangements, control and scheduling of athletic contests in all member schools shall be under the supervision of the superintendent or a designated administrator.
- PREVIOUS SUSPENSION. The TAPPS Executive Board shall forfeit any contest won by an individual or school if it finds a school employee previously suspended under Section 23 participated on behalf of the individual or school in the contest plan while prohibited from doing so under order of the TAPPS Executive Board.
- COACH OR ADULT SUPERVISOR. No student shall represent his or her school at any time in connection with TAPPS competition unless accompanied by a coach or another appointed member of the school faculty. The coach or sponsor must have completed TEaMs and training for the activity in question. Exception: A non-school employee may serve as the adult supervisor of students when appointed by the administrator in areas where no coaching/directing takes place. These individuals may provide the transportation to and from the activity and be responsible for the supervision of participants.
- PROFESSIONAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT FORM. All personnel coaching in grades 9-12 shall sign a Professional Acknowledgement Form prior to the beginning of their coaching responsibilities each school year. These forms shall be on file in the superintendent’s office or designated location at the TAPPS member school.
Section 133 – Duties of Athletic District Executive Committee
- DISTRICT ORGANIZATION. Refer to Section 24 for general responsibilities.
- PRINCIPLES. The district executive committee shall uphold the principle that high school athletics, when properly controlled, are worthwhile and educational.
- RECRUITING/INDUCEMENT/TAMPERING. Refer to Section 87 for specific information. The district executive committee may investigate (as directed by the TAPPS Executive Board or staff) any efforts to induce players for athletic purposes. Inducement and tampering are violations and may subject the school at fault to disqualification. Disqualification may be made by the committee after the school has been given an opportunity to be heard. A school in violation shall remain disqualified for the period of time specified as recommended by the district and determined by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- SCHEDULING.
- The district executive committee shall arrange a schedule to determine district representatives prior to the deadline specified in the current TAPPS calendar.
- The district and regional executive committees shall refer to the TAPPS calendar and shall avoid scheduling district contests on the same dates as TAPPS Regional and State contests in other activities, including Fine Arts activities.
- CERTIFICATION OF DISTRICT REPRESENTATIVES. The district president shall certify in writing, eligible district representatives in all athletic activities by the date directed on the TAPPS playoffs calendar. Failure to submit timely and accurate information may result in disqualification of the district from the playoffs. The district president must certify eligible representatives without any conditions attached to this certification. In case of dispute, certification to the TAPPS State Office shall be in the form of a written notice naming the eligible schools and must be signed by the majority of the district executive committee.
- DISTRICT DISQUALIFICATION. All teams in a TAPPS district shall be disqualified in the playoffs if the district executive committee knowingly certifies a team which has used an ineligible player in any district game unless appropriate action has been taken. Disqualification shall be determined by the TAPPS Executive Board only upon presentation of sufficient evidence.
- ZONES. Refer to Section 24. Districts which subdivide into zones for team sports shall determine district representation. If no other plan is agreed to prior to the season, representatives shall be determined by cross-playing the number 1 teams in each zone against the number 2 teams in each zone. The winners of these two inter-zone games (matches) shall be the district representatives. District executive committees shall determine in writing before the season which teams will be the number 1 and number 2 teams from the district in the event both number 2 teams or both number 1 teams win the inter-zone games. If four teams advance in the playoffs, the top two teams from each zone shall play to determine district ranking 1 through 4.
- TIES. The district executive committee shall determine in writing prior to the season the method to determine the district representatives in the event two or more schools are tied in win/loss percentages. If the district executive committee has not provided a procedure prior to the season, the following tie breaker procedures shall apply:
- For Team Sports Playing A Single Round-Robin Format:
- Two Teams Tied In Percentage For First Place. The team that defeated the other in head-to-head competition will be the winner. The other team will be the runner-up.
- Three Teams Tied in Percentage For First Place.
- Step 1: If one of the teams defeated the other two, that team is the champion. The other teams flip to determine the second place team.
- Step 2: If none of the three defeated the other two, flip (odd coin is the winner, the other two flip again to determine runner-up).
- Step 3: If the tie is three-way for second place in the district and none of the three has beaten the other two, flip (odd coin wins the runner-up spot).
- Four Teams Tied In Percentage for First Place.
- Step 1: If one of the teams has defeated the other three, that team is the winner. The other three teams then flip (odd coin wins the runner-up spot).
- Step 2: If none of the four has defeated the other three, the four teams have a blind draw for the winner and the runner-up. Teams who win the draw are the playoff representatives.
- Four Teams Tied in Percentage for Second (Or Third) Place.
- Step 1: If one team has defeated the other three, that team is second (or third) place. If none of the remaining three schools has defeated the other two, then the teams will draw for third place.
- Step 2: If none of the four has defeated the other three, then the four teams have a blind draw for the winner. The team who wins the draw is the runner-up.
- For Team Sports Playing A Double Round-Robin Format.
- Two Teams Tied in Percentage. The team that defeated the other in head-to-head competition will be the winner. If the season competition is split, the two teams shall play one game or match (if rules permit).
- Three Teams Tied In Percentage. Teams play a district tournament. A draws bye; B plays C and C wins; C plays A. If A wins, C is the district runner-up. If C wins, A plays B for runner-up spot.
- Four Teams Tied in Percentage. Teams play a district tournament. Draw for spots. A plays C; B plays D. Winners of the first games play for championship; the loser is the runner-up.
- More Than Four Teams Tied In Percentage. Teams play a district tournament.
- Three Teams Tied In Percentage For Runner-Up. Teams play a tournament. A draws bye; B plays C and C wins; C plays A. Winner between C and A is the runner-up.
- Tournaments shall be on consecutive days at one site, where possible. The district executive committee may authorize preliminary round games to be played at additional sites.
- Any situation not covered in the above tie breaker criteria shall be determined by lot. Unless the district executive committee specifies otherwise prior to the season, tie games shall count as one-half game won and one-half game lost.
- EXPENSES OF DISTRICT EXECUTIVE COMMITTEES IN ALL ATHLETIC ACTIVITIES.The district executive committee has authority to finance its expenses. It is recommended that the district activity assessment for a sport be determined at the organizational meeting.
- Delinquent Assessments. The failure of a school to pay its assessment promptly after having been notified is a violation.
- Disqualification. If a school refuses or fails to pay its assessment, it may be disqualified from participation the current and following year until the amount is paid.
- Statement. At the close of the season the district executive committee shall furnish each participating school in the district a financial statement showing all receipts and disbursements for the season.
Section 134 – Officials
- AGREEMENT. All officials must be satisfactory to both parties and agreed upon in advance. However, beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement.
- Participant schools shall use officials approved by TAPPS.
- Officials
- All individuals officiating contests involving TAPPS schools must be
- Registered with an approved Chapter
- Assigned by an approved Chapter
- Chapters
- All officials’ chapters must be approved by TAPPS in order to assign officials for TAPPS contest. Official chapters are approved by the method listed below.
- Registered and in good standing with TAPPS through the following process.
- Submission of Application
- Submission of Supporting Documentation
- Chapter Bylaws
- Letters of Reference
- SCOPE Video Certification From
- Letter stating that all officials have had background checks done.
- Review and Approval by the TAPPS Athletic Executive Committee.
- Submitted prior to the deadline published on the TAPPS yearly calendar as shown on the TAPPS website.
- TASO and all UIL approved chapters listed on Arbiter Sports in good standing are approved by TAPPS.
- Insurance
- All approved chapters shall meet the minimum requirements as established by TAPPS prior to being approved by TAPPS.
- The minimum limits of coverage shall include the following:
- General Liability $1,000,000 Occurrence
- General Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate
- Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Occurrence
- Sexual Abuse and Molestation $100,000
- Accident Insurance $50,000 Occurrence
- TAPPS shall be named as a Certificate holder and certificate of insurance shall be forwarded to the TAPPS office annually.
- NEUTRAL OFFICIALS. In all contests, schools should always attempt to secure neutral officials.
- HOST RESPONSIBILITY. The responsibility to obtain satisfactory officials is upon the host school which must provide names of officials to the visiting school at least 4 days prior to the contest.
- NOTIFICATION. When names of officials are received by the visiting school, the visiting school shall immediately notify the host school if officials are not satisfactory. Failure of the visiting school to solicit names of officials from the home school within four days of the contest constitutes agreement.
- FAILURE TO SHOW.
- If agreed upon officials fail to show, the visiting school shall not be in violation by refusing to play.
- Host school shall make written notification to the assigning chapter.
- Host school shall make written notification to the TAPPS office.
- However, earnest effort should be expended to find officials so that the game may be played without additional travel expenses for team and fans.
- A host school does not have to forfeit the contest unless the district executive committee rules that they have been negligent in contracting and securing officials.
- If the contest is rescheduled, the home team will host the game at a mutually agreed date and time and reimburse the visiting school 50 cents per mile.
- By mutual agreement, the visiting team may host the make-up game and no travel allowance be required.
- SCRATCHES.
- When officials who have been previously agreed upon by both teams are scratched, the school scratching the officials shall pay them the fee they would have received had they worked the game minus any travel expenses and shall also pay the additional travel costs in obtaining new officials. If scratched officials obtain another game, they do not have to be paid.
- After a school has accepted an official, and then scratches the official prior to a contest, this action must be approved by the athletic director and the principal of the school taking the action. Note: Officials shall not be scratched the day of the game, except by mutual consent of both schools.
- TAPPS discourages indiscriminate scratching of entire chapters except in cases when potential problems could result with fans and/or school employees.
- Officiating chapters should be fair in their game assignments, offering smaller schools the opportunity to use higher level officials when possible.
- When officials do not show, or when the previously agreed upon officials do not show, and the game has to be rescheduled, the chapter shall be responsible for the rescheduled game fee, unless it is determined by the school that an emergency arose beyond the control of the officials
- CANCELLATION of contest by a member school
- When officials who have been previously scheduled and the contest is canceled, the school canceling shall
- pay them the fee they would have received had they worked the game
- minus any travel expenses.
- This rule applies in the event the officials are not rescheduled.
- Acts of God are not subject to this provision.
- PENALTY. The penalty for failure to provide officials is forfeiture of the game or match. The district executive committee shall determine whether or not forfeiture is applicable.
- FEE VIOLATIONS. If the rules in regard to fees of officials are violated by a participant school, the facts shall be reported to the district executive committee at a meeting to be called as soon as possible after the game. The committee shall decide on the merits of the case and apply the penalty; or, if an emergency is declared, waive the penalty. The district executive committee may declare that, in its judgment, an emergency arose and, therefore waive the penalty.
- MAXIMUM MILEAGE REIMBURSEMENT.
- Officials shall be paid travel reimbursement in accordance with the following:
- Metro
- As listed on approved Fee Sheets
- OTHER ALLOWABLE EXPENSES.
- Meals. If there is previous agreement between officials and schools, schools may pay up to the state rate per day for meals.
- Lodging. As necessary and previously agreed upon by the officials and schools, schools may pay lodging.
- Ground Transportation. If prior agreement exists, schools may pay taxi fare, etc., for officials.
- LIMITATION. No other item shall be included in payment of officials.
- FEE APPROVAL. Fees are to be paid by the host school or by the game management as approved by the school. TAPPS recommended fee schedule posted under the “Officials” tab on the TAPPS website.
- PROMPT PAYMENT. Fees are to be paid promptly.
- EXCEEDING MAXIMUM FEES. The maximum fee listed should be paid to officials working varsity contests. For sub-varsity contests, unless otherwise specified, fees less than the maximum may be negotiated between the chapter and the school. If a participant school exceeds the maximum fee schedule, the district executive committee shall meet as soon as possible to decide if an emergency warranted the excess fee(s). If the school in question proves an emergency caused the overpayment, the district executive committee does not have to assess a penalty.
- TAPPS SCHOOL, COACHES AND OFFICIALS POSITIVE EXPECTATIONS MEETING (SCOPE) AND REGISTRATION.
- Coaches and Officials Required to Register With TAPPS and Attend Meetings. All officials and all coaches in baseball, basketball, football, soccer, softball and volleyball shall complete TEaMs training as prescribed by TAPPS prior to their sport season. TAPPS schools may meet this requirement by providing meetings or seminars conducted by the Head Coach/Athletic Director, prior to the season. Officials from a local chapter should be invited to attend.
- Registration List. Coaches and officials who register and attend will have their names placed on a registration list which will be forwarded to the TAPPS office or the Officials Association office, or placed on file at the local school. This information will be provided by the local chapters and other groups who hold these meetings. Other information to be provided for each official is: address, division and Social Security number.
- TAPPS Registration Fee. TAPPS may charge a registration fee for officials to help offset costs of programs for officials (rule books, other educational materials, development of materials and meeting costs).
- Failure of Official to Register; Loss of Registration.
- A report of a coach ejection from an official may not be considered or adjudicated by TAPPS unless the official has registered prior to the season.
- Officials who are not registered will not be allowed to work post district games, and should not be used for regular season games. Exceptions will be handled through the TAPPS office.
- Officials must report all ejections of coaches, severe verbal and physical abuse, and any major disruptions that occur during a game. The game administrator is to be informed of the problem the night of the game. Reports from each official involved are to be made to the TAPPS office within the next two working days following the game or match. In order for TAPPS to review each situation, the sooner a report the more effective the TAPPS staff can administer any necessary penalty. Officials should use the form provided on their association’s website.
- Officials are to conduct themselves in a professional manner before, during and after a contest.
- Officials who violate the provisions of this rule may be removed from the list of registered officials.
- NO PROTESTS. A protest based on a game or contest official’s decision will not be considered.
Section 135 – Athletic Eligibility
- INDIVIDUAL REPORT FORMS. It shall be the responsibility of each school to keep on file the following recommended/required annual forms for each student who participates in any practice, scrimmage, or game. These forms should be kept at the school and uploaded into the TAPPS database as instructed.
- Medical.
- Upon entering high school and each year thereafter, a MEDICAL HISTORY and PHYSICAL EXAMINATION form must be completed by each student as entered in the TAPPS database. A standardized form is available from TAPPS, which school officials may furnish to physicians if they wish. This form is to be kept on file in the TAPPS database.
- Each year students and parents shall be provided education in the areas noted below. Parents shall acknowledge receipt of this information on the Parent Acknowledgement of Rules form signed annually.;
- Sudden Cardiac Arrest
- Concussion
- Steroid and Substance Abuse
- Injury Reporting and Return to play protocols
- Parent or Guardian Permit. Annual acknowledgement of rules is required and as found in the TAPPS DATABASE.
- Rules Acknowledgment.
- An Annual TAPPS Rules Acknowledgement Form signed by the student and the student’s parent or guardian is required and kept on file in the school office must be completed in the TAPPS database.
- Even if the student is 18 or older, the parent or guardian must complete the form.
.
- VARSITY ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS.
- Subchapter K, By-Laws. Only students satisfying all the requirements in Article V of the TAPPS Constitution and in Subchapter K in By-Laws are eligible for interscholastic competition.
- Non-District Games. In any interscholastic games or contests, only eligible students may participate. Each school shall complete an eligibility list for each sport.
- Eligibility Forms. Schools must submit comprehensive eligibility ROSTER in the TAPPS database for all athletic and fine art contests prior to the first interscholastic contest in those events.
- Schools which fail to certify student eligibility in advance of the first interscholastic contest shall be subject to the following sanctions:
- First Offense - Warning
- Second Offense - Reprimand / 1 Game Suspension for head coach
- Additional Offense - Penalties shall escalate
- Certification. Completed eligibility ROSTER in the TAPPS database shall be to be submitted before a contestant is allowed to participate in a contest.
- Suspension. Failure to furnish correct and complete information may, upon request by the proper committee, constitute grounds for suspension.
- PREVIOUS ATHLETIC PARTICIPATION FORM. Students who represented their former school in a varsity or sub-varsity athletic contest in grades 9-12 the previous or current school year must have a Previous Athletic Participation Form completed prior to participation in any interscholastic contest in that sport at the new school. This completed form must be filed with the TAPPS office and approved by the district executive committee prior to the student’s participation in any interscholastic contest.
Section 136 – In Season-Off Season Summer Regulations
- CALENDAR
- DEFINITION - The TAPPS Calendar shall provide information pertaining to those activities governed by TAPPS. For TAPPS purposes
- School Year is defined as the first day of Dead Week through the last day of classes at the member school.
- Summer is defined as the last day of classes at the member school through the first day of Dead Week.
- Dead Week shall be published on the TAPPS calendar
- First and Last day of school shall be determined by the dates published on the calendar of the member school.
- ACTIVITIES
- Activities include interscholastic competition in which the school sponsors the students or team.
- Team Activities
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Football
- Soccer
- Softball
- Volleyball
- Individual Activities
- Cross Country
- Golf
- Fall
- Spring
- Swim
- Tennis
- Team Tennis
- Spring Tennis
- Track and Field
- Outdoor
- Indoor
- Wrestling
- SABBATH
- Day of observance shall be defined as either Saturday or Sunday
- TAPPS member schools shall determine their recognized day of sabbath observance.
- In no instance shall a school conduct organized activities for more than 6 consecutive days.
- A TAPPS school shall not participate on their recognized day of sabbath. This includes participation
- In any athletic contest or
- Conducting any practice,
- Teaching any plays, formations, or skills
- Any showing of films to, or meetings of athletes for the purpose of instruction or reviewing of plays, formations, or skills in any sport will be construed as a violation.
- (Exceptions may be allowed upon appeal to the TAPPS Executive Board, with each case individually considered).
- Coaches’ Meetings
- This does not prevent coaches from meeting on Sunday or from seeing films or planning an instructional program, provided that no athletes are involved in this meeting.
- EXCEPTIONS:
- Travel on Sunday is permitted when required by any TAPPS Competition which occurs on Monday. This exception does not include Easter Sunday.
- If the regional and/or state golf tournaments are scheduled on a Monday, the one 18-hole practice round allowed at the regional and/or state tournament site may be played on the Sunday afternoon preceding the meet (no earlier than 12:00 noon) if permitted by the regional or state meet director.
- Tennis. If the regional and/or state tennis tournaments are scheduled on a Monday, and if participants arrive at the site on the preceding Sunday because of travel distance, it will not be construed as a violation of this rule if school district personnel accompany or transport participants to a tennis court for the purpose of practicing on their own, if permitted by the regional or state meet director.
- REGIONAL AND STATE TOURNAMENT COMPETITION ON SUNDAY.
- Regional or state tournament directors may reschedule postponed or weather delayed tournaments on Sunday afternoon or evening.
- District or Regional tournaments or meets not hosted by TAPPS may reschedule as noted above, but only with prior approval of the tournament director and the participating schools, and with prior permission from the TAPPS director.
- PERIODS OF NO ACTIVITY OR FACILITY USE
- DEAD WEEK
- There will be a “Dead Week” prior to the beginning of TAPPS activities for the new school year. No school or team activities may be held during the week. The Dead Week period will be noted each year on the TAPPS calendar.
- Athletic Camps are allowed on the high school campus, however, high school students (including incoming freshmen) from the member school may not attend the camp.
- The following Activities are not allowed for team or individual sports:
- High School Team Meetings
- High School Team Building Activities
- High School Team Camps
- High School Team Travel / Lodging
- High School Physicals
- Open Gyms
- Open Weight Rooms
- FINE ARTS EXCEPTION:
- Fine Art activities are not subject to the Dead Week restrictions. These activities include:
- Band
- Cheer
- Dance
- Drum Line
- One Act Play
- Orchestra
- Robotics
- Vocal Music
- WINTER BREAK
- A school shall not conduct contests or practices, use school facilities, personnel or equipment, or travel for a period of three days to be determined by the member school.
- The member school shall determine the three day period and that period of no activity shall apply to all activities.
- School facilities shall not be used, nor shall school employees have contact with students during this time.
- Any organized or required practice; or travel will be a violation of this regulation.
- OTHER PERIODS
- The following are subject to the in season and out of season limitations as defined for each activity. Individual member schools may make the determination as to which time limitations apply.
- Fall Break
- Spring Break
- Holidays such as Easter and Christmas
- LIMITATIONS
- IN SEASON
- General Provisions
- Instructional week is defined in Section 1.3.3. above
- Students are limited to 15 Contact Hours per week
- Contact Hours include
- Team and Individual Practices
- Team and Individual Sports Specific Skill Training
- Weight Training
- Speed and Agility Training
- Conditioning
- Open Gym / Facility
- Open Weight Room
- Classroom Study / Film Study
- Time
- Class Period
- Before School
- After School
- Extended Days
- Contact hours do not include games.
- Team Activities
- Team Activities are considered in season
- From the first practice date shown on the official TAPPS calendar
- Through the last contest eligible for play in district or post season play
- Subvarsity contests must be concluded prior to or on the date of district certification
- Individual Activities
- Individual activities are considered in season
- When preparing for interscholastic competition while participating in interscholastic competition
- If students are not participating in interscholastic competition then the individual sport is subject to all the restrictions of off season shown herein
- Examples
- Golf and Tennis may be considered in Season if the school is participating in interscholastic competition during the fall months
- Track and Cross Country may be considered in season when students are competing in meets for those events
- OFF SEASON
- General Provisions
- Instructional week as defined in Section 1.3.3. above
- Students are limited to 10 Contact Hours per week
- Contact Hours include
- Team and Individual Practices
- Team and Individual Sports Specific Skill Training
- Weight Training
- Speed and Agility Training
- Conditioning
- Open Gym / Facility
- Open Weight Room
- Classroom Study / Film Study
- Time
- Class Period
- Before School
- After School
- Extended Days
- Leagues
- TAPPS coaches and school employees may not coach students from their school in off season leagues during the school year.
- SUMMER
- General Provisions
- Instructional week is defined as shown above
- Students are limited to 15 Contact Hours per week
- Contact Hours include
- Team and Individual Practices
- Team and Individual Sports Specific Skill Training
- Weight Training
- Speed and Agility Training
- Conditioning
- Open Gym / Facility
- Open Weight Room
- Classroom Study / Film Study
- Contact hours do not include games.
- OFF SEASON / SUMMER PARTICIPATION
- Student Participation
- Students shall not be required to play on a non-school team in any sport as a prerequisite to playing on a school team.
- Schools and school personnel shall make every effort to see that students understand the participation in off season leagues, tournament, teams, open weight rooms and open gyms
- Is strictly voluntary and
- Is never required.
- Shall not be a prerequisite for trying out or participating on a school team.
- Out of Season Leagues / Tournaments
- Students shall not be required to play on a non-school team in any sport as a prerequisite to playing on a school team.
- Schools and school personnel shall make every effort to see that students understand the participation in off season leagues, tournament, teams, open weight rooms and open gyms
- Is strictly voluntary and
- Is never required.
- Shall not be a prerequisite for trying out or participating on a school team.
- Summer Leagues / Tournaments
- Students shall not be required to play on a non-school team in any sport as a prerequisite to playing on a school team.
- Schools and school personnel shall make every effort to see that students understand the participation in off season leagues, tournament, teams, open weight rooms and open gyms
- Is strictly voluntary and
- Is never required.
- Shall not be a prerequisite for trying out or participating on a school team.
- SPRING ACTIVITIES
- General Info (Football) - In-season contact hours apply
- Spring Football
- 14 Days of Instruction within 21 consecutive days from first to last day of instruction
- General Info (Volleyball) - In-season contact hours apply
- Spring Volleyball
- 14 Days of Instruction within 21 consecutive days from first to last day of instruction
- ATTENDANCE
- TAPPS does not determine daily attendance policies for student participation in In-Season Activities.
- Daily Attendance rules shall be determined by the TAPPS member school.
- The specific requirements for student attendance on game days should be developed and published by the member school
- Participation in an off-season program shall not be required for varsity athletes on the day of an in-season varsity competition, or for non-varsity athletes on the day of an in-season non-varsity competition.
- ALL STAR CONTESTS
- Seniors
- May participate in All Star Contests
- Underclassmen
- May participate in All Star Contests provided the schools high school coaches are not coaching the event if the event occurs during the school year.
- May participate in All Star Contests if the school's high school coaches are coaching the event and the event occurs during the summer.
- TRYOUTS / COMBINES
- College / University / Organized Tryouts or Combines are subject to this rule
- Neither schools nor coaches shall provide
- Transportation,
- equipment or
- defray expenses for students attending college tryouts.
- Any contest at which a higher admission fee is charged to college coaches than is charged to parents or other adults is considered to be a college tryout.
- This includes
- individual tryouts,
- group tryouts and
- camp activities.
- Coaching Restrictions
- These restrictions apply to all coaches (See Section 1 of the TAPPS Bylaws for definition) and students of the member school. The only exception is a coach coaching his or her own child in other than school activities. Dead week restrictions apply to coaches and their children.
- School Year
- Coach participation in AAU, Club, Select or similar programs.
- For students not yet in high school, Coaches may
- Coach in AAU, Select, Club or similar programs
- Coach students from their school in AAU, Club, Select or similar programs
- For high school students who attend the TAPPS member school, Coaches may not
- Coach students in AAU, Select, Club or similar programs
- This rule applies to both teams coached or not coached by personnel at the member school.
- This rule applies to all coaches at member schools for the entire school year regardless of the actual length or dates of the employment contract or agreement.
- Coach providing private instruction, group instruction, skills instruction, personal training and similar programs.
- For students not yet in high school, Coaches may
- Coach in these programs or provide these services
- Coach students from their school in these programs and provide these services
- For students who attend the the TAPPS member school, Coaches may not
- Coach in these programs or provide these services
- Coach students from their school in these programs and provide these services
- Coaches with school year teams may
- Organize
- An out of season team
- An out of season league
- An out of season tournament
- Select and determine teams
- Coaches / school employees with school year teams may not
- Provide Private or Group instruction for players from his / her school
- Charge for private or group instruction during the school year
- Coach players from his / her school
- On out of season team or
- In an out of season league or tournament
- Provide transportation for players from his / her school to
- Out of season team practice
- Out of season league / tournament contests
- Schools may not
- Provide payment for
- An out of season league
- An out of season tournament
- Financial Aid or Scholarships for
- An out of season league
- An out of season tournament
- Summer
- Coaches may
- Organize
- An out of season team
- An out of season league
- An out of season tournament
- Select and determine teams
- Coach players from the TAPPS member school
- Provide Private or Group instruction for players from his / her school
- Coach players from his / her school
- On out of season team or
- In an out of season league or tournament
- Provide transportation for players from his / her school to
- Out of season team practice
- Out of season league / tournament contests
- Schools may
- Provide payment for
- An out of season league
- An out of season tournament
- Financial Aid or Scholarships for
- An out of season league
- An out of season tournament
Section 137 – Rules, Violations and Penalties
- Rule Violations. Students who violate the rules in the specific athletic plans shall be subject to the penalty in the specific athletic plan, or subject to the range of penalties applicable to student representatives in Sections 23 and 24. The regulations in the athletic plans govern all varsity and sub-varsity teams and contestants. Ninth grade (whether in junior high, on a separate campus, or with other high school grades) and other sub-varsity teams and contestants are restricted to the same game limitations, season, etc. as the varsity team.
- Eligibility Rules. In addition to rules in individual sports plans, each varsity team and athlete shall observe all rules contained in Article V of the Constitution.
- Minimum Penalty For Using Ineligible Player. In the event an ineligible contestant is used in any TAPPS game or contest, knowingly or unknowingly, the minimum penalty shall be forfeiture of the game, contest or event.
- Unattached Participation. In any school sponsored athletic meet or tournament, TAPPS school students shall not be permitted to enter unless prior approval is obtained from their high school and the sponsoring school. The penalty for violation of this rule shall be assessed against the high school sponsoring the meet.
Section 138 – Athletic Regulations
Schools shall abide by rules in the Constitution, by rules in the By-Laws, by rules in the Contest Rules, by rules in the TAPPS News Briefs, by regulations issued from the TAPPS office in the coaches and administrators sports manuals, and other official notices from the TAPPS office. Where any term or section of the Contest Rules and/or the coaches and administrators’ sports manuals is found to be inconsistent with the Constitution and Bylaws, the Constitution and Bylaws shall prevail and apply and the remaining terms and sections of the Contest Rules and/or the coaches and administrators sports manuals shall continue in effect.
- SCHEDULE / SCORE REPORTING IN TAPPS DATABASE
- SCHEDULES
- Varsity schedules for all team activities are to be entered into the TAPPS Database prior to the start of interscholastic competition (including scrimmages). Schedules must be visible to the public and amended as changes occur.
- Schools which fail to enter schedules in advance of the first interscholastic contest shall be subject to the following sanctions:
- First Offense Warning
- Second Offense Reprimand to Head Coach / 1 Game Suspension
- Additional Offense Penalties shall escalate
- SCORE REPORTING
- Varsity scores for all team activities are to be entered into the TAPPS Database no later than 48 hours after the conclusion of the contest. This includes all interscholastic competition including tournaments, non district, district and post season contests.
- Schools which fail to input scores in a timely manner (48 Hours) shall be subject to the following sanctions:
- After 1 game in FOOTBALL or 2 games in other TEAM SPORTS
- First Offense Warning
- Second Offense Reprimand to Head Coach / 1 Game Suspension
- Additional Offense Penalties shall escalate
- ELIGIBLE SCHOOLS - A school shall not participate in a sports activity unless that sport is indicated on the current contract, signed by the superintendent or designated administrator, and on file in the TAPPS office by September 1 of the current school year. Exception: A school which does not participate in football the first year of a new alignment may not participate the second year except by unanimous consent of the district executive committee.
- DISTRICTS and CLASSIFICATIONS
- Classifications. Schools are placed in classifications according to enrollment figures.
- District Assignments. Schools will be assigned to districts by the TAPPS Executive Board. District assignments and a list of tentative chairs will be mailed out to participant schools prior to the season. The district shall select a permanent president and notify the TAPPS office. However, the superintendent, principal, or coach in each school competing under this plan, is ultimately responsible for ascertaining the name of the district president, time of meeting, etc. If the president moves from a member school, each school in the district has a responsibility to see that a new president is elected and to notify the TAPPS office.
- SCHEDULES
- Eligible Schools
- TAPPS Member Schools shall schedule contests with school sponsored teams.
- TAPPS Member Schools may schedule contests with Homeschool teams.
- The eligibility requirements for these teams includes:
- No Students not yet in High School are participating in the contest
- No students who have graduated high school are participating in the contest
- No students who started ninth grade more than four years ago are participating in the contest
- No students enrolled in a school or other home school association are part of the home school team
- TAPPS schools shall not participate in games or contests with Home School Groups who do not meet the above requirements.
- TAPPS Member Schools shall not schedule contests with Homeschool teams who have other than home school students in their organization.
- TAPPS Member Schools shall not schedule contests with teams comprised of students from multiple schools or homeschool groups.
- TAPPS Member Schools shall not schedule contests with select, AAU, Club or other similar teams.
- TAPPS Member Schools shall not schedule scrimmages or contests with post-high school teams.
- TAPPS Member Schools may schedule scrimmages or contests with schools, home school organizations, or other such groups who are members of a league organized for high interscholastic competition. Examples include but are not limited to schools in good standing with the leagues listed below:
- University Interscholastic League (UIL)
- Southwest Preparatory Conference (SPC)
- If new organizations are formed for competitive opportunities for schools, TAPPS shall not review the league for inclusion in the above list until the league has operated for a minimum of two years. Review of any organization shall not deem the organization eligible.
- Schools, home school organizations or other such groups who are not members of an organization are subject to the same rules and regulation as presented in Part A.b above.
- Interstate and International Opponents
- Schools wishing to schedule interstate opponents must obtain approval from TAPPS prior to participating in any single contest or tournament event.
- Schools may not participate against schools not in GOOD STANDING with the recognized NFHS organization for their state in pool play, tournament play or individual contests. It is the responsibility of the TAPPS member school and not the tournament organizer to insure compliance with this rule.
- Schools may not participate against schools or teams who are located outside of the United States without prior approval. In no circumstance will international teams comprised of students from more than one school be approved.
- For contests in which the out of state opponent is traveling to Texas,
- School must be a member in good standing of a recognized State High School organization with eligibility rules in keeping with TAPPS standards.
- OUT OF STATE OPPONENT Application must be completed and approved prior to the date of competition.
- For contests in which the TAPPS member school is traveling out of Texas.
- The single contest or tournament must be sanctioned and approved by the NFHS.
- OUT OF STATE OPPONENT Application must be completed and approved prior to the date of competition.
- District Schedules
- are set by action of the District Executive Committee.
- Game days originally agreed upon, either by district schedule or agreement between schools can only be changed by mutual agreement of the schools involved. Change is only valid when agreed upon in writing by both schools.
- If a school forfeits a district game, and does not play that game,
- the forfeiting school shall not be eligible for the playoffs.
- None of the games involving the team who cancels the game will count towards the district standings. It is as if the team was never a part of the district.
- The individual players on the team are still eligible for consideration for all-district and all-state.
- If the game is played and later ordered to be forfeited by the District Executive Committee or if the school willingly forfeits the game after discovering an ineligible player, or some other rule violation, the team is not automatically removed from the playoffs.
- The team’s won/loss record for district play, including any losses due to the forfeiture of teams that have played, shall be considered to determine if the team qualifies for a playoff berth.
- Schools shall not forfeit any district games in order to play non-district games. Schools in violation of this provision will be subject to the range of penalties.
- At the time of district certification, the district president shall certify all schools that will participate in the playoffs. Upon qualifying for the playoffs, schools must notify the TAPPS office in writing if their team will not participate in all playoff games in which they qualify as scheduled by TAPPS. If for any reason, the team cannot follow the schedule as provided by TAPPS the school shall remove itself from the playoffs without penalty so that the next highest ranked team may represent the district in the playoffs.
- If a contest cannot be played as scheduled or completed as defined by the governing rules of the activity and the visiting team was not notified in advance of the situation or if the situation occurs during the contest
- earnest effort should be expended to find an acceptable playing site so that the game may be played without additional travel expenses for team and fans.
- A host school does not have to forfeit the contest unless the district executive committee rules that they have been negligent
- If the contest is rescheduled, the home team will host the game at a mutually agreed date and time and reimburse the visiting school 50 cents per mile.
- By mutual agreement, the visiting team may host the make-up game and no travel allowance shall be required.
- If at the time of game stoppage one team has outscored the other, the losing coach may choose to accept the score as final.
- Failure to Complete a Season
- Regular Season. A school that does not participate in a sport after signing the intent to participate form should notify the TAPPS office as soon as possible if declaring no participation.. A school may be suspended by the TAPPS Executive Board in that activity for a period of one year, unless sufficient justification is shown for not participating.
- A school failing to participate in a sport after declaring for the sport(by submission of fees and contract) shall not participate in other district, regional, or state events until a fee equal to the event fee has been paid to the TAPPS office.
- A game or match canceled after the contract has been signed, unless both parties agree to the cancellation, shall be forfeited by the team canceling the game or match.
- In football, when two schools agree to play on a 2-year basis, a contract should be signed by the two schools, and agree that the home team shall keep 100% of the gate receipts, and the game is canceled the second year by the team that received 100% of the gate receipts the first year, the team that received no gate the first year is entitled to 50% of the net gate receipts from the first game unless mutually agreed otherwise. This is in addition to the forfeiture fee included in the contract.
- Playoffs. Any school which qualifies for the playoffs in a sport and fails to participate or complete the official schedule of games/ matches, unless excused for valid reasons by the TAPPS Executive Board, may be suspended from that activity for a period not to exceed one calendar year.
- Weather Considerations
- Lightning
- In the absence of Lightning Detectors or Predictors, TAPPS rules are as follows:
- When thunder is heard or cloud to ground lightning is observed, the storm is close enough to strike your location with lightning.
- Suspend play and take shelter immediately.
- Distance Rule: This rule is in place for lightning strikes within 10 miles of the game location.
- Thirty Minute Rule: Once play has been suspended, wait at least 30 minutes after the last thunder is heard or flash of lightning is witnessed prior to resuming play. After beginning application of the 30 minute rule, any subsequent thunder or flash of lightning shall reset the clock and teams shall wait an additional 30 minutes from that point prior to resuming play.
- Temperature
- In the event the outside temperature or heat index reaches 100 degrees as determined by the home team or event host, inter school contests shall not be played without the mutual consent of all teams involved in the contest.
- In the event the outside temperature or chill factor reaches 32 degrees as determined by the home team or event host, inter school contests shall not be played without the mutual consent of all teams involved in the contest.
- A school that is following the above guidelines shall not be required to forfeit contests.
- Travel
- In the event of snow, ice or other weather conditions affecting travel, consideration should be given to the travel involved before and after a contest.
- A school that determines travel conditions to be unsafe shall not be required to forfeit contests.
- Win/Loss Percentage - Non-district games shall not count on a team’s district win/loss percentage.
- Practice/Scrimmage - A scrimmage is a practice that is a simulated contest between not more than four (4) teams. The following restrictions apply:
- Do not count towards the maximum number of games allowed
- Maximum Number
- Three (3) for football
- Five (5) days between scrimmages
- Five (5) days between last scrimmage and first game
- Four (4) for all other sports
- No admission may be charged
- Officials may be used
- Officials shall not be paid
- May be reimbursed for:
- Meals
- Mileage
- A scrimmage may be scheduled after games have been played.
- A scrimmage contract should be obtained between the official’s chapter and the host school. A reasonable fee may be paid to the official’s chapter.
- Playing Rules - Game Balls
- TAPPS shall determine the official ball to be used in all team activities.
- The official ball shall be used for:
- All home games by TAPPS teams
- All tournaments hosted by TAPPS schools
- All district contests
- All postseason contests
- The official balls include the following:
- LINK TO OFFICIAL BALLS
- Volleyball - must be tricolor panels
- Football - must be all leather construction
- Schools which fail to use the TAPPS approved Ball for any high school contest shall be subject to the following sanctions:
- First Offense Warning
- Second Offense Reprimand to Head Coach / $150 fine
- Additional Offense Penalties shall escalate
- GAME ADMINISTRATOR. In all TAPPS varsity athletic team contests, a game administrator shall be appointed by the home school. It is highly recommended that a game administrator be present for all sub-varsity games as well. Teams advancing to the state playoffs must insure that an administrator is appointed and present for each game which is held for football, soccer, volleyball, basketball, baseball and softball. The administrator should make themselves known to and be available to assist officials prior to, during or after the contest. That person must be a coach (other than the game coach), teacher, or administrator. It is recommended that a game administrator be designated by the home school for all non-varsity athletic team contests. The responsibilities of the game administrator are as follows:
- Health and Safety
- Shall be trained in the Emergency Action Plan for the facility
- Shall know the location of the AED at the facility
- Shall be trained in the use of the AED
- Officials
- see that officials are directed to their dressing room;
- meet with the officials prior to game time (preferably on the playing field or court);
- inform the officials where the game administrator will be seated;
- assist the officials if they need to discourage unsportsmanlike conduct of a fan, player, or coach (such as removal from the gym);
- check with the officials after the game to see if there is any misconduct that needs to be reported;
- provide an escort for the officials to their cars;
- Report
- all incidents to the school administrator (home team or visitor) including;
- severe verbal abuse or physical contact of any game official
- Verbal or physical contact between fans and any ejections of coaches and fans to the TAPPS office in writing within the next two working days.
- COACH TRAINING
- All TAPPS athletic directors and coaches (all levels of high school participation) shall complete the annual TAPPS Coach Education training prior to the start of their sports season.
- Coach Education Training will include:
- Solicitation of Students
- Student Eligibility
- Transfer Students
- Contest Officials
- Game Administration
- Removal from a Contest
- Reporting Game Scores
- All District / All State Selection
- Fan Behavior
- Concussion in Sports
- First Aid
- Heat Illness
- Sudden Cardiac Arrest
- Appearance and Performance Enhancing Drugs
- Blood Borne Pathogens
- Coach Acknowledgement of Rules
- The names of all coaches who complete the Coach Education training is verified in Rank One. Contact the TAPPS office for assistance if needed.
- It is the joint responsibility of the coach and athletic director to ensure that the Coach Education and any other training are completed annually prior to the start of the individual’s high school coaching duties.
- Coaches with less than five (5) years experience coaching in public or private schools must complete the following through the National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) beginning in the:
- Fundamentals of Coaching
- Sport Specific
- Baseball
- Pitch Smart
- Basketball
- Cross Country / Track
- Field Hockey
- Football
- Golf
- Soccer
- Softball
- Swim
- Tennis
- Track
- Volleyball
- Wrestling
- Click HERE for the NFHS Learn Link.
- Exceptions to Part E with approval from the TAPPS Office
- Coaches with more than five (5) years scholastic coaching experience in either public or private school
- Verifiable college courses representing the curriculum listed in Part E
- Verifiable attendance at Coach Education course offered at the TAPPS June convention.
- Removal from Contest
- RULES GOVERNING REMOVAL
- Conditions requiring the removal from a contest shall be determined by the governing organization for each sport as specified in the TAPPS By-Laws (i.e., NFHS, NCAA, USGA, USTA, etc.) as outlined in the published rules for that sport.
- SANCTIONS FOR REMOVAL
- Every removal from a contest will result in a suspension from participation and a monetary fine. The length of the suspension and the amount of the fine will be determined by the circumstances of the removal as stated in the sections below. Subsequent or more serious removals may include additional sanctions as stated herein or as determined by the Athletic Executive Committee or the Executive Board.
- Removal. A coach or player removed from a contest shall immediately leave the field, stadium, press box, gymnasium or fieldhouse and have no communication of any kind with the coaching staff or team. If removing a student would result in a lack of supervision for that student, then the student is allowed to remain on the bench or team area where supervision is present.
- Suspension. While serving a suspension, a coach or student cannot be on the field, in the stadium, in the press box, in the gymnasium or fieldhouse, or have communication of any kind with the coaching staff or team during the contest.
- REGULAR SEASON OR TOURNAMENT GAME
- Student Suspension – In all sports but football, a student removed from a contest shall serve a one game suspension at the next scheduled contest as shown on the schedule submitted to the TAPPS office prior to the season (single game or tournament game). Football suspensions are served in the 1st half of the next scheduled contest.
- Student Fine -- $100 per ejection for the student. The School is responsible for payment of a fine.
- Coach Suspension -- In all sports, a coach removed from a contest shall serve a one game suspension (football) or two games for all other activities at the next scheduled contest(s) as shown on the schedule submitted to the TAPPS office prior to the season (single game or tournament game).
- Coach Fine -- $300 per ejection for the coach. The School is responsible for payment of a fine.
- TEaMs – A coach who has documented TEaMs training:
- Public Reprimand issued to the coach; and,
- Coach must complete the NFHS Teaching and Modeling Behavior or other similar course prior to the next contest.
- NO TEaMs – A coach who has no documented TEaMs training:
- Public Reprimand issued to the Coach;
- Public Reprimand issued to the Athletic Director;
- Coach must complete the NFHS Teaching and Modeling Behavior or other similar course prior to the next contest; and,
- If in football, the suspension is increased to two full game.
- FAN BEHAVIOR
- Fan Removal
- School shall be fined a minimum of $250
- Fine to be paid by school fan represents
- Fans rushing the court, field or pitch
- Players and Officials are no longer on the court
- First Offense
- Warning
- Probation for the school
- Second Offense
- $1,500. fine to the school
- Probation for the school
- Public Reprimand
- Additional Offense
- $1,500 fine to school
- Additional sanctions as determined by TAPPS
- No fans allowed at next contest
- Public Reprimand
- Players and Officials are still on the court, field or pitch
- First Offense
- $1,500. fine to the school
- Probation for the school
- Public Reprimand
- Second Offense
- $1,500 fine to school
- Additional Sanctions as determined by TAPPS
- No fans allowed at next contest
- Public Reprimand
- Additional Offense
- Sanctions to be determined by TAPPS
- Public Reprimand
- PLAYOFFS
- Student Suspension -- In all sports but football, a student removed from a playoff game shall serve a one (1) game suspension at the next contest, if it is the first ejection of the year. Football suspensions are served in the 1st half of the next contest. If the student has a previous ejection, the minimum suspension is two (2) games. If the ejection occurs in the final game of the season, the suspension carries forward to the next year in that sport for all underclassmen. Seniors would serve the suspension in the next sport played. Removed players are not eligible for All Tournament honors.
- Student Fine -- $200 per ejection for the student. The School is responsible for payment of a fine.
- Coach Suspension – In all sports, a coach removed from a playoff game shall serve a minimum of a two (2) game suspension, if it is the first ejection of the year.
- Coach Fine -- $500 per ejection for the coach. The School is responsible for payment of a fine.
3. Post season warmup games shall not count towards satisfying the suspension
requirement. However, any ejections in a warm up game shall be treated as a
playoff ejection.
- SUBSEQUENT EJECTIONS
- The second and any subsequent ejections are subject to review by the Athletic Executive Committee or Executive Board for further sanctions.
- Minimum Penalty to include 2 game suspension
- Minimum financial penalty equal to twice original fine
- Coach must complete the NFHS Teaching and Modeling Behavior or similar course prior to the next scheduled contest as shown on the schedule submitted prior to the season to the TAPPS Office.
- FINES
- The School is responsible for the payment of all fines under this section. The fine is due in the TAPPS office ten (10) days from the date of ejection. Failure to submit the fine by this deadline will result in the fine being doubled and all games occurring after the ten days being declared a forfeit. Once the fine has been paid games will not be forfeited; however, any games which were forfeited for nonpayment will not be reversed.
- CUMULATIVE EJECTIONS REVIEW (STUDENT, COACH, SCHOOL)
- If three ejections, coaches and players combined, are received in a sport during the season, the coaches and athletic director will be required to meet with the TAPPS Office.
- If five ejections, coaches and players combined, are received by a member school during the school year, the athletic director and coaching staff of the member school will be required to meet with the TAPPS Office.
- If more than three ejections occur in a sport for a member school, the Athletic Executive Committee or Executive Board will determine the amount of the fine.
- CONTACT WITH AN OFFICIAL OR THREAT TOWARDS A GAME OFFICIAL
- A coach or player deliberately coming into physical contact with, or threatening harm to, an official shall receive at a minimum
- Monetary fine
- Five (5) game suspension
- Public Reprimand
- Probation
- as determined by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- CONTACT WITH AN OFFICIAL OR THREAT TOWARDS OPPOSING PLAYER OR TEAM PERSONNEL BY TEAM PERSONNEL
- A coach or player deliberately coming into physical contact with, or threatening harm to, an opposing player or team personnel shall receive at a minimum
- If TEaMs compliant
- Monetary fine
- Five (5) game suspension
- Public Reprimand - Team Personnel
- Probation - Team Personnel
- as determined by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- If not TEaMs compliant
- Sanctions as shown in Part A
- Additional sanctions
- Public Reprimand - Athletic Director
- Probation - Athletic Director and School
- Additional game suspension - Team Personnel
- PROCESS
- Any coach or player removed from a contest must file a report with the TAPPS Office on the form located in the TAPPS database.
- The form is due the following school day (within 24 Hours if possible).
- Both TAPPS schools involved in the contest must report any ejection occurring in the contest.
- Fines for an ejection not reported to the TAPPS office by the deadline will be doubled.
- Schools who fail to report an ejection are subject to further sanctions as determined by the Athletic Executive Committee or Executive Board.
- NO APPEAL
- A protest based on a game or contest official’s decision will not be considered. Removals from a contest are not subject to appeal, except for targeting ejections in football. Targeting ejections may only be appealed through the procedures established by the TAPPS office.
- GUARANTEES.
- Football. In district and non-district football games, the home team shall keep 100% of the gate receipts after payment of game officials as stated in the game contract unless otherwise mutually agreed upon by both schools.
- Other Team Sports. In district and non-district games/matches unless there is mutual agreement or district executive committee ruling, the home team is entitled to 100% of the gate receipts.
- Playoffs.
- In playoff games, at a neutral site,
- expenses are to be paid from the gate receipts, as well as sharing any profit or loss from the game, and
- must be agreed upon prior to the game by both schools involved.
- This agreement should be in writing and signed by both school representatives.
- In playoff contests,
- if the schools cannot agree on the officials
- and the chapter is determined by
- coin toss (or similar manner)
- or assigned by TAPPS,
- both schools are equally responsible for the payment of the officials before any other expenses are deducted from the gate.
- Expenses. Expenses must be mutually agreed upon by the participants.
- VIDEOTAPING AND FILMING.
- Non-Conference and District Contests.
- Videotaping/Filming by Schools.
- It is a violation to videotape or film a non-conference or district athletic contest in which your school or team is not competing unless prior consent of the two schools involved has been obtained.
- A school does not have to obtain permission to film or tape a non-conference or district contest in which it is competing. However, the film or videotape may not be utilized until after the contest has been completed in Football as described in the current year NCAA football rules.
- Films and videotapes become the property of the school doing the filming unless by district rule or by consent of the schools involved in the contest.
- Film/Video For Scouting.
- TAPPS does not have a rule about exchanging film. It does have a rule that prohibits taping/filming a game in which your school is not involved, UNLESS you have consent of both schools.
- The film/video belongs to the school that film/tapes a game/scrimmage in which their team is participating, unless district rule or mutual agreement of the schools involved, states otherwise. The film/video cannot be used during the game for coaching purposes in Football as described in the current year NCAA football rules.
- Exchanging films with an opponent is a recognized and accepted practice for scouting purpose. For example; team A is playing team B in game 3 of the season, the coach from A trades his film from game 1 and/or 2 with the coach from team B for his film from game 1 and/or 2. The films are the property of the school doing the filming and they do not have to get permission from anyone to exchange their own property.
- For a coach to contact a team that has played his opponent and arrange to “borrow” or trade for that film is not a violation. The film is the property of the school that made it legally, since they were involved in the game.
- Districts may make a rule that member schools may not “loan out” films, after the play-offs begin, in order to “protect” their district representatives. This is a district rule - not a TAPPS rule!
- Schools in the football play-offs are REQUIRED to exchange 3 quality tapes with their opponent (recipient’s choice)
- No later than 10:00 am on Monday, before a Friday Game.
- Videotaping/ Filming by Individuals. Any individual taping or filming must have permission from the schools involved in the contest and may not obstruct the view of other spectators of the contest.
- Commercial Uses. Use of the films or tapes for commercial purposes must be approved by all schools involved in the contest.
- Regional and State Playoffs.
- Schools and/or individuals must have prior approval of the tournament director to film or videotape a regional or state tournament, and may not obstruct the view of other spectators of the contest.
- Commercial enterprises must have prior approval of the tournament director and the TAPPS director to film or videotape a regional or state tournament, and may not obstruct the view of other spectators of the contest.
- PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES
- Live animal mascots, cannons, firearms, fireworks, etc. are prohibited at TAPPS athletic contests.
- No dogs or other animals are allowed at TAPPS hosted contests.
- Except in their normal course of business, emergency vehicles shall not flash lights or sound sirens during the course of a game.
- Noisemakers are prohibited at TAPPS events held at field houses and/ or gymnasiums.
- In events held in field houses/gyms, megaphones may be used only by cheerleaders, in uniform. Megaphones must not be used to strike walls or playing surfaces.
- Bands, when permitted, shall play only during time-outs and intermissions. Individual instruments may not be used as noisemakers. (For football see Section 158 item G.)
- No sound systems, other than the one(s) provided by the host school are allowed at TAPPS Secured sites or at neutral sites unless mutually agreed.
- Body paint and like decoration shall not be permitted by players or spectators. (Exception: Small markings as sold by cheer or other school organization on the cheek are permitted) This rule applies to all games held at neutral sites. If a TAPPS school is not going to permit this activity at their facility, the opponent should be notified in advance of the contest.
- Air horns and bullhorns, handheld or otherwise, are not permitted at any TAPPS contest.
- The use of, or appearance of using, any controlled substance (alcohol, drugs,etc.) before, during or after games at contest sites is prohibited by TAPPS.
- Streamers, confetti or other such materials.
- State Playoff Information - Playoff information for all applicable sports will be posted on the TAPPS website by the TAPPS office.
- All-Star Games
- Students may participate in an all-star game if that student has eligibility remaining in that sport. However, if the student has eligibility remaining in that sport, they may not participate on an All Star team that is being coached by a coach from their school.
- Jurisdiction of Inter-District Disputes - The Athletic Executive Committee shall have jurisdiction in all disputes arising between district winners that have been duly certified.
- Cheerleaders; Spirit Groups - All cheer and spirit performances at any TAPPS activity shall be in accordance with safety standards as prescribed by the National Federation High School Spirit Handbook.
- Concussions
- Each TAPPS athletic director and coach will receive training in Concussion Management on an annual basis.
- Any player who shows signs, symptoms or behaviors associated with a concussion
- Must be removed from the contest
- May not return to play on the same day
- Shall not return until cleared to play by an appropriate health-care professional as determined by the school administrator.
- Written clearance must be obtained from the appropriate health care professional prior to student participation in any
- Practice
- Scrimmage
- Athletic Contest
- A report of all concussions will be made to the TAPPS office
- Tattoos
- TATTOOS MUST BE COVERED BY TAPE OR THE UNIFORM AT ALL TIMES. This includes while preparing for competition, during competition and for awards presentations.
- Exception: In swimming, athletes must have tattoos covered when not competing in a race and during warm-up/cool down.
- Game Uniform
- Athletes shall not remove their Game Jersey or uniform while inside the playing arena.
- Removal of one’s uniform shall be considered Unsportsmanlike Conduct and shall be considered grounds for removal from a contest.
- Penalty for noncompliance of governing rules uniform guidelines
- FIRST OFFENSE
- Two year probation
- Public Reprimand
- $500 fine
- SECOND OFFENSE
- Penalty to be determined after meeting with AEC and recommendation to the Executive Board.
- For Football in game penalties, please review the current NCAA Football Rules manual. The uniform guidelines are stated in Rule 1. Article 4.
- Use of Drones during competition
- Coverage
- TAPPS Drone Policies apply to school based personnel and
- Any other operators attending TAPPS or member school hosted events
- On behalf of the TAPPS member school or
- Otherwise engaged for the event
- Contests
- This section applies to all contests hosted by
- TAPPS member schools
- TAPPS
- Level of contests includes
- Interscholastic competitions including
- Scrimmages
- Games
- Tournaments
- meets
- Time
- Prior to competition
- When people are present on site including
- Walkthroughs
- Warmups
- During timeline of competition including
- Introductions
- Timeouts
- Halftimes
- Presentations
- Performances
- Warmups
- Post competition including
- When people are present
- Postgame ceremonies or activities
- Location
- Indoor Activities
- All activities fine art and athletic which take place indoors
- Outdoor Activities that are Stadium based
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Football
- Soccer
- Softball
- Volleyball
- Outdoor Activities that are other than stadiums
- Cross Country
- Golf
- Swim
- Tennis
- Certification of Drone Pilots
- Certification of Drone Pilots
- Drone pilots employed by or operating for a school are
- by definition a commercial enterprise and
- all drone operators should hold current commercial drone pilot certificates (FAA Part 107) before operating for a TAPPS school.
- All drone pilots not associated with a schools must
- Receive permission from TAPPS at least 14 days prior to the event
- Must hold a current commercial drone pilots certification
- Possess insurance
- with $1,000,000 minimum limits for Bodily Injury and Property Damage
- Naming TAPPS as an Additional Named Insured under the policy
- Present certificate of insurance meeting the requirements
- at the time of any waiver submission
- Prior to any approval for Drone Usage at an event hosted by TAPPS of a member school
- Waiver for drone use
- TAPPS may at its discretion entertain a waiver to allow drone use at a contest
- The conditions of such waiver and agreement shall be developed by TAPPS and available upon request.
- Limitation:
- TAPPS cannot grant a waiver which would be in conflict with any local facility, municipality, or other state or federal governmental agency
- TAPPS shall have full and final authority over drone use regardless of host facility rules, regulations or approval
- Pregame Policy
- At TAPPS hosted events the designated home team shall provide
- the pregame prayer
- performance of the National Anthem or TAPPS shall provide if requested.
- At events not hosted by TAPPS, the home team shall determine pregame policies.
- At neutral site games, the two schools shall agree on pregame policies prior to the competition.
- Performing Groups
- Basketball and Volleyball
- In order to maintain a proper perspective and to insure equity in competition for the participating teams, the following guidelines must be followed.
- The guidelines apply to
- Marching Bands
- Drum Lines
- Other live performance groups
- Music played over sound systems
- Band instruments, including drums, are not to be played at any time other than when the entire band is playing.
- During the contest, bands are to play only
- during pregame,
- Halftime,
- Postgame,
- the time between quarters,
- time-outs (except injury time-outs)
- Because the band acts as a spirit group,
- members should always act in a positive manner and
- must not do anything to distract or negatively affect the opposing team.
- It is the director’s responsibility to prevent his/her band from
- playing at inappropriate times,
- playing inappropriate music, or
- taunting the opposing team.
- Football and Soccer
- In order to maintain a proper perspective and to insure equity in competition for the participating teams, the following guidelines must be followed.
- The guidelines apply to
- Marching Bands
- Drum Lines
- Other live performance groups
- Music played over sound systems
- Band instruments, including drums, are not to be played at any time other than when the entire band is playing.
- During the contest, bands are to play only
- during pregame,
- Halftime,
- Postgame,
- the time between quarters,
- time-outs (except injury time-outs) and
- between plays (stopping prior to the referee’s whistle for “ready for play”).
- Bands seated near the end zone should not play if the line of scrimmage is inside the 10-yard line on the end close to the band.
- The band may play the school fight song, etc
- After a touchdown,
- field goal,
- extra point, or
- Safety
- However, the director must be sure to stop playing when the official blows the ready for play whistle to start the next play.
- When bands want to warm-up prior to halftime, directors should arrange this so that it is done in an area that is not a distraction to the contest. Note: No whistles may be used while the game is in progress.
- Because the band acts as a spirit group,
- members should always act in a positive manner and
- must not do anything to distract or negatively affect the opposing team.
- It is the director’s responsibility to prevent his/her band from
- playing at inappropriate times,
- playing inappropriate music, or
- taunting the opposing team.
Section 139 – Honors (All District, All State, Academic All State)
- Academic All State
- In all sports, TAPPS recognizes an Academic All State
- Nominations
- Nominate Students in TAPPS database
- Enter GPA for QUALIFYING students
- Save information
- Deadline for Nomination
- Thursday following state competition
- Indicated on the TAPPS Calendar
- Qualifications
- Junior or Senior
- Cumulative Grade Point Average of 90 or better or 3.5 on a 4.0 scale. (Conversion chart located below.)
- Students must achieve the following to be eligible for Academic All State team:
- Baseball
- First Team All District
- Second Team All District
- Basketball
- First Team All District
- Second Team All District
- Cross Country
- Place in the Top fifteen (15) in TAPPS State Meet
- Football
- First Team All District
- Second Team All District
- Golf
- Qualify for the state tournament
- Individual or Team Member
- Soccer
- First Team All District
- Second Team All District
- Softball
- First Team All District
- Second Team All District
- Swim
- Swim
- Qualify For State
- Individual or
- Relay Team Member
- Relay Alternates at Regional do not qualify for this honor
- Tennis
- Qualify for State Tournament
- Track and Field
- Qualify for State Meet
- Individual or Relay Team Member
- Volleyball
- First Team All District
- Second Team All District
- Wrestling
- Top 3 in each weight class at State Tournament
- Awards
- Academic All State listing on TAPPS website
- Academic All State Certificate
- Failure to meet deadline
- Complete Appeal Form
- PRIVATE Reprimand will be issued to the Athletic Director
GPA Conversion Chart:
GPA Percentile Letter Grade
4.0 95-100 A
3.9 94 A
3.8 93 A
3.7 92 A
3.6 91 A
3.5 90 A
3.4 89 B
3.3 88 B
3.2 87 B
3.1 86 B
3.0 85 B
- All District / All State Selection
- All District Teams TAPPS recognizes All District and All State teams as determined by committees in the following team activities:
- By Position
- Football
- Soccer
- Not by Position
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Softball
- Volleyball
- Follow guidelines listed in Section 139.G (no additional players will be recognized)
- All State Teams TAPPS recognizes All State Teams in the following activities as determined by order of finish in state competitions as outlined in the individual activity information:
- Cross Country
- First Team only (top ten runners)
- Golf
- First Team only (top ten finishers)
- Swim
- First Team - state champion
- Second Team - state runner up
- Honorable Mention - state bronze medal winner
- Tennis
- First Team - state champion
- Second Team - state runner up
- Honorable Mention - state bronze medal winners
- Track and Field
- First Team - state champion
- Second Team - state runner up
- Honorable Mention - state bronze medal winner
- Wrestling
- First Team - state champion
- Second Team - state runner up
- Honorable Mention - state bronze medal winner
- All District Organization
- Each school shall be represented at the All District Selection meeting
- Each school shall rank their players for consideration
- Each school shall have only one vote towards All District Selection
- Each school shall present student information for consideration
- Statistics
- Other information
- Each District shall determine the number of players to be represented on
- First Team
- Second Team
- Honorable Mention
- Not to exceed the number of players on the All State teams
- Superlatives
- Districts may determine superlatives (Offensive Player of the Year, etc)
- Superlative winners should be determined after the initial ranking of the All District Teams
- Superlatives winner must also be ranked for All State Consideration
- All District Selection Process
- The top ranked player from each school shall be placed in consideration for the All District Team
- The committee shall vote to determine the number one player in the District.
- The number two player from that school will now be elevated for consideration with the remaining top ranked players from the other schools.
- The committee shall vote to determine the number two player in the District.
- The next player from that school will be elevated to be considered with the remaining player pool.
- The committee shall vote to determine the number three player in the District.
- The process shall continue in this manner until the All District Teams are complete.
- Districts should review the First Team All District rankings in respect to the All State meetings to insure that the player rankings will best serve the district when All State team are selected.
- Districts should not predetermine player rankings based on the order of team finish in the district. (ie. District champion receives first two places, runner up next two places, etc.)
- District President shall
- Compile All District Rankings
- Complete the TAPPS All District selection process on TAPPS database
- Complete the All District Selection Process prior to the first round of playoffs for the classification or division as shown on the official TAPPS Calendar. District shall not wait to determine playoff success in advance of submitting the All District teams.
- All State Organization
- Each DISTRICT First Team shall be represented at the All STATE Selection meeting
- The meeting Chair shall be determined in the following order if present at the All State Meeting.
- State Champion
- State Runner Up
- Final Four Participant
- Each DISTRICT shall present their players as ranked on the All District Form for consideration
- Each DISTRICT shall have only one vote towards All STATE Selection
- Each DISTRICT shall present student information for consideration
- Statistics
- Other information
- Each All State Committee shall determine the
- First Team
- Second Team
- Honorable Mention
- Superlatives
- All State Committees shall not determine Superlatives
- All State Teams
- No additional players will be recognized
- By Position
- Football (6 Man)
- Offense
- 1 Tight Ends
- 2 Receivers
- 1 Center
- 1 Quarterback
- 2 Running Backs
- 1 Spread Back
- 1 Utility Back
- 1 Kicker
- 1 Offensive Lineman
- Defense
- 3 Linemen
- 3 Linebackers
- 4 Defensive Backs
- 1 Punter
- Football (11 Man)
- Offense
- 5 Linemen
- 4 Backs
- 4 Receivers
- 1 Tight End
- 1 Quarterback
- 1 Kicker
- Athlete
- Defense
- 5 Linemen
- 5 Linebackers
- 5 Secondary
- 1 Punter
- Soccer
- 4 Offensive Players
- 4 Midfield Players
- 4 Defensive Players
- 2 Goalkeepers
- Not by Position
- Baseball
- 15 players on each team
- Basketball
- 12 players on each team
- Softball
- 15 players on each team
- Volleyball
- 12 players on each team
- All State Selection Process
- The top ranked player from each DISTRICT shall be placed in consideration for the All STATE Team
- The committee shall vote to determine the number one player in the STATE.
- The number two player from that DISTRICT will now be elevated for consideration with the remaining top ranked players from the other schools.
- The committee shall vote to determine the number two player in the STATE.
- The next player from that DISTRICT will be elevated to be considered with the remaining player pool.
- The committee shall vote to determine the number three player in the STATE.
- The process shall continue in this manner until the All STATE Teams are complete.
- The State Committee shall not add additional places to the All State Teams.
- Honorable Mention teams are determined by the State Committee and not by the districts or schools.
- The State Committee should not predetermine player rankings based on the order of team finish in the district. (ie. State champion receives first two places, runner up next two places, etc.)
- State Committee Chairman shall
- Compile All State Rankings
- Complete the TAPPS All State Form
- Submit the TAPPS All State Form
- Complete Form
- Complete the Award Recap Form
- Statistics
- District Stats should be used for the All District Selection process
- Season Stats should be used for the All State Selection process
- All State Meetings
- Activities
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Football
- Soccer
- Softball
- Volleyball
- Meeting Dates
- As indicated on the TAPPS calendar
- Following State Tournament
- Meeting Information
- Location
- Bellmead Civic Center
- 3900 Parrish St, Waco, TX 76705
- Time
- 10:00 am Meeting
- Attendance
- Mandatory that each district send a representative
- District representation
- At least one representative
- May have more than one representative
- Each district will have one vote
- Failure to attend the meeting
- Students will receive consideration for All State Teams
- Public Reprimand for all schools in District
- Probation for One year in that Activity
- Team Composition
- By Position
- Football
- Soccer
- Not by Position
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Soccer
- Volleyball
- Information
- TAPPS
- All State Selection Process
- All District Teams
- All State Recap to be completed by committee
- District Representatives
- Player Statistics
- For all players on District First Team
- Statistics in keeping with published guidelines
- NFHS
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Soccer
- Softball
- Volleyball
- NCAA
- Football
- Other information
- All State Teams
- Return completed forms to TAPPS Office
- Pick up materials for those schools in attendance
- Announcement
- TAPPS All State Teams
- Posted alphabetically by school
- Posted on TAPPS Website
- Wednesday following All State Meeting
- All District Teams
- Ranked as submitted by District
- Posted on TAPPS Website
- Wednesday following All State Meeting
- All Tournament
- TAPPS recognizes All Tournament Teams for the following activities:
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Soccer
- Softball
- Volleyball
- The teams shall be comprised of the following
- Baseball 12 members
- Basketball 10 members
- Soccer 12 members
- Softball 12 members
- Volleyball 12 members
- TAPPS will recognize an All Tournament Team based on a
- Selection of the Coaches involved
- Coaches will rank the top four players from their team
- Coaches shall rank the top four players from their opponent(s)
- Ballots shall be collected by the TAPPS staff at the event
- Ballots shall be tallied by the TAPPS staff
- Presentation of the Awards shall be made prior to the Presentation of medals to the state Champion and Runner Up at the conclusion of the Championship game
- Any player ejected from a Final Four contest is not eligible for inclusion on the All Tournament Team.
- All District Meetings
- Activities (Team Sports)
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Football
- Soccer
- Softball
- Volleyball
- Meeting Dates
- Prior to Deadline
- Deadline Posted on TAPPS Calendar
- Meeting Information
- Location determined by district
- Time determined by district
- Attendance
- Mandatory that each school send a representative
- Failure to attend the meeting
- Students will receive consideration for All District Team
- Public Reprimand for Coach
- Public Reprimand for School
- Probation for One year in that Activity
- Team Composition
- By Position
- Football
- Soccer
- Not by Position
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Soccer
- Volleyball
- Information
- District Meeting Host
- All State Selection Process
- All District Recap to be completed by Host / President
- District Representatives
- Player Statistics
- For all players to be considered
- TAPPS Form for
- Basketball
- Baseball
- Softball
- Volleyball
- Statistics in keeping with published guidelines
- NFHS
- Baseball
- Basketball
- Soccer
- Softball
- Volleyball
- NCAA
- Football
- Other Information
- All District Teams
- Complete the All District Team Form
- Submit to TAPPS Office
- Provide copy for all district teams
- Obtain Statistics for all First Team All District Players
- Submit Statistics to TAPPS Office
- Announcement
- District
- Determine release date
- TAPPS
- Posted on TAPPS website
- Wednesday following All State Meeting
- Ranked as submitted on All District Team
- TAPPS information will only include information posted by the district president in TAPPS database.
- Of The Year
- TAPPS recognizes “Of the Year”
- Recipients
- One Coach - Male
- One Coach - Female
- One Female Athlete
- One Male Athlete
- Classifications
- 1A
- 2A
- 3A
- 4A
- 5A
- 6A
- Students are eligible to win the award twice.
- Nomination
- Form on TAPPS database
- Form must be completed prior to the Published Deadline
- Schools may nominate
- one person per category
- Athletes Of the Year
- JUNIORS and SENIORS
- Preference will be given to SENIORS.
Section 140 – Concurrent Participation in Non-School Team Sports
TAPPS does not prohibit concurrent participation by TAPPS athletes during the season. Athletes are to be reminded that TAPPS contests and practices take precedence over other league/tournament games or practices. Students attending a TAPPS school may not participate on Home School or Independent teams in a sport governed by TAPPS.
Section 141 – Playoff Format
- Team Sports Contest Information
- LINK TO PLAYOFF CONTEST CHECKLIST
- Contests
- Playoff Game days are
- indicated on the TAPPS calendar,
- unless both teams otherwise agree.
- If game dates are changed by mutual agreement, the game cannot interfere with the next round of the state contests determined by TAPPS. The state contests may not be changed by individual agreement, only by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- Game times are by
- mutual agreement or
- coin toss.
- If game dates are changed by mutual agreement, the game cannot interfere with the next round of the state contests determined by TAPPS. The state contests may not be changed by individual agreement, only by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- Playoff Practice Games
- Teams that qualify for the playoffs are allowed one practice game, in each round of the playoffs until they are
- eliminated or
- the championship is decided.
- Playoff practice games do not count in the total number of games allowed per season.
- Practice contests must be held prior to the round of competition for which they are awarded.
- Practice games shall not take precedence over nor interfere with the scheduling of playoff contests
- Neutral Sites - When securing a neutral site
- The game shall be scheduled approximately halfway between the two schools, unless mutually agreed otherwise.
- If the two schools cannot agree,
- each shall select a neutral site
- and settle the game site by a coin toss.
- Unless mutually agreed otherwise,
- the game field or court
- must meet the minimum standard for competition as indicated in the approved rules for that sport, to be used
- in district and
- play-off games.
- Home Team
- To be determined by
- Mutual Agreement or
- Coin Toss
- Responsibilities
- Securing Facility
- Payment of Facility
- Securing Officials
- Payment of Officials
- Expenses
- In all play-off games, (other than regional, semi-final and finals provided by TAPPS)
- All game expenses shall be paid from the gate receipts.
- Any remaining funds are to be
- equally divided by the two schools,
- unless mutually agreed otherwise.
- If the game is played at the facility of the home team, and gate receipts do not cover the game expenses,
- the home team should absorb the loss, since the visiting team had travel expenses (see Part c below),
- unless mutually agreed otherwise.
- If the game is played at a neutral site, and the gate receipts do not cover expenses,
- both teams should share in the expenses equally,
- unless mutually agreed otherwise.
- If the home team moves the game to a facility other than their home court or field,
- the home team assumes the full expense of the facility rental,
- unless otherwise agreed upon.
- In playoff contests,
- if the schools cannot agree on the officials
- and the chapter to be used is determined
- by coin toss (or similar manner)
- or assigned by TAPPS,
- both schools are equally responsible for the payment of the officials
- before any other expenses are deducted from the gate.
- Playoff Format - Bracket Development - Brackets in ALL Classes/Divisions with more than 3 districts are drawn so that the district champ and runner up from the same district do not meet in the play-offs until the semi-finals of the state tournament.
- Basketball and Volleyball
- All classifications.
- Higher seed shall be the home team until the Regional round.
- Exception: If a four (4) seed and a five (5) seed are matched in the bracket, this game shall be a neutral site contest.
- Regional rounds shall be neutral site as determined by mutual agreement or coin toss.
- Baseball and Softball
- All divisions
- Higher seed shall be the home team until the Regional round.
- Exception: If a four (4) seed and a five (5) seed are matched in the bracket, this game shall be a neutral site contest.
- Regional rounds shall be neutral site as determined by mutual agreement or coin toss.
- Fall Soccer and Winter Soccer
- All divisions
- Higher seed shall be the home team until the Regional round.
- Exception: If a four (4) seed and a five (5) seed are matched in the bracket, this game shall be a neutral site contest.
- Regional rounds shall be neutral site as determined by mutual agreement or coin toss.
- Game sites in Football for ALL Divisions
- 11 Man Football
- The higher ranked team is home in the Area round,
- Exception: If a four (4) seed and a five (5) seed are matched in the bracket, this game shall be a neutral site contest.
- after that, games to be played at a neutral site,
- by mutual agreement or
- coin toss,
- until TAPPS schedules the site.
- If a District Champion gets a bye in the first round, they are NOT home team in second round;
- game must be neutral site by
- agreement or
- coin toss.
- 6 Man Football
- the higher ranked team is home in the first round only
- after that, games to be played at a neutral site,
- by mutual agreement or
- coin toss,
- until TAPPS schedules the site.
- District Champs receiving a bye in the first round, are NOT home team in second round; game must be neutral site by
- agreement or
- coin toss.
- Playoff Bracket Format
- In Playoff Brackets, other than football, the 50% rule will be used to determine playoff qualifiers from each district when possible.
- Numbers will be rounded up to achieve 50% representation form the district (ie. 7 teams in the district would have 4 representatives)
- Teams will be added to insure the brackets are set on a 12 team, 16 team, 24 team, or 32 team bracket.
- If a team that would not have qualified for the playoffs under the above 50% rule is placed in the bracket, that team may opt to withdraw from the playoffs prior to the first round games without penalty.
- This decision must be made prior to district certification and no team shall be advanced in the district rankings to take this position.
- However, once entering the playoffs a team must complete the postseason
- In all brackets where possible, at least one team shall not make the playoffs.
- In the event byes are necessary, they shall be assigned
- To district champions first
- with geography of the first round in consideration.
- If there are no eligible opponents in the neighboring districts, then teams shall not be selected in the opposite half of the bracket to fill the bye.
- Teams from the same district will not be placed in the bracket to alleviate the bye.
- Last resort shall be a coin toss to determine which district shall get byes.
Teams in District Advance to Playoffs
1 1
2 1
3 2
4 2
5 3
6 3
7 4
8 4
9 5
10 5
11 6
12 6
- Wildcard Information
- The playoff format may utilize the Wildcard format to complete the playoffs as determined by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- The point system as shown in the Wildcard Point Table shall be used to assign points
- For wins only,
- Over teams as classified by their division of play.
- Wildcard points shall be calculated weekly throughout the season.
- Schools shall record scores in TAPPS database.
- Schools shall enter opponent code in TAPPS database.
- The Wildcard teams shall be determined by
- Total Points
- In the event of a tie
- Head to Head Competition
- Athletic Executive Committee
- Coin Flip
- Wild Card Point Table
TAPPS Division I | 5 |
TAPPS Division II | 4 |
TAPPS Division III/IV | 3 |
UIL 6A | 7 |
UIL 5A | 6 |
UIL 4A | 5 |
UIL 3A | 4 |
UIL 2A Division I | 3 |
UIL 2A Division II | 3 |
UIL 1A Division I | 3 |
UIL 1A Division II | 2 |
SPC | 4 |
Independent (TAPPS Approved) | 2 |
Six Man Football
TAPPS Division I | 5 |
TAPPS Division II | 4 |
TAPPS Division III | 3 |
UIL Division I | 5 |
UIL Division II | 4 |
TCAF /TAIAO / TCAL | 2 |
- Click HERE to view 2024-26 Qualifiers Tables
Section 142 – Health and Safety
- The purpose of the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools is to organize and provide extracurricular activities for students attending our member schools. Paramount in the organization’s efforts is the safety of these students.
- Emergency Action Plan
- Schools shall develop emergency action plan for all facilities in which contests are hosted
- Schools shall ensure that an AED is available in all facilities in which contests are hosted.
- School - Student Health Awareness
- Schools shall have a health and safety plan for extracurricular activities
- Schools shall notify parents and students that reporting of injuries and health conditions is encouraged
- Schools shall notify parents and students that the reporting of injuries and conditions will be viewed and treated in a positive manner by all school personnel
- Schools shall notify parent and students that the course of treatment and return to play as offered by a licensed health care professional of the parents choosing shall be honored
- First Aid
- Training – School Personnel
- Each TAPPS athletic director and coach will receive training in Concussion Management on an annual basis.
- Training shall encompass
- Basic First Aid
- Sports Specific First Aid
- Cover injuries likely to occur in sporting activity
- Wound Care
- Contagious Disease
- Breaks and Fractures
- Asthma and other such conditions
- Diagnosis
- Emergency Treatment
- CPR
- AED use
- Training may be provided by
- Red Cross
- TEA Recognized provider
- NFHS Course
- School Designated provider
- Training – Student
- Training shall be provided for Parents and Students
- Training shall provide the school policy for injury awareness and treatment
- Training shall identify the school personnel to be notified in the event of injury or health condition
- Concussion
- Training – School Personnel
- Each TAPPS athletic director and coach will receive training in Concussion Management on an annual basis.
- This training shall consist of at least 1 hours training
- Training shall encompass
- Basic Concussion Awareness
- School Concussion Protocol
- Player Education
- Training may be provided by
- TEA Recognized provider
- NFHS Course
- School Designated provider
- Training – Student
- School personnel shall provide concussion awareness training for
- Students
- Parents
- This training shall include
- Basic Symptoms of Concussions
- School protocol for diagnosis
- School Protocol for return to play
- Basic School policy shall encompass and endorse
- Any player who shows signs, symptoms or behaviors associated with a concussion
- Must be removed from the contest
- May not return to play on the same day
- Shall not return until cleared to play by an appropriate health-care professional as determined by the school administrator.
- Written clearance must be obtained from the appropriate health care professional prior to student participation in any
- Practice
- Scrimmage
- Athletic Contest
- Sudden Cardiac Arrest
- Training – School Personnel
- Each TAPPS athletic director and coach will receive training in Sudden Cardiac Arrest on an annual basis.
- Training shall encompass
- Recognition of the basic symptoms of SCA
- Recognition of signs of Cardiac Distress
- Schools shall document training in SCA
- Training may be provided by
- TEA Recognized provider
- NFHS Course
- School Designated provider
- Students whose physical examination indicates the possible condition which may cause an SCA or exhibiting signs shall not be allowed to participate in athletic activities unless approved by a licensed health care professional of the parent’s choosing.
- Training – Student
- Parents and students shall receive basic training in SCA.
- Training shall encompass
- Recognition of the basic symptoms of SCA
- Recognition of signs of Cardiac Distress
- Schools shall document training in SCA
- Temperature Illness – Heat and Cold Related
- Training – School Personnel
- Each TAPPS athletic director and coach will receive training in Temperature Illness on an annual basis.
- Training shall encompass
- Recognition of Heat Distress
- Treatment of Heat Distress
- Prevention of Heat Distress
- Prevention of Cold related distress
- Weather Policy for Temperature
- In the event the outside temperature or heat index reaches 100 degrees as determined by the home team or event host, interschool contests shall not be played without the mutual consent of all teams involved in the contest.
- In the event the outside temperature or chill factor reaches 32 degrees as determined by the home team or event host, interschool contests shall not be played without the mutual consent of all teams involved in the contest.
- This determination should be made by the Athletic Directors at each school at the time of the contest with student safety at the forefront of the decision making process.
- Heat in August
- TAPPS supports the following health and safety option for early season games as a model for game management.
- When the actual or heat indexed temperature at kickoff is 100 degrees or higher, this procedure shall apply.
- A mandated official timeout shall be called during the first dead ball period following the 6 minute mark in each quarter for 11 man football and after the 5 minute mark for six man games.This will be an official timeout and shall not count towards the timeouts allotted either team.
- This rule shall apply to games hosted by TAPPS schools
- The home team is responsible for notifying each of the following in advance of the contest:
- Visiting team
- Assigned Officials
- This rule shall apply to High School varsity and sub-varsity contests
- Steroid Use and Abuse
- TAPPS discourages the use of any performance enhancing drugs or substances.
- This section applies to steroids whether natural or synthetic.
- This policy applies to other substances used to mimic or achieve similar results as steroids
- Training – School Personnel
- Each TAPPS athletic director and coach will receive training in on an annual basis.
- The training shall include
- Dangers of steroid use
- Dangers of performance enhancing drugs
- Dangers of the use of energy drinks
- Symptoms and signs of the use of steroids or drugs used for similar purposes.
- Schools shall have a plan in place to handle potential or suspected steroid use or abuse.
- Training – Student
- Parents and students shall be trained in the dangers of steroid use and abuse
- Parents should be trained in the school policy pertaining to suspected or confirmed steroid use.
- Injury Reporting
- In order to gather information for study and review in the area of student health and injury prevention, TAPPS requires schools to promptly report injuries.
- Injuries are to be reported through the INJURY page on TAPPS database.
Section 143 - Tie Breakers
- Please see the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
TAPPS Athletic Contest Rules
Baseball Plan
Section 145 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter B
BASEBALL PLAN
(Boy Event; Six Classifications)
Rules in Sections 130-144 also apply to the Baseball Plan.
Section 146 – Qualifications
- DISTRICT PLAY. Teams must qualify for the state play-off by competition in district play.
- PLAYING DATES. Starting dates for practice, scrimmages, first playing date, and district certification are shown on the current TAPPS calendar.
- NUMBER OF GAMES.
- No team shall compete in more than three (3) individual tournaments, plus 22 games in a season, up to and including the last date for certifying district champions.
- Games after district certification
- No VARSITY games may be scheduled or played after the certification date, except by teams who are in the play-offs.
- No additional games may be played by a team once it has been eliminated from the playoffs.
- no SUB VARSITY games can be scheduled or played after the district certification date.
- All District games must be played and all District games count as varsity games on the schedule.
- No game is to be scheduled on Sunday.
- Those students who play on both the JV and Varsity may play in no more than 3 tournaments plus a total of 28 games (Varsity and JV games combined).
- A district tournament or district play-off does not count as one of the three tournaments.
- Teams in the play offs are allowed one practice game between each round of the playoffs. These games do not count toward the total games allowed.
- Schools may substitute two (2) games for each tournament dropped-or-add an additional tournament for each 2 dropped games. These changes should be clearly noted on the school’s official schedule.
- A varsity starter shall not play on a junior varsity team unless the opposing coach gives his permission, and there are not enough junior varsity players to begin the contest. Under no circumstances should a varsity starter be allowed to play when there are junior varsity player(s) on the bench.
- SCHEDULES AND ROSTERS
- Schedules should be input into TAPPS database prior to the first interscholastic contest and should be updated as changes occur.
- Rosters should be input into TAPPS database prior to the first district contest and updated as changes occur.
- EXCEPTION TO RESOLVE DISTRICT TIES.
- Two Schools Tied. To resolve a two-way tie, the district executive committee may authorize a single elimination game. The tie breaking game may be in addition to the 20 allowed games.
- Three or More Schools Tied. If three or more schools are tied, the district executive committee may authorize a single elimination tournament in addition to the total number of games and tournaments allowed for the season.
- QUALIFICATION BY CLASSIFICATION. The number of teams qualifying for the play-offs will be noted in Section 141.
- CERTIFICATION OF PLAY-OFF QUALIFIERS. The District President shall certify the District Champion and other play-off qualifiers to the TAPPS office by the deadline shown on the current year TAPPS calendar.
- SEND TO TAPPS OFFICE. The District President's certification and play-off entries, and program information (rosters, etc.) shall be sent to the TAPPS office by the deadline on the TAPPS current calendar, through TAPPS database.
Section 147 – Rules
The National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) Baseball Rules shall govern all TAPPS games.
- NATIONAL FEDERATION RULES EXCEPTIONS
- Metal cleats may be worn.
- For minor violation of the Bench and Field Conduct rule,
- the umpire may restrict the coach to the dugout.
- Offender may not be in coaches boxes and may not come on the field except to attend an injured player.
- More abusive or flagrant behavior shall require banishment from the game.
- The umpire may bypass this step with or without warning and eject a coach.
- SPEED-UP RULES. Speed-up rules as outlined by the National Federation may be used:
- in non-district and in playoff games by mutual consent of the schools prior to the beginning of the contest;
- in district play by district executive committee approval prior to district play.
- If prior mutual consent is not obtained in a., or if approval is not obtained by district executive committee in b., speed-up rules shall not be used; and
- in the state tournament, by decision of the tournament director.
- NATIONAL FEDERATION SPEED-UP RULES - RUNNERS.
- The team at bat may use courtesy runners for the pitcher and/or the catcher as soon as they reach base. The same runner may not be used for both positions. Neither the pitcher nor the catcher will be required to leave the game under such circumstances.
- Players who have participated in the game in any other capacity are ineligible to serve as courtesy runners.
- A player may not run as a courtesy runner for the pitcher or the catcher and then be used as a substitute for another player in that half inning. NOTE: An unreported courtesy runner is an illegal substitute. PENALTY: For illegal substitution, such substitute shall be ejected.
- PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES. See Section 138.
- OFFICIAL BALL - For all contests TAPPS schools must use the Baden Perfection Pro Baseball.
- PRACTICE BALLS. Each team is responsible for its own practice balls for warm ups in batting and infield practice.
- COACHING BOXES. Student players in uniform or coaches may occupy the coaching boxes.
- PRE-GAME WARMUP. It is recommended that batting practice be eliminated and that each team be given 10 minutes for infield and outfield workouts prior to each game.
- HEAD PROTECTORS. All players must wear head protectors when batting and when on the base paths.
- RESOLVING TIES IN WON/LOSS PERCENTAGE. Districts should outline procedures (before the season begins) for determining two representatives in their district. Definite procedures should be outlined (in writing) to provide orderly facilitation for teams tied in win/loss percentage. Especially remember to outline a procedure to be used when three teams are tied for the district runner-up spot.
- GAMES
- All games will be for seven innings (unless tied).
- Exception: The 10-run rule after 4 ½ or 5 innings shall be employed
- Exception: The 15-run rule after 3 innings shall be employed
- In non-district games if a game is called before completion of the required number of innings, the umpire shall declare the contest "no game."
- In district games, the game shall be considered suspended and the rules governing suspended games shall be followed. Pitch count shall be considered as if a tournament if the game is continued the next day. If not resumed the next day, the pitch count rules and rest periods shall be applied.
- TIE GAMES. A regulation called game where a winner cannot be determined shall be counted as ½ game won and ½ game lost for each team and the game shall not be replayed. If the game is called before the completion of the number of innings, the umpire shall declare the contest "no game." The game shall be replayed from the start when and where determined by the two schools involved.
- SUSPENDED GAMES IN PLAYOFFS. In playoff games past the district level, any suspended game shall be continued from the point of suspension at a later time.
- RAIN (BAD WEATHER) POLICY FOR BASEBALL PLAYOFFS. Teams may not play after the deadline for determining a district representative unless the following conditions are met:
- Every effort must be made by both teams to determine the winner before the deadline.
- If weather conditions make this impossible, then permission must be obtained from the potential next round opponents (or opponent). Example: District 1 winner and 2 runner-up find they cannot get their playoff decided by the deadline. They must obtain permission from District 3 winner and 4 runner-up representatives to play after the deadline (or just District 3 winner, if District 3 has already defeated District 4 runner-up in their respective playoff game).
- If the teams or team involved in District 3 winner and 4 runner-up fail to give approval, then District 1 winner and 2 runner-up will have to determine a representative before the deadline specified in the baseball playoff procedures.
- Extreme scheduling difficulties such as those mentioned above could result in a coin flip determining the representative to the next round.
- Every effort must be made to get the representative determined on time. This includes obtaining neutral sites and scrambling for any available field. This could mean giving up a home field advantage if another field is playable.
- In single elimination playoffs a team deciding a round after the deadline with the approval of the next round opponents will have to play on the date specified by the next round opponent.
- OFFICIALS. See Section 134.
- BI-DISTRICT/REGIONAL GAMES. The first round play-off games shall be Bi-district games, if more than eight teams qualify for the play-offs. If less than eight teams qualify, the first round shall be regional games.
- BI-DISTRICT/REGIONAL SITE. Bi-District/Regional games shall be played at the site indicated in Section 141
- ARRANGEMENTS. The two teams involved shall be responsible for all arrangements for the game and shall pay all expenses.
- GATE RECEIPTS. Gate receipts, after expenses shall be divided between the two schools, unless mutually agreed before the game.
- REPORTING SCORES
- The winning coach shall report playoff scores in TAPPS database as soon as possible after the conclusion of the contest.
- Coach shall enter the next playoff contest information in TAPPS database as soon as game information is concerned.
- Pitch Counts shall be entered into TAPPS database immediately following any contest at both the varsity and sub-varsity level.
- ROSTERS. Team rosters must be in the TAPPS STATE OFFICE prior to the beginning of district play. ROSTERS MUST BE SUBMITTED THROUGH TAPPS database.
- PLAY OFF FORMAT
- Admission for Bi-district and Regional should be determined by the teams involved. Admission for State Semi-Finals and Finals shall be determined by TAPPS.
- Baseball playoffs are
- single elimination.
- by mutual agreement, Bi-District thru Regional rounds MAY be 2 out of three.
- Two out of Three Series Rules
- STATE SEMIFINALS AND FINALS SHALL BE SINGLE GAME ELIMINATION.
- TAPPS rules will apply. The basis for TAPPS rules is the National Federation of State High School Associations.
- Time Limits. Any time limits at Bi-District and Regional games shall be agreed upon by both schools prior to the beginning of the game. There is NO TIME LIMIT in State Tournament Games.
- Run Rule.
- The 10-run rule after 4 ½ or 5 innings shall be employed
- The 15-run rule after 3 innings shall be employed
- Number of Umpires. (A) For District at least two TAPPS Approved umpires per game shall be used; (B) In the playoffs three TAPPS Approved umpires shall be used; (C) In the state tournament umpires shall be scheduled from more than one chapter, if possible. (D) Unless mutually agreed, umpires will be selected from a neutral chapter.
- Home Team. Home team designations shall be determined by a coin flip in playoff games on neutral fields, unless mutually agreed otherwise.
- Baseballs. In the play-off games, schools shall use Baden Perfection Pro Baseballs, with each team retaining their own balls following the game. BADEN will provide all baseballs for the state tournament.
- In Baseball Final Four Games
- HOME and VISITOR will be determined by coin flip prior to the game.
- Teams shall use the dugout assigned by the TAPPS staff.
- BATTING CAGE times will be assigned prior to Final Four games.
Section 148 – Pitch Count Rules
- Purpose: The following information outlines the TAPPS Pitch Count plan which is required by the National Federation of State High School Associations.
- Basic Information:
- High school pitchers will be limited to no more than 110 pitches per day.
- During the season, pitch count total is determined at the end of each single game.
- Only pitches thrown in the game count (warm up pitches do not count).
- Rest is defined as not using a pitcher in a contest.
- Rest days are counted for the full day regardless of appearance start time. (ex: Pitcher throws 95 or 97 pitches (this is based on pitch count limit selected) on Friday morning of tournament. Rest days are Sat, Sun, Mon, and Tues. He is eligible to pitch on Wednesday, not Tuesday night.).
- A pitcher will be allowed to complete current at-bat even if the maximum number of pitches during the at-bat is reached, but must exit game as a pitcher after that hitter regardless of recording an out or number of outs in inning.
- There are no restrictions on allowing any game day pitcher (starter or reliever) from resuming play in the field after being removed as a pitcher, regardless of pitch count.
- Umpires shall have no jurisdiction pertaining to pitch count.
- Pitch Count Table:
Pitches | Days Rest |
1-30 | 0 |
31-45 | 1 |
46-65 | 2 |
66-85 | 3 |
86-110 | 4 |
- Tournament or Series:
- In multi game series or tournaments, pitch count can be divided into separate appearances as long as combined total does not exceed appropriate pitch count max. Days of rest will be determined by final pitch count of the series or tournament. (ex: In post season series, starter goes (X) innings for a total pitch count of (X) (amount not exceeding max count) in first game of 3 game series. That same athlete can be used as short reliever in either of next 2 games of the same series, up to combined total pitch count max (85/110). At conclusion of second appearance, combined total number of pitches will determine days of rest based on chart.)
- Back to Back Games due to postponement or suspension:
- In the case of games that are rained out, and rescheduled on consecutive nights, pitch counts will follow the series protocol.
- Double Header:
- In the case of a doubleheader, the second game will not serve as a rest day for pitchers who threw in the first game. However, pitch count max can be split up between both games and total pitches after second appearance will determine rest day period.
- If pitcher is used twice in 3-day series, the rest day start period will begin after the second appearance even if there was a day of rest in between.****
- Pitch Count Reporting:
- Home team will keep the OFFICIAL BOOK.
- Visiting team will keep the OFFICIAL PITCH COUNT
- Totals shall be confirmed between the teams between each inning.
- Coaches shall report the pitch counts for VARSITY and SUB-VARSITY contests including tournaments, non-district games, district games and post-district contests.
- Link to PITCH COUNT REPORT
- Accountability:
- Pitch counts are part of the health and safety protocols for TAPPS.
- Violations of the limitations will bring game suspensions and monetary fines for the head coach as determined by the Athletic Executive Committee (AEC) and approved by the TAPPS Executive Board. Failure to report pitch counts is subject to review by the AEC who will determine sanctions for the violation(s).
Basketball Plan
Section 149 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter C
BASKETBALL PLAN
(Boys’ and Girls’ Events; Six Classifications)
Rules in Sections 134-144 also apply to the Basketball Plan
Section 150 – Qualifications
- DISTRICT PLAY. Teams must qualify for the state playoffs by competition in district play.
- STARTING DATE. Starting date for practice, scrimmages, first playing date, and district certification are shown on the TAPPS current calendar.
- NUMBER OF GAMES AND TOURNAMENTS.
- No team shall compete in more than
- three (3) individual tournaments,
- plus 22 games in a season,
- up to and including the last date for certifying district champions.
- Schools may substitute
- two (2) games for each tournament dropped-
- or-add an additional tournament for each 2 dropped games.
- These changes should be clearly noted on the school’s official schedule.
- Games Per Day. No high school team or individual shall participate in more than two interschool basketball games per day including tournament games.
- Games after district certification
- No VARSITY games may be scheduled or played after the certification date, except by teams who are in the play-offs.
- No additional games may be played by a team once it has been eliminated from the playoffs.
- no SUB VARSITY games can be scheduled or played after the district certification date.
- All District games must be played and all District games count as varsity games on the schedule.
- No game is to be scheduled on Sunday.
- Those students who play on both the JV and Varsity may play in no more than 3 tournaments plus a total of 28 games (Varsity and JV games combined). The student is allowed only three (3) tournaments and games cannot be substituted for additional tournaments.
- A district tournament or district play-off does not count as one of the three tournaments.
- Teams in the play offs are allowed one practice game between each round of the playoffs. These games do not count toward the total games allowed.
- A varsity starter shall not play on a junior varsity team unless the opposing coach gives his permission, and there are not enough junior varsity players to begin the contest. Under no circumstances should a varsity starter be allowed to play when there are junior varsity player(s) on the bench.
- SCHEDULES AND ROSTERS
- Schedules should be input into the TAPPS database prior to the first interscholastic contest and should be updated as changes occur.
- Rosters should be input into the TAPPS database prior to the first district contest and updated as changes occur.
- DISTRICT TIES. If not previously scheduled, the district executive committee may authorize a single elimination game or single elimination tournament to resolve district ties. A one-game playoff could break a two-way tie. A single elimination tournament could resolve a tie between three or more schools. Note: These games must be completed by the district certification deadline and will not count on the 22 allowed games.
- TEAM SELECTION FOR PLAY-OFFS.
- Teams shall qualify for the play-offs according to Section 141.
- The district president shall certify the district champion and other play-off qualifiers to the TAPPS office by the deadline shown on the current year's TAPPS calendar.
Section 151 – Rules
- PLAYING RULES. The current National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) Basketball Rules shall govern TAPPS basketball.
- PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES. See Section 138.
- BENCH DECORUM.
- Coaches must remain seated on the bench at all times while the clock is running or is stopped except: the Head Coach may be standing in front of his or her seat within the confines of the designated coaches' box.
- He/she may give instruction to players or make substitutions, but at no time is he/she to question an official's decisions while seated or standing.
- Assistant coaches and bench personnel may rise in front of their seats to spontaneously react to an outstanding play by a member of their team or to acknowledge a replaced player, but must immediately return to their seat.
- THE COACHING BOX. The coaching box shall be determined by the current NFHS rules for Basketball.
- THREE POINT SHOT. The 3-point shot will be used in TAPPS play.
- MINIMUM PENALTY FOR UNSPORTSMANLIKE CONDUCT. See Section 138
- OFFICIALS. See Section 134.
- FORMAT FOR BI-DISTRICT / AREA GAMES
- Unless otherwise indicated, the first game on the bracket shall be the bi-district game.
- Unless mutually agreed otherwise, Bi-District games shall be played on the date(s) indicated on the current year's calendar.
- Unless mutually agreed otherwise, the game shall be played at the site indicated in Section 141.
- If a neutral site is chosen, a coin toss may be used to determine which team will be designated the home team.
- All arrangements for the bi-district games shall be according to instructions in Section 141
- A maximum admission of $5.00 for students/senior citizens and $10.00 for adults shall be charged for bi-district / area games.
- The home team shall furnish the TAPPS approved game ball.
- OFFICIALS.
- TAPPS Approved officials shall be used.
- Schools should attempt to secure neutral officials, which are
- satisfactory to both parties
- and agreed upon in advance
- Beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement
- Three (3) officials must be used in all playoff games.
- TAPPS PASSES are acceptable for free admission to Post District contests. (Local and district passes are not acceptable.)
- TABC, THSADA, THSCA and TGCA passes shall be accepted for the cardholder named on the pass.
- Spirit Squads in uniform shall be admitted free.
- The winning coach shall report playoff scores in the TAPPS database as soon as possible after the conclusion of the contest.
- Coach shall enter the next playoff contest information in TAPPS database as soon as game information is concerned.
- Winning coach shall check the current year bracket for the next game.
- FORMAT FOR REGIONAL GAMES
- All Classifications
- Home team shall be determined by coin flip.
- Schools shall secure neutral officials
- TAPPS Passes shall be accepted.
- Local/district passes shall not be accepted
- Spirit squads in uniform shall be admitted without charge
- Admission price shall be no more than the fee charged for the final four.
- FORMAT FOR STATE FINAL FOUR.In Basketball and Volleyball, for both semifinal and final round games, all coaches shall dress in a manner appropriate for the championship level of competition. Shorts, t-shirts, warm-ups and the like are not considered appropriate for the Final Four games. High heeled shoes should not be worn at the regional and state level of competitions at the request of our hosting venues. The TAPPS officials on site will have the final determination in the appropriateness of dress.
- Admission as determined by TAPPS will be charged for Semi-Finals and Finals.
- Only TAPPS APPROVED PASSES are acceptable for free admission.
- Local and district passes are not acceptable.
- Spirit squads in uniform shall be admitted free.
- Home team shall be determined by coin flip.
- BADEN Perfection Pro Elite is the Official Game Ball and will be provided by BADEN.
- TAPPS will provide neutral TAPPS APPROVED OFFICIALS for the state tournament, to include the clock operator.
- Officials may be assigned from more than one chapter.
- Music for warm ups will be furnished by the TAPPS. See Section 138
- AWARDS AT STATE TOURNAMENT
- Plaques shall be awarded as follows:
- State Champion
- State Runner Up
- Final Four plaque to each team eliminated in the semi-final game.
- Individual State Champion Medallions for Players on program roster, up to 20 players
- Individual State Runner up Medallions for Players on program roster, up to 20 players
- Individual State Final Four Medallions for Players on program roster, up to 20 players
- Champion, Runner-up, and Final Four teams may purchase additional medallions from the TAPPS State office for $15.00 each.
- SPORTING BEHAVIOR Teams entering the gymnasium prior to the contest should not run through the area occupied by the opposing team or under the basket where opponents are warming up.
- Teams should only enter, jog and warm-up on their half of the court.
- Gatherings intended to motivate a team after the warm-up period, during or following player introductions and any post game celebrations should be performed in the area directly in front of the team bench.
- If during the pregame or half-time warm-up one team leaves the floor, the other team may not use the entire court; teams may only warm up on their half of the court.
- Only authorized personnel should be permitted on the floor; all spectators should remain in designated areas.
- PERFORMANCE GROUPS
- In order to maintain a proper perspective and to insure equity in competition for the participating teams, the following guidelines must be followed.
- The guidelines apply to
- Marching Bands
- Drum Lines
- Other live performance groups
- Music played over sound systems
- Band instruments, including drums, are not to be played at any time other than when the entire band is playing.
- During the contest, bands are to play only
- during pregame,
- halftime,
- postgame,
- the time between quarters,
- time-outs (except injury time-outs)
- Because the band acts as a spirit group,
- members should always act in a positive manner and
- must not do anything to distract or negatively affect the opposing team.
- It is the director’s responsibility to prevent his/her band from
- playing at inappropriate times,
- playing inappropriate music, or
- taunting the opposing team.
- MERCY RULE
- In the event the score differential of a BASKETBALL contest reaches 40 or more points, the following provisions are to be implemented.
- First half timekeeping will not be affected.
- After half time, once the 40 point differential is reached, the Clock will run continuously except for the following stoppages:
- Time Outs
- Quarter End
- Injury Time Outs
- Once the Continuous Clock has begun, timekeeping does not revert back to normal procedures even if the point differential is reduced to below 40 points
- Applies to all contests involving two TAPPS schools
- Applies to sub-varsity and varsity competition
- Will be in effect for all final four contests.
Cross Country Plan
Section 153 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter D
CROSS COUNTRY PLAN
(Boys’ and Girls’ Event; Six Classifications)
Rules in Sections 130-142 also apply to the Cross Country Plan.
Section 154 – Qualifications
- OPEN QUALIFICATION. Cross Country is an open qualification event. TAPPS does not sponsor Districts meets, however, districts may organize meets as desired.
- DIVISIONS.
- There shall be one division for boys and one for girls in the respective classifications; 6A, 5A, 4A, 3A, 2A and 1A.
- Boys may not compete on or against girls’ teams.
- Girls may not compete on a boys team.
- ENTRIES.
- Number. A minimum of five participants and a maximum of seven participants shall constitute a team. No Alternates may be included on a school’s entries – see “Substitutions” below. If a school enters fewer than five students, it cannot compete for the team title, but participants can compete for individual awards.
- Substitutions. Schools may
- make substitutions,
- but NOT additions on the morning of the meet,
- up until 30 minutes before the classification’s races begin.
- Team Score. The place of the first five finishers on each team will count for the total team score.
- Ties to be broken in accordance with NFHS rules.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Team Limit. A school may enter only one team of boys and one team of girls in the state meet.
- Fee.
- Fees are payable at the meet site on the day of competition. Do not mail fees ahead of time to the TAPPS office.
- Schools will be charged for
- the number of students registered on the Entry Deadline as posted on the TAPPS Official Calendar,
- not the number actually competing on the day of the meet.
- The entry fee is determined by TAPPS.
- ENTRY Procedure
- All Cross Country entries will be processed online through the TAPPS database.
- Entries must be submitted by 11:59 PM the day of the deadline shown on the TAPPS current calendar.
- Schools not submitting entries by the deadline may be disqualified and shall not be allowed to participate.
Section 155 – Rules
- NATIONAL FEDERATION TRACK AND FIELD RULES will govern the meet.
- DISTANCE. The distance for the cross country event will be
- approximately two miles for girls (3200 meters)
- and three miles for boys (5000 meters).
- COURSE. The course must be marked with cones or flags at the corners and turns. Difficult or confusing turns must have a person directing the way or be clearly chalked. The coach of each team is RESPONSIBLE for his runners knowing the course before the race begins. No markings other than official course markings may be applied to or adjacent to the official course. Such action may be subject to disqualification of the school’s entries.
- FINISH LINE. The finish line is the front of the chute.
- FINISH LINE PERSONNEL.
- A clerk is required to establish the order of finish.
- A picker decides the close finishes. He determines the order of finish at the chute.
- Chute workers are provided by the schools to assist runners after they have crossed the finish line in the event assistance is needed. CHUTE WORKERS shall be entered in TAPPS database prior to the state meet
- STATE CHAMPION. The team with the lowest sum of its first five runners is the State Champion. The second lowest team score is the State Runner-Up.
- SCHEDULE: As posted for current year on the TAPPS website.
- SITE OF STATE MEET
- Directions to meet site and course layout will be posted on the TAPPS web site, www.tapps.biz.
- All tents, camps, and team areas will be set up in the designated area on the map. DO NOT SET UP TEAM OR SPECTATOR TENTS AND CAMPS INSIDE THE RACE COURSE OR IN NON-DESIGNATED AREAS.
- UNIFORMS:
- The cross country uniform consists of a minimum of jersey and shorts, of uniform color and design, which are not objectionable, and shoes, which may be supplied by the contestant.
- When other apparel is worn under the jersey; or if leotards, bike shorts or body suits are worn under the shorts, by more than one team member (two or more), that apparel must be the same color.
- Contestants may not wear caps, toboggans, headbands or jewelry. They may use string, rubber bands or tape to keep hair in place. (The meet referee may allow toboggans and other apparel in inclement weather.)
- Watches may be worn by competitors.
- If leotards, bike shorts, bodysuits, or closed legged briefs are worn, shorts must be worn over them.
- The competitor must wear the assigned contestant number. With chip timing in place, runners finishing with no number will not be scored in the meet.
- TATTOOS MUST BE COVERED BY TAPE OR THE UNIFORM AT ALL TIMES.
- In keeping with NFHS rules the following are emphasized:
- NFHS Rule 4.3.b.3
- NFHS Rule 4.3.b.6
- Violations may lead to disqualification
- MEET DIRECTOR. The Meet Director is responsible for typing and sending the final results to the participating schools within two weeks of the state meet finish. Those results shall include the team scores and all individual places.
Football Plan
Section 157 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter E
FOOTBALL PLAN
(Boys' Event; Five Classifications & Six-Man)
Rules in Sections 130-142 also apply to the Football Plan.
Section 158 – Qualifications
- Schools
- Schools shall be assigned to a football division for TAPPS competition
- 6-man football is divided into three divisions
- 11-man football is divided into four divisions.
- District Play Teams must qualify for the state playoffs by competition in district play.
- Exception: Based on travel or other criteria the board may designate schools as independent and allow for possible inclusion into the playoffs based on record and wild card points.
- Calendar
- Dates for the first practice,
- first interscholastic scrimmage and
- contests (Week 1-Week 11) shall be posted on the approved TAPPS calendar.
- Fall Practice Schedule
- For the days shown on the calendar as no pads, fall practice shall be limited to no pads or contact activity. Helmets may be worn during this time.
- For those days which occur after the date of first pads as indicated on the calendar, there are no equipment restrictions.
- Schools may not schedule more than three practices in any two day period, nor more than two practices in any one day.
- If two practices are scheduled on day one, day two is limited to one practice session.
- No school may schedule nor require a student to participate in more than three practices in any two day period regardless of level of participation.
- On days when two practices are held, the padded session shall not last longer than three hours. the other session shall not last longer than two hours and limited to
- no conditioning
- no contact activities
- no player equipment –helmets may not be worn during this time
- there shall be a minimum break of at least two hours between sessions
- On days when one practice is held
- the session shall not last longer than three hours
- The following activities are considered practice activities or practice
- On field practice
- Sport specific instruction
- Mandatory conditioning
- Water break
- Rest breaks
- Voluntary conditioning (may not be coach directed or supervised)
- Weight training
- The following are not considered practice activities
- Film Study
- Meetings
- Injury Treatment
- Equipment may be issued prior to the fourth day of practice.
- In Season Contests
- TAPPS football season shall
- Consist of 10 Varsity contest which may be played over 11 weeks
- There must be five (5) days between varsity contests.
- The five day restriction applies to
- Scrimmages and
- Games
- Teams may not play two games on the same calendar week without prior approval from TAPPS
- Teams playing independent schedules may not play contests after week 11 as indicated on the current year TAPPS calendar.
- Students are limited to no more than 6 quarters in a given 5 day period.
- This includes varsity and sub-varsity contests
- A quarter shall be counted towards this limit if the student participates in one or more plays from scrimmage.
- HALF TIME
- Football Intermission between halves is determined by Rule 3.2.1.b of the NCAA Football Rules and Interpretations. The intermission shall be 20 minutes.
- Football Intermission between halves may be changed with the mutual agreement of both schools.
- Change must be approved by both schools prior to the contest
- Change must be in writing
- Change must be communicated to the officiating crew
- Football Intermission between halves shall be split equally between the two schools unless mutually agreed to by both teams in advance of the contest.
- Change must be approved by both schools prior to the contest
- Change must be in writing
- 6 Man Exception: Halftime shall be 15 minutes unless mutually agreed prior to the contest.
- Mercy Rule - 11 Man Football
- In the event the score differential of an 11 MAN FOOTBALL contest reaches 40 or more points, the following provisions are to be implemented.
- First half timekeeping will not be affected.
- After half time, once the 40 point differential is reached, the Clock will run continuously except for the following stoppages:
- Time Outs
- Quarter End
- Injury Time Outs
- Once the Continuous Clock has begun, timekeeping does not revert back to normal procedures even if the point differential is reduced to below 40 points.
- Applies to all contests involving two TAPPS schools.
- SPRING FOOTBALL
- Spring Football
- Calendar
- 14 Days of instruction
- Days do not have to be consecutive
- Includes Saturdays
- Schools shall not provide instruction on Sundays
- 21 consecutive days from first to last day of instruction
- Participation
- Students not yet in High School may not participate in contact drills, scrimmages or games with or against High School students
- Students not enrolled and attending the TAPPS member school may not participate in Spring Football
- Non-Contact
- Shorts and T-Shirts
- 8th Graders may participate
- Contact
- Football equipment as listed in NCAA Rule 1.4.3-4.
- 8th Graders may not participate
- Competition
- Schools may practice with another school
- Schools may have an inter-squad scrimmage or game
- School may not have an inter-school game or scrimmage
- PERFORMING GROUPS
- In order to maintain a proper perspective and to insure equity in competition for the participating teams, the following guidelines must be followed.
- The guidelines apply to
- Marching Bands
- Drum Lines
- Other live performance groups
- Music played over sound systems
- Band instruments, including drums, are not to be played at any time other than when the entire band is playing.
- During the contest, bands are to play only
- during pregame,
- halftime,
- postgame,
- the time between quarters,
- time-outs (except injury time-outs) and
- between plays (stopping prior to the referee’s whistle for “ready for play”).
- Bands seated near the end zone should not play if the line of scrimmage is inside the 10-yard line on the end close to the band.
- The band may play the school fight song, etc
- After a touchdown,
- field goal,
- extra point, or
- safety
- However, the director must be sure to stop playing when the official blows the ready for play whistle to start the next play.
- When bands want to warm-up prior to halftime, directors should arrange this so that it is done in an area that is not a distraction to the contest. Note: No whistles may be used while the game is in progress.
- Because the band acts as a spirit group,
- members should always act in a positive manner and
- must not do anything to distract or negatively affect the opposing team.
- It is the director’s responsibility to prevent his/her band from
- playing at inappropriate times,
- playing inappropriate music, or
- taunting the opposing team.
Section 159 – Rules
The NCAA Rules shall govern TAPPS football.
- PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES. See Section 138.
- PLAY-OFF GAMES INFORMATION:
- Team Colors. Home team wears colored jerseys and visiting team wears white
- Tickets.
- All school passes and season tickets are suspended.
- Admissions to play-off contests shall be a maximum of:
- ADULTS - $10.00
- STUDENTS/SENIOR CITIZENS - $10.00
- State Finals shall be determined by TAPPS.
- General Admission $15.00
- Film exchange. By mutual agreement between schools involved. Film Exchange should include a minimum of three (3) quality films to be presented no later than 10 am on the Monday preceding the playoff contest. Hudl is an acceptable means of trading game films.
- Officials. Game officials for regional and semi-final games- by mutual agreement; participating schools will assign TAPPS APPROVED referees while working with a local officiating chapter. At least four officials shall be used in all play-off games. (See Officials, Section 134.)
- Officials for Final Games. TAPPS OFFICE will assign officials for Final Games.
- Neutral Site. If neutral site, home team determined by mutual agreement or coin flip.
- Home Team Responsibilities: (except Championship Game)
- Collect all gate money;
- Provide necessary personnel: announcer, clock operator, security, team doctor;
- Programs are to be provided at the home team's expense;
- Secure three chain crew officials to be paid from the gate receipts; and
- Gate Receipt Division
- From the receipts, pay all expenses.
- After expenses--divide the remaining receipts between the schools as agreed upon BEFORE THE GAME begins.
- REPORT RESULTS. The coach of the winning team of each play-off game shall complete as soon as possible after the conclusion of the game.
- Game Balls for State Championship Games. Only the official leather footballs shall be used for all games as in all TAPPS contests.
- TEAM ROSTERS Team rosters of play-off qualifiers must be in the TAPPS STATE OFFICE by the deadline to be assured of being included in the state championship programs. The roster form in TAPPS database will be the only form accepted by the state office.
- AWARDS AT STATE FINALS.
- Trophy/Plaques shall be awarded as follows:
- State Champion plaque
- State Runner-Up Plaque
- Individual State Champion Medallions; and
- Individual State Runner-Up Medallions for players on program roster as follows: 6-Man Football - 30
Division III Football - 70
Division II Football - 80
Division I Football - 90 - champion and Runner-Up teams may purchase additional medallions from the TAPPS State office for $15.00 each.
- See TAPPS Exceptions in Section 160.
- TIE GAMES -NCAA TIE BREAKER SYSTEM. The NCAA tie breaker system shall be used when it is necessary to decide a game for the purposes of determining a champion in a conference with two or more divisions or a team's progress to or in a tournament. NCAA football playing rules apply, with the following exceptions:
- Immediately after the conclusion of the fourth quarter, officials will instruct both teams to retire to their respective team areas. The officials will assemble at the 50-yard line and review the tie breaker procedures.
- The officials will escort the captains to the center of the field for the coin toss. The winner of the toss shall choose one of the following options:
- Offense or defense, with the offense at the opponent's 25-yard line to start the first series.
- Which end of the field shall be used for both series of that overtime period. NOTE: The winner of the toss may not defer his choice.
- The loser of the toss shall exercise the remaining option for the first extra period and shall have the first choice of the two options for subsequent even-numbered extra periods.
- Extra periods: An extra period shall consist of two series with Team A and Team B each putting the ball in play by a snap on or between the inbound lines on the designated 25-yard line, which becomes the opponent's 25-yard line. The snap shall be from midway between the inbound lines on the 25-yard line, unless a different position on or between the inbound lines is selected before the ready for play. After the ready for play, the ball may be relocated after a charged team time-out, unless preceded by a Team A foul or offsetting penalties.
- Team series: Each team retains the ball during a series until it scores or fails to make a first down. The ball remains alive after a change of team possession until it is declared dead. However, Team A may not have a first and 10 if it again possesses the ball after a change of team possession. Team A and B designations are the SAME AS DEFINED IN RULE 2-27-1 in the NCAA Football Rule Book. EXAMPLES:
- After each team has put the ball in play by snap at the beginning of its series, the score is tied or there has been no score. RULING: Begin the second extra period with the loser of the toss at the beginning of the first extra period having the choice of the two options.
- Other than on the try, Team B intercepts a pass or fumble for a touchdown or recovers fumble and scores a touchdown. RULING: Period and game are ended, and Team B is the winner.
- During the first series of a period, Team B intercepts a pass or fumble or recovers a fumble and does not score a touchdown. RULING: Team A series ended and Team B, which becomes Team A, starts its series of that period.
- During the first series of a period, Team A attempts a field goal and the kick is blocked. Team A recovers the kick, which never was beyond the neutral zone, and runs for a touchdown. RULING; Six points for Team A, and Team B begins it series of the period after the try.
- Team A attempts a field goal and the kick is blocked. Team A recovers the kick, which never was beyond the neutral zone and runs for a first down. RULING: Team A continues its series of the period with a first down and 10.
- During the first series of a period, Team A attempts a field goal on first, second or third down, and the kick is blocked. Team A recovers the kick, which never crossed the neutral one, and does not gain a first down. RULING: Team A's ball, next down.
- Team A attempts a field goal and the kick is blocked. Team B recovers the kick and runs it into Team A's end zone. RULING: Touchdown, game is ended.
- During the first series of a period, Team B--after gaining possession--loses possession to Team A, which scores a touchdown. RULING: The score counts, and Team B begins its series of the period after the try.
- During the first series of a period, Team B--after gaining possession--loses possession to Team A, which fails to score a touchdown. RULING: Team A series is ended, and Team B begins its series of that period.
- During the first series of a period, Team A fumbles into Teams B's end zone on a second down of a series. Team B recovers and downs the ball in its end zone. RULING: Team A series of that period is ended. Team B series of the period begins.
- Scoring: The team scoring the greater number of points during the regulation and extra periods shall be declared the winner. There shall be an equal number of series, as defined in (5) above, in each extra period, except if Team B scores during a period other than on the try. EXAMPLE: On the first possession of a period, Team A scores a touchdown. On the try, Team B intercepts a pass and returns it for a two-point touchdown. RULING: Team B is awarded the ball on the 25-yard line to start its series of the period with the overtime score 6-2.
- Fouls after Team B possession:
- Distance penalties by either team are enforced at the succeeding spot in extra periods.
- Scores by fouling teams are canceled.
- If there are offsetting fouls, whether one or both occur after Team B possession, the down is not replayed. EXAMPLE:
- After the end of the first series of a period by Team A, Team B commits a dead-ball foul. RULING: Team B starts its series on the 40-yard line, first and 10.
- During the first series of a period, Team A attempts a field goal. While the ball is in the air, Team B commits a post-scrimmage kick foul. The field goal is successful. RULING: Team A's field goal stands. Team A's series is ended. Team B will begin its series by snap, first and 10, from the spot where the distance penalty from the 25-yard line leaves the ball.
- During the first series of a period, Team A attempts a field goal. While the ball is in the air, Team B commits a post scrimmage kick foul. The attempt is unsuccessful. Team B catches the ball and returns it to Team B's 15-yard line, where Team B is downed. RULING: Team A's series is ended. Penalize Team B from the 25-yard line. It is Team B's ball, first down and 10.
- During the first series of a period, Team A passes and a Team A back is illegally in motion during the down. The pass is intercepted, and Team B commits a foul before scoring a touchdown. RULING: Score not allowed. The series is ended, and Team B begins its series on the 25-yard line.
- During the second series of a period, Team B intercepts a pass and runs for a touchdown. During the run, Team B clips at midfield. RULING: Nullify the score, and if the score is tied, the next period will start with a 15-yard (or half the distance to the goal) penalty against Team B. The down and distance will be first and 10.
- Timeouts. Each team shall be allowed one timeout for each extra period. Timeouts not used during the regulation periods may not be carried over into the extra period(s). Unused extra-period timeouts may not be carried over to other extra periods. Timeouts between periods shall be charged to the succeeding period.
- TIED GAMES
- Post-District Games: The NCAA tie breaker system shall be used in all tied post-district games, to determine who advances in the playoffs, and the state champion.
- District Varsity Games: The NCAA shall use the tie breaker system to break ties in varsity district games. Districts must determine prior to the season a method to certify district representatives in the event two or more teams are tied in win/loss percentage after district schedule.
- Other Games: The NCAA tie breaker system may be used in any non-district varsity games, sub-varsity games, or junior high games by mutual agreement prior to the game.
Section 160 – TAPPS Exceptions to NCAA Football Rules
TAPPS Exceptions to NCAA Football Rules for the Current School Year
TAPPS EXCEPTIONS - 11 MAN FOOTBALL
TAPPS EXCEPTIONS - 6 MAN FOOTBALL
Section 162 – 6-man Qualifications
- SCHOOLS. Only those schools approved by the TAPPS Executive Board shall be eligible to compete in Six Man Football.
- Schools aligned in 4A or above shall compete for the Division I championship.
- Schools aligned in 3A or below shall compete for the Division II or III championship.
- STATE FINALS. See Section 141 - Playoff Format, 6-Man Football
- PLAY-OFF SITE. (See play off format in Section 141)
- General Football Rules found in Section 158 apply to 6-man and 11-man football rules.
- CALENDAR
- Starting date for football conditioning is shown on the current TAPPS Calendar
- Fall Practice Schedule
- For the first three days of fall practice, schools are limited to no pads or contact activity. Helmets may be worn during this time.
- Schools may not schedule more than three practices in any two day period, nor more than two practices in any one day.
- If two practices are scheduled on day one, day two is limited to one practice session.
- No school may schedule nor require a student to participate in more than three practices in any two day period regardless of level of participation.
- On days when two practices are held, the padded session shall not last longer than three hours. the other session shall not last longer than two hours and limited to
- no conditioning
- no contact activities
- no player equipment –helmets may not be worn during this time
- there shall be a minimum break of at least two hours between sessions
- On days when one practice is held
- the session shall not last longer than three hours
- The following activities are considered practice activities or practice
- On field practice
- Sport specific instruction
- Mandatory conditioning
- Water break
- Rest breaks
- Voluntary conditioning (may not be coach directed or supervised)
- Weight training
- The following are not considered practice activities
- Film Study
- Meetings
- Injury Treatment
- Equipment may be issued prior to the fourth day of practice.
- Season Limits
- The TAPPS football season shall consist of 11 playing dates.
- Schools may schedule 10 varsity contests
- There must be five (5) days between varsity contests. This includes both scrimmages and games.
- SPRING FOOTBALL
- Schools will be allowed a total of fourteen days to conduct contact football drills/practice,
- including full pads and helmets
- and must be completed before school is out for the summer.
- No inter school scrimmages are allowed during spring football
- Participation
- Students not enrolled and attending the member school may not participate in Spring Football.
Section 163 – 6-man Rules
- GENERAL: TAPPS Six-man Football Rules are the same as for the 11-man game except for the following variations:
- Offense must advance 15 yards instead of 10 in four downs.
- Each team has 6 players. Unless necessary to use the 11-man field, the six-man field is 80 yards by 40 yards, with the 40 yard line at the center of the field. Goal post uprights are 25 feet apart and the crossbar is 9 feet above the ground. Six-man hash marks are two feet outside the goal posts.
- Unless the ball is kicked or forward passed, it may not be advanced across the line of scrimmage until after an exchange has been made between the receiver of the snap and another player. If a forward pass is thrown to the snapper, it must travel at least one yard in flight.
- Length of quarter: 10 minutes; between quarters: 2 minutes; between halves: 15 minutes.
- The ball must travel 15 yards on a kickoff or be touched by the receiving team before members of the kicking team are eligible to touch it.
- Kickoff is made from the kicking team's 30 yard line on a six-man field and there must be at least 3 players from the receiving team between the 30 and 35 yard lines.
- At least 3 offensive players shall be on their line of scrimmage at the snap. (See Rule 7 of the NCAA Football Rules and Interpretations Book.)
- Ball may be handed in any direction to a player during a scrimmage down behind the line of scrimmage.
- If a fumble occurs before there has been an exchange or pass and if a player of the offensive team recovers it, he may not carry it beyond the line.
- The ball is dead when a passer catches his own pass and it is ruled as an incomplete forward pass.
- All players are eligible to catch a forward pass, except that a pass is ruled incomplete when caught by the passer. (See 10 above)
- Field goal counts 4 points; try-for point: 2 points if successful through place or drop-kick; one point if successful by pass or run.
- When one team is 45 or more points ahead at the end of the first half or if a team secures a 45 point lead during the second half, the game is ended immediately.
- The team whose goal line is involved shall put the ball in play by a snap on their 20 yard line after a touchback and by a kick-off or punt on their 20 yard line after a safety. After a safety, the ball must go at least 15 yards or be touched by the receiving team before members of the kicking team are eligible to touch it. Receiving team must have at least 3 players between the 30 and 35 yard lines of the kicking team.
- The 20 yard line will be used as a penetration line.
- If the player receiving the snap advances beyond the line of scrimmage without an exchange, the penalty shall be 5 yards plus loss of down (illegal procedure)
- PLAY-OFF GAME INFORMATION (see Section 138 and Section 141.5)
- Team Colors. Home team wears colored jerseys and visiting team wears white
- Tickets.
- All school passes and season tickets are suspended. Admissions to playoff contests shall be a maximum of $10.00
- State Finals shall be determined by TAPPS
- General Admission
- ADULTS - $15.00
- STUDENTS/SENIOR CITIZENS - $15.00
- Film Exchange. Teams in the play-offs are required to exchange at least 3 quality films/tapes no later than 10:00 a.m. on Monday before the game that week. Opponents may request game films they wish to receive.
- Game Referees for Playoffs. By mutual agreement; with participating schools working with a local, recognized officials chapter to assign officials. At least four officials shall be used in all playoff games. (See Officials, Section 134) TAPPS office will assign officials for final game.
- Neutral Site. If neutral site, home team determined by mutual agreement or coin flip.
- Home Team Responsibilities. (Except State Championship Games)
- Collect all gate money;
- Provide necessary personnel: announcer, clock operator, security, medical personnel, etc.;
- Responsible for printing game programs;
- Secure three chain crew officials and official statisticians, to be paid from gate receipts.
- Gate receipt distribution
- From gate receipts, pay all expenses.
- After expenses-divide the remaining receipts between the schools as agreed upon BEFORE THE GAME begins
- REPORT RESULTS. The coach of the winning team of each playoff game shall report the results of the game as soon as possible after the conclusion of the contest.
- Game Balls for State Championship Games. Only Wilson footballs shall be used in the championship game(s).
- TEAM ROSTERS. Team rosters of play-off qualifiers must be in the TAPPS STATE OFFICE by the deadline to be assured of being included in the state championship programs. The roster form on the TAPPS website will be the only form accepted by the state office.
- AWARDS AT STATE FINALS
- Plaque shall be awarded as follows:
- State Champion Plaque
- State Runner-Up Plaque
- Individual State Champion Medallions for players on program roster, up to 30
- Individual State Runner-Up Medallions for players on program roster, up to 30
- Champion and Runner-Up teams may purchase additional medallions from the TAPPS State office for $10.00 each.
Section 164 – 7 on 7
- Student Eligibility
- Incoming 9th Grade Students
- Must have COMPLETED the 8th grade
- Must be ENROLLED in the new school
- Must have completed all financial requirements of newly admitted student
- Transfer Students
- See Section 104 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- If school is in session the student must be ATTENDING the member school
- Must have completed all financial requirements of newly admitted students
- Graduating Seniors
- Are allowed to participate after graduation through June of the current year
- Team Roster
- No more than 25 players per team
- Coach Eligibility
- Coaches must be assigned by the member school
- Coaches must complete the SCOPE program
- Coaches must be entered and identified in TAPPS database
- During School Year
- Coaches may only coach during Spring Football period
- Coaches may only coach after school during the Spring Football period
- Coaches may only coach on weekends during the Spring Football period
- Coaches may only coach in tournaments or leagues during the Spring Football period
- Summer
- Coaches may coach in tournaments or leagues
- Practice time is included in the 15 contact hours per week
- Required Safety Equipment
Beginning in 2019, the TAPPS requires the following for participation in 7 on 7, 6 on 6, or similar activities.
- All participants shall wear soft shell protective headgear
- This requirement applies to
- League games
- Qualifier Tournaments
- State Tournaments
- The head gear must meet the following standards:
- Helmets must have a Virginia Tech rating of 4 star or higher; or like standards
- No metal components
- No hard plastic components
- Nor sharp edges that could cause harm to another player
- Must have a functional retention system
- TAPPS Tournament Playing Rules
- Field Dimensions
- Length 45 yards
- Width 53 yards
- Endzone 10 yards
- Team Areas
- The team zone will be an area on the sideline where only team members may be during game play. Anyone in the team area shall be considered a coach or team member and subject to any penalty earned.
- This will be an area from the 15-yard line to the 30-yard line. Players and coaches may not be out of the team zone during game time.
- Time
- Pool Play
- 30 Minute games
- Continuous Clock
- Bracket Play
- 20 Minute Halves
- 5 Minute Halftime
- 15 Minutes between games (when possible)
- No Time Outs
- (Exception, injuries.) In the event of injuries, games on the adjoining two fields will halt until the player(s) can be removed as soon as safety dictates.
- Injury time outs may reduce the amount of time between halves and/or games to maintain game schedules.
- All games on adjoining fields will begin at the same time
- Teams must be on site and ready to play.
- During bracket play, if a team is late the game will be forfeited.
- During pool play, if a team is late, they will begin play with whatever time is left on the tournament clock and the team that is late will start on defense.
- Timing
- A central timekeeper will be designated.
- All games will begin and end on that person's instructions.
- Timekeeper will announce the time remaining at the 10, 5 and 2-minute Mark.
- Removal from a contest
- If a player is removed from a contest for the reasons outlined below the player shall be ineligible to participate the remainder of the tournament.
- Fighting
- Contact deemed excessive by the officials
- Unsportsmanlike behavior as determined by the tournament director to include but not limited to the following:
- Repeated excessive contact
- as outlined in part I.k.
- If excessive removal from contest may be immediate
- Use of language (if flagrant)
- Taunting (if flagrant)
- Disrespect towards officials
- Bench Areas
- Visitors (Team in white) will always align their team on the right sideline facing the end zone.
- Home (dark jersey) will always align their team on the left sideline facing the end zone.
- Ball Placement
- Ball is to be placed on the right hash mark when at the 40 yard line.
- Teams
- Pool Play
- TAPPS will assign Home and Visitor
- Visitor shall have first possession
- Bracket Play
- Bottom team on the bracket shall wear dark jerseys
- Top team on the bracket shall wear white jerseys
- First possession shall be determined by coin toss prior to the game
- Moving the ball
- Offensive plays must all be forward passes.
- A pass caught behind the line of scrimmage must be a forward pass.
- Once a forward pass has been thrown, a backward pass (lateral)is allowed.
- Should a swing pass not cross the LOS and before the 4 second count has expired, a defensive player tags the ball carrier behind the 40-yard line, it is a safety.
- Possession always begins at the 40-yard line at the right hash mark. Hash mark placement of the ball must be enforced by the officials, in accordance with the NCAA rules, once the ball has been advanced.
- No penalty will be assessed in the excess of the 40-yard line. On an unsuccessful or successful offensive play from the 40-yard line resulting in an offensive penalty: The ball will be returned to the 40-yard line and 1st down will become 2nd down: 2nd down will become 3rd down: and 3rd down will result in a turnover.
- The offense must gain at least 15 yards in the first 3 or less plays or the defense takes over. Four down territory occurs only after offense proceeds to or inside the 10-yard line cone.
- Rules
- No blocking
- Receiver/ball carrier is legally down when touched with one or both hands
- Fumbles are dead balls at the spot with the last team retaining possession. A muffed snap is not a fumble/dead ball. The 4.0 second count remains in effect on snaps
- Two delay of game penalties in the same possession results in a turnover. A delay of game penalty on the extra point try results in a turnover
- The QB is allowed 4.0 seconds to throw the ball. The Official timekeeper starts a stopwatch on the snap of the ball from center and stops the watch as soon as the QB releases the ball
- If release is under 4.0 seconds, the play goes on
- If the timekeeper sees that the clock has exceeded 4.0 seconds, he waits until the play is over (the play is not blown dead), then brings the ball back to the original line of scrimmage with loss of down
- All penalties will be marked off on a 4 second count EXCEPT for pass interference
- Interference/Holding Penalty on Defense Ball is placed at next first down line
- Responsibility to avoid contact is with the defense. There will be NO chucking, deliberate bumping or grabbing. These actions will result in a “tack on” penalty at the end of the play (5-yard penalty)
- Interference Penalty on Offense = Loss of down and five-yard loss
- Interceptions may be returned (“no blocking” rule applies). If an interception is returned beyond the 45-yard line (the offensive origination point)it is a touchdown and point after attempt should ensue. The teammates of the person who intercepted the ball may trail the runner so as to be in position to take a backwards pass. They may not block for or screen for the runner
- Offensive team is responsible for retrieving and returning the ball to the previous spot or the new scrimmage spot in a timely fashion. Failure to do so can result in a delay of game penalty.
- The offensive center is not an eligible receiver (teams must have a center). The ball must be snapped from the ground between the snapper’s legs
- The center will be responsible for setting or re-positioning the Referee’s bean bag at the line of scrimmage. On change of possession, the team moving to offense will ensure the bean bag gets to the new scrimmage line.(centers on both teams responsible)
- Penalties
- No taunting or “trash talking”. (5-yard penalty) - see part d above
- Illegal motion on offense = loss of down
- Offside on defense = gain of 5 yards for offense
- Illegal formation on offense = loss of down
- Too many men on defense = 5-yard gain for offense
- Too many men on offense = loss of down
- Any Tackling/Excessive Contact
- by shoving, pushing or striking a blow by defense = Ball is placed at the next first down marker. Warning will be issued
- 2nd violation by same player = sit out rest of game
- 3rd violation by same player = removal from tournament
- Any dead ball foul on a play that results in the defense getting the ball will result in a loss of down penalty. The defense, now the offense, would be starting with 2nd down
- Scoring
- 6 points for a TD
- 1 point for PAT from 5-yard line, 2-point PAT from 10-yard line.
- 2 points if a team returns a PAT back across the 45.
- 1 point for an interception
- Intercepting team gets the ball for a new series
- 6 points for an INTERCEPTION returned back to 45-yard line untouched
- PAT will ensue after the score
- Official score is kept by field referee
- Game Tie Breaker
- After coin flip to determine first possession, teams will alternate 4 down series from the 15-yard line.
- A winner is determined when one team scores during its possession and the other does not.
- If a second overtime period is necessary, each team must then go for two points on the conversion attempts.
- Tournament Tie Breaker
- Head-to-Head, Points Differential (between common opponents) will determine the pool winners or teams to advance.
- In a three-way tie, only the scores of games between teams in the tie will be counted. Once a winner has been declared, the remaining two teams will revert back to head-to-head to break the remaining tie.
- A forfeit will be treated the same as a qualifying team in a bracket. In essence, this becomes a pool with one less team.
Section 164 – 6 on 6
- Student Eligibility
- Incoming 9th Grade Students
- Must have COMPLETED the 8th grade
- Must be ENROLLED in the new school
- Must have completed all financial requirements of newly admitted student
- Transfer Students
- See Section 104 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- If school is in session the student must be ATTENDING the member school
- Must have completed all financial requirements of newly admitted students
- Graduating Seniors
- Are allowed to participate after graduation through June of the current year
- Team Roster
- No more than 25 players per team
- Coach Eligibility
- Coaches must be assigned by the member school
- Coaches must complete the TEaMs program
- Coaches must be entered and identified in TAPPS database
- Required Safety Equipment
Beginning in 2019, the TAPPS requires the following for participation in 7 on 7, 6 on 6, or similar activities.
- All participants shall wear soft shell protective headgear
- This requirement applies to
- League games
- Qualifier Tournaments
- State Tournaments
- The head gear must meet the following standards:
- Helmets must have a Virginia Tech rating of 4 star or higher; or like standards
- No metal components
- No hard plastic components
- Nor sharp edges that could cause harm to another player
- Must have a functional retention system
- TAPPS Tournament Playing Rules
- Field Dimensions
- Length 45 yards
- Width 40 yards
- Endzone 10 yards
- Team Areas
- The team zone will be an area on the sideline where only team members may be during game play. Anyone in the team area shall be considered a coach or team member and subject to any penalty earned.
- This will be an area from the 15-yard line to the 30-yard line. Players and coaches may not be out of the team zone during game time.
- Time
- Pool Play
- 30 Minute games
- Continuous Clock
- Bracket Play
- 20 Minute Halves
- 5 Minute Halftime
- 15 Minutes between games (when possible)
- No Time Outs
- (Exception, injuries.) In the event of injuries, games on the adjoining two fields will halt until the player(s) can be removed as soon as safety dictates.
- Injury time outs may reduce the amount of time between halves and/or games to maintain game schedules.
- All games on adjoining fields will begin at the same time
- Teams must be on site and ready to play.
- During bracket play, if a team is late the game will be forfeited.
- During pool play, if a team is late, they will begin play with whatever time is left on the tournament clock and the team that is late will start on defense.
- Timing
- A central timekeeper will be designated.
- All games will begin and end on that person's instructions.
- Timekeeper will announce the time remaining at the 10, 5 and 2-minute Mark.
- Bench Areas
- Visitors (Team in white) will always align their team on the right sideline facing the end zone.
- Home (dark jersey) will always align their team on the left sideline facing the end zone.
- Ball Placement
- Ball is to be placed on the right hash mark when at the 40 yard line.
- Teams
- Pool Play
- TAPPS will assign Home and Visitor
- Visitor shall have first possession
- Bracket Play
- Bottom team on the bracket shall wear dark jerseys
- Top team on the bracket shall wear white jerseys
- First possession shall be determined by coin toss prior to the game
- Moving the ball
- Offensive plays must all be forward passes.
- A pass caught behind the line of scrimmage must be a forward pass.
- Once a forward pass has been thrown, a backward pass (lateral)is allowed.
- Should a swing pass not cross the LOS and before the 4 second count has expired, a defensive player tags the ball carrier behind the 40-yard line, it is a safety.
- Possession always begins at the 40-yard line at the right hash mark. Hash mark placement of the ball must be enforced by the officials, in accordance with the NCAA rules, once the ball has been advanced.
- No penalty will be assessed in the excess of the 40-yard line. On an unsuccessful or successful offensive play from the 40-yard line resulting in an offensive penalty: The ball will be returned to the 40-yard line and 1st down will become 2nd down: 2nd down will become 3rd down: and 3rd down will result in a turnover.
- The offense must gain at least 15 yards in the first 3 or less plays or the defense takes over. Four down territory occurs only after offense proceeds to or inside the 10-yard line cone.
- Removal from a contest
- If a player is removed from a contest for the reasons outlined below the player shall be ineligible to participate the remainder of the tournament.
- Fighting
- Contact deemed excessive by the officials
- Unsportsmanlike behavior as determined by the tournament director to include but not limited to the following:
- Repeated excessive contact
- as outlined in part I.m.
- If excessive removal from contest may be immediate
- Use of language (if flagrant)
- Taunting (if flagrant)
- Disrespect towards officials
- Rules
- No blocking
- Receiver/ball carrier is legally down when touched with one or both hands
- Fumbles are dead balls at the spot with the last team retaining possession. A muffed snap is not a fumble/dead ball. The 4.0 second count remains in effect on snaps
- Two delay of game penalties in the same possession results in a turnover. A delay of game penalty on the extra point try results in a turnover
- The QB is allowed 4.0 seconds to throw the ball. The Official timekeeper starts a stopwatch on the snap of the ball from center and stops the watch as soon as the QB releases the ball
- If release is under 4.0 seconds, the play goes on
- If the timekeeper sees that the clock has exceeded 4.0 seconds, he waits until the play is over (the play is not blown dead), then brings the ball back to the original line of scrimmage with loss of down
- All penalties will be marked off on a 4 second count EXCEPT for pass interference
- Interference/Holding Penalty on Defense Ball is placed at next first down line
- Responsibility to avoid contact is with the defense. There will be NO chucking, deliberate bumping or grabbing. These actions will result in a “tack on” penalty at the end of the play (5-yard penalty)
- Interference Penalty on Offense = Loss of down and five-yard loss
- Interceptions may be returned (“no blocking” rule applies). If an interception is returned beyond the 45-yard line (the offensive origination point)it is a touchdown and point after attempt should ensue. The teammates of the person who intercepted the ball may trail the runner so as to be in position to take a backwards pass. They may not block for or screen for the runner
- Offensive team is responsible for retrieving and returning the ball to the previous spot or the new scrimmage spot in a timely fashion. Failure to do so can result in a delay of game penalty.
- The offensive center is an eligible receiver
- The ball must be snapped from the ground between the snapper’s legs
- The center will be responsible for setting or re-positioning the Referee’s bean bag at the line of scrimmage.
- On change of possession, the team moving to offense will ensure the bean bag gets to the new scrimmage line.(centers on both teams responsible)
- Penalties
- No taunting or “trash talking”. (5-yard penalty & expulsion if flagrant)
- Illegal motion on offense = loss of down
- Offside on defense = gain of 5 yards for offense
- Illegal formation on offense = loss of down
- Too many men on defense = 5-yard gain for offense
- Too many men on offense = loss of down
- Any Tackling/Excessive Contact
- by shoving, pushing or striking a blow by defense = Ball is placed at the next first down marker. Warning will be issued
- 2nd violation by same player = sit out rest of game
- 3rd violation by same player = removal from tournament
- Any dead ball foul on a play that results in the defense getting the ball will result in a loss of down penalty. The defense, now the offense, would be starting with 2nd down
- Scoring
- 6 points for a TD
- 1 point for PAT from 5-yard line, 2-point PAT from 10-yard line.
- 2 points if a team returns a PAT back across the 45.
- 1 point for an interception
- Intercepting team gets the ball for a new series
- 6 points for an INTERCEPTION returned back to 45-yard line untouched
- PAT will ensue after the score
- Official score is kept by field referee
- Game Tie Breaker
- After coin flip to determine first possession, teams will alternate 4 down series from the 15-yard line.
- A winner is determined when one team scores during its possession and the other does not.
- If a second overtime period is necessary, each team must then go for two points on the conversion attempts.
- Tournament Tie Breaker
- Head-to-Head, Points Differential (between common opponents) will determine the pool winners or teams to advance.
- In a three-way tie, only the scores of games between teams in the tie will be counted. Once a winner has been declared, the remaining two teams will revert back to head-to-head to break the remaining tie.
- A forfeit will be treated the same as a qualifying team in a bracket. In essence, this becomes a pool with one less team.
Restricted and Non-Restricted Equipment
Restricted Equipment
RESTRICTED equipment may be used once Shells/Full Pads are allowed. Below is a list of examples of restricted equipment.
- Protective Player Equipment (helmets, shoulder pads (hard & soft shell), thigh pads, knee pads, etc…)
- Sleds (Blocking, Tackling, and Specialty Sleds/Dummies)
- 1-man, 2-man, 3-man, 4-man, 5-man, 7-man, etc…
- Post Mount/Stationary/Hanging Equipment

- Run Through’s (Blaster, Gauntlet, etc…)


- Shadow Man, MVP Drive, etc…

Non-Restricted Equipment
NON-RESTRICTED equipment may be used anytime during the season or while school is in session. Below is a list of examples of non-restricted equipment.
- Dummies (Stand-Up, Pop-Up, and Step-over Dummies)



- Player Equipment (Soft Shell helmets)
Golf Plan
Section 165 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter G. GOLF PLAN
(Boys’ & Girls’ Events)
Rules in Sections 130-144 also apply to the Golf Plan.
Section 166 – Qualifications
- PARTICIPATION
- Districts and regions shall not allow participation by any student not entered on the Eligibility form or if the school has not paid the annual event fee for the event.
- Golf is considered an Individual Sport by TAPPS
- Students not yet in High School may not participate with or against high school students.
- In order to be eligible to compete in the district tournament, each player must pass a written rules test, to be provided by TAPPS. The test will be posted on the TAPPS website. The completed test should be kept on file by the District tournament host and not sent to the TAPPS office.
- DIVISIONS. There will be six divisions for boys (6A; 5A; 4A; 3A; 2A; 1A) and six divisions for girls (6A; 5A; 4A; 3A; 2A; 1A). Players may be entered as either individuals or teams. Teams consist of five (or a minimum of four) entries from the same high school. The medalist for each respective meet is singles champion, regardless of whether he/she is a member of a team or an individual entry.
- DISTRICTS.
- Schools shall be assigned to districts by the TAPPS Executive Board
- District Assignments will be made in the Fall of the current year.
- QUALIFICATION FOR STATE. – See Playoff Format – Section 141
- CERTIFICATION AND ENTRIES
- GOLF ENTRY MUST BE COMPLETED BY THE SCHOOL COACH ON TAPPS database PRIOR TO THE DISTRICT COMPETITION.
- CHANGES TO THE TEAM ENTRIES MUST BE MADE PRIOR TO THE COACHES’ MEETING OF THE TOURNAMENT. THESE CHANGES MUST BE REPORTED TO TAPPS TO BE ENTERED IN TAPPS database.
- TAPPS GOLF RESULTS MUST BE COMPLETED BY TOURNAMENT HOST IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING THE COMPETITION ON TAPPS database.
- TEAMS
- Number of Teams. At the district meet each school may enter
- one team of 4 or 5 players
- plus up to five (5) individuals in the appropriate classification.
- No school may enter more than one boys team and one girls team plus five individuals.
- Classifications having less than four teams shall be assigned to the next highest classification for competition at the State Tournament
- Individual Entries. There shall be no substitution allowed in the individuals. Each individual player must have qualified individually at the previous qualification meet.
- Team member changes.
- Teams qualifying to the next meet qualify as a school team. Members can be changed before the COACHES’ MEETING of the next qualifying meet begins.
- Teams. Once a tournament has started, no substitution shall be allowed to the school team composed of five players.
- MONITORS. Monitors may be required as determined by TAPPS.
- CERTIFICATION FOR STATE
- Certification of Regional Qualifiers is the responsibility of the District President or his designee, the District Golf Chairman, and shall be sent to the Regional Director and the TAPPS office.
- Certification of State Qualifiers
- is the responsibility of the District Tournament Director if regionals are not required and
- is the responsibility of the Regional Director if regionals are required.
- Shall be submitted only on the form supplied on the TAPPS website. All information must be typed and complete prior to submission.
- Certification must be in the TAPPS OFFICE BY 1:00 p.m., on the date shown on the current year TAPPS calendar.
- Certification of State Qualifiers should be submitted electronically to the TAPPS office through the TAPPS database.
- SPORTSMANSHIP
- All players, teams, and coaches shall exhibit good sportsmanship. Specific care, by the contestants and fans alike, should be given to avoid improper cheering and "razzing." The Tournament Director has the right to declare any player, team, or coach ineligible who does not exhibit good sportsmanship.
- Coaches should inform contestants that acts such as throwing clubs, breaking clubs in anger, use of profanity, addressing an official disrespectfully, or any action which brings discredit to the individual, their school or TAPPS will be considered unsportsmanlike conduct and the player may be disqualified from further participation in the tournament at the discretion of TAPPS and the Tournament Director. If the actions occur after a match, the placement or medals will be awarded to the next place.
Section 167 – Rules
U.S.G.A. rules will apply except for local course rules which will be covered during the coaches' meeting. Failure to follow the rules shall result in disqualification. Coaches should see that all players have U.S.G.A. Rule Book. Players must have successfully taken the TAPPS Rules Exam. In TAPPS District, Regional and State competition the double par rule shall be enforced. Players must tee off at each hole and play until double par is reached, then pick up when double par is recorded.
- PACE OF PLAY
- In TAPPS District, Regional and State competition the double par rule shall be enforced.
- If the player continues beyond double par all subsequent strokes count toward the scoring for the hole
- Players must tee off at each hole and play until double par is reached, then pick up when double par is recorded.
- Under certain circumstances, the tournament director may assign double par and not require the hole to be played.
- TIES.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Other format may be used based on conditions as approved by the tournament director
- FEES.
- District/regional fees should not exceed the actual cost of the tournament (awards and green fees)
- State fees will be determined by TAPPS.
- RULES COMMITTEE. The State Tournament Director shall appoint a committee of who will decide all rule interpretations. These may be staff members from the host course, area PGA officials or PGA Apprentices or knowledgeable amateurs.
- COACHES MEETING.
- There will be a meeting of all coaches at the host golf course.
- This meeting is mandatory.
- Coaches not attending the meeting may lose the privilege to coach players during the tournament.
- COURSE. The tournament will consist of 36 HOLES.
- 18 holes will be played on Monday
- 18 holes will be played on Tuesday
- In the event of rain or other circumstance, the tournament may be shortened at the discretion of TAPPS and the TAPPS Golf Director.
- TIME AND ORDER OF STARTING.
- The players shall start at the time and in the order arranged by the Tournament Director.
- The penalty for breach of this rule is disqualification.
- Tee times shall be assigned for both days of competition at the state meet.
- A shotgun start may be implemented at the discretion of the TAPPS Golf Director.
- Players with the lowest scores on day one shall be paired and shall play first.
- CADDIES AND CARTS.
- Players may not use
- caddies or
- Golf carts in the tournament
- DRESS CODE. All participants are to wear appropriate clothing.
- School uniforms w/school colors & logos are encouraged. If not school color and logo, the uniform should not promote any other school or organization.
- Standard golf shirts and golf shorts or slacks are to be worn at all times.
- Participants must wear standard golf shoes (with or without cleats).
- Specifically prohibited are: warm-ups, shorts without pockets, T-shirts, and tank tops.
- The tournament director has the authority to determine whether or not clothing is appropriate.
- TATTOOS MUST BE COVERED BY TAPE OR CLOTHING AT ALL TIMES.
- SPECTATORS, ETC.
- Spectators, fans, and parents must
- stay on or behind the golf cart path and at no time shall come no closer than 50 feet to the players.
- If cart paths do not exist, spectators, etc., shall come no closer than 50 feet to the players.
- VIOLATION OF THIS RULE BY SPECTATORS, FANS OR PARENTS, MAY RESULT IN PENALTIES, INCLUDING DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PLAYER BY THE TOURNAMENT DIRECTOR.
- FOOD, DRINK, UMBRELLAS, ETC. No food, drink, jackets, umbrellas, etc. may be provided directly to the golfer, by parents, fans, coaches, etc., once play has begun. This is a violation and could result in disqualification.
- COACHING:
- Coaches shall:
- Complete the TAPPS Golf TEaMs Training
- Notify the TAPPS Office of completion of TEaMs Training
- Coaches not having completed the TEaMs Training shall not be allowed to coach players at the District, Regional, or State Tournament.
- Coaches:
- Each school shall designate no more than one coach for the Boys team (entries) and one coach for the Girls team (entries)
- No other individuals should communicate with the players during tournament play.
- Coaches shall be identified by wristband or badge.
- Coaches may
- coach their players,
- from the green to the next tee box, provided they do not slow play
- After the last player in the group has holed out
- Prior to the first player in the group teeing off
- It is the coach’s responsibility to know and abide by this rule.
- VIOLATION OF THIS RULE MAY RESULT IN PENALTIES, INCLUDING DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PLAYER AND / OR REMOVAL OF THE COACH BY THE TOURNAMENT DIRECTOR.
- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
- Clarification of USGA Rule
- No ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT is to be allowed on the course during play.
- Including but not limited to:
- Cell Phones
- MP3 Players
- Exception – rangefinders operated as designed
- Penalties
- First Violation
- Warning
- 2 Stroke Penalty
- Subsequent Violation
- Student Disqualification from Round
- Public Reprimand for School
- Public Reprimand for Coach
- OF THE YEAR NOMINATIONS
- Using the form located on the TAPPS web site, schools may nominate one person per category for the “Of The Year” awards. See deadlines on calendar.
Soccer Plan, Fall & Winter
Section 169 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter H.
FALL AND WINTER SOCCER PLAN
(Boys and Girls Event)
Rules in Sections 130-144 also apply to the Fall and Winter Soccer Plan.
Section 170 – Qualifications
- DIVISIONS - FALL. There shall be one division for Boys Fall Soccer.
- DIVISIONS - WINTER. See Section 141
- Girls Winter Soccer Div. I
- Girls Winter Soccer Div. II
- Girls Winter Soccer Div. III
- Boys Winter Soccer Div. I
- Boys Winter Soccer Div. II
- Boys Winter Soccer Div. III
- Boys must participate on boys’ teams; girls must participate on girls’ team. Girls shall be allowed to participate on the boys’ Fall team if the school does not have Girls’ Winter Soccer.
- Schools and/or individuals may compete in either Fall or Winter soccer, but not both.
- Starting Date.
- Starting dates for
- practices,
- scrimmages,
- first playing date,
- and district certification stated on the current TAPPS Calendar.
- Number of Games and Tournaments
- Definition of approved teams – see section 138
- No team shall compete in
- more than three (3) individual tournaments,
- plus 20 games in a season, up to and including the last date for certifying district champions.
- Schools may
- substitute two (2) games for each tournament dropped
- or add an additional tournament for each 2 dropped games. These changes should be clearly noted on the school’s official schedule.
- A district tournament or district play-off does not count as one of the three tournaments.
- Scheduling:
- No games may be scheduled prior to the date listed on the current year’s TAPPS calendar.
- The season ends as outlined in Section 139.D.4 of the manual.
- No games may be scheduled after the certification date, except by teams who are in the playoffs.
- No additional games may be played by a team once it has been eliminated from the playoffs.
- Sub –Varsity teams may not play games after the certification date listed on the current year’s TAPPS Calendar.
- All District games must be played and all District games count as varsity games on the schedule.
- No game is to be scheduled on Sunday.
- Those students who play on both the JV and Varsity may play in no more than 3 tournaments plus a total of 26 games (Varsity and JV games combined). The student is allowed only three (3) tournaments and games cannot be substituted for additional tournaments.
- SELECTION FOR PLAY-OFFS. All divisions, both Fall and Winter Soccer, see Section 141
- DISTRICT TIES.
- Two Schools Tied. To resolve a two-way tie, the district executive committee may authorize a single elimination game.
- Three or More Schools Tied. If three or more schools are tied, the district executive committee may authorize a tournament provided only two matched games have been played that week.
- CERTIFICATION.
- The District President shall certify the district champion and other play-off qualifiers to the TAPPS office by the deadline shown on the current year TAPPS calendar.
- The District President shall certify All-District Teams by the date shown on the current year’s TAPPS calendar.
Section 171 – Rules
N.F.H.S. RULES WILL APPLY (with the following TAPPS exceptions).
- PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES. See Section 138.
- OFFICIALS. See Section 134.
- Officials for TAPPS contests must be assigned by a TAPPS approved organization as listed on the TAPPS website.
- Game Administration
- Officials shall meet with both head coaches at least 15 minutes prior to TAPPS games to exchange rosters and discuss sportsmanship.
- Officials shall promptly report and participant who receives two yellow cards or a red card to the TAPPS office. Both coaches will report the incident. Failure to report an ejection will result in sanctions against the school involved.
- LENGTH OF GAME
- The length shall consist of
- two 40 minute halves;
- a 10 minute half time;
- In the event a game cannot be concluded, NFHS Rule Soccer Rule 7.3 as outlines below:
- If prior to halftime, the game will be considered a no contest and begin as if the contest had not started.
- If at or after halftime,
- The game is an official contest if one team is leading.
- Is considered a suspended contest and will begin from the point of suspension if the score is tied.
- If the game remains tied at the end of regulation play, the game shall be resolved by the Golden Goal Rule.
- Teams will play a 10 minute overtime; however, the game will end when one team scores.
- If neither team scores, a second 10 minute overtime will be played with the game ending if either team scores.
- If neither team scores the Golden Goal, the game shall be decided by penalty kicks.
- Overtime rules shall be in effect as written above in all TAPPS playoff contests. Districts may select method to break ties.
- OFFICIAL BALL Game ball will be as indicated in section 138-Playing Rules.
- SPORTSMANSHIP
- See Section 138 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- Removal of a Jersey in celebration after goal scoring is considered taunting by TAPPS and the offender shall be issued a RED card.
- HOME TEAM.
- Section 141 of the TAPPS By-Laws discusses the bracket and game sites.
- The hosting team shall be designated as the home team in contests hosted at a school site.
- In the event of a Neutral Site game, a coin flip shall be used to determine Home Team.
- The Home Team is responsible for furnishing the official BADEN PERFECTION THERMO game balls. A minimum of three balls should be presented for play.
- REGIONAL GAMES. Regional games shall be played as indicated on the date shown on the current calendar, unless otherwise mutually agreed upon to play at an earlier date. Any extension of the date must be approved in advance by the TAPPS office.
- ADMISSION
- For bi-district, area, and regional games shall be determined by teams included.
- Admission at State Tournament shall be determined by TAPPS.
- TAPPS Events Passes accepted with photo ID
- At bi-district, area, regional and semi-final games, gate receipts after expenses, shall be divided between the two schools, unless mutually agreed before the game.
- ADDITIONAL REGIONAL INFORMATION. Officials and other details of regional and semi-final games shall be decided upon by mutual agreement of the teams involved. Expenses of regional and semi-final games shall be shared by teams involved, unless otherwise agreed upon, before the game (see Section 141).
- REPORT RESULTS. The coach of the winning team of each playoff game shall report the score as soon as possible after conclusion of the contest in TAPPS database.
- ROSTERS. Team rosters of play-off qualifiers must be in the TAPPS STATE OFFICE by the deadline to be included in the state championship programs. Late forms will not be accepted. The roster form on the TAPPS website will be the only form accepted by the state office.
- CHAMPIONSHIP SITE AND TIME. The State Soccer Championships shall be played at the times and location shown on the current year bracket.
- ARRANGEMENTS FOR CHAMPIONSHIP. The TAPPS State Office shall be responsible for all arrangements for the state tournament; officials, gate keepers, security, programs and T-Shirt sales (where possible), purchase and presentation of awards. The TAPPS official ball will be used in the state tournament.
- AWARDS AT STATE TOURNAMENT.
- Plaques shall be awarded as follows:
- State Champion
- State Runner up
- Final Four
- All tournament medals shall be provided for those earning selection to the All Tournament teams
- Individual State Champion Medallions for Players on program roster, up to 30
- Individual State Runner up Medallions for Players on program roster, up to 30
- Champion and Runner-up teams may purchase additional medallions from the TAPPS State office for $15.00 each.
Softball Plan
Section 173 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter I
SOFTBALL PLAN
(Girls Event; Five Classifications)
Rules in Sections 130-144 also apply to the Softball Plan.
Section 174 – Qualifications
- ELIGIBILITY. Only girls may try out for and participate under the high school Girls’ Softball Plan.
- STARTING DATE. Starting date for
- practice,
- scrimmages,
- first playing date,
- and district certification are shown on the TAPPS current calendar.
- NUMBER OF GAMES AND TOURNAMENTS
- No team shall compete in more than
- three (3) individual tournaments,
- plus 22 games in a season, up to and including the last date for certifying district champions.
- Those students who play on both the JV and varsity may play in no more than
- three (3) tournaments
- plus a total of 28 games(Varsity and JV games combined)
- No games may be scheduled after the certification date, except by teams that are in the play-offs. No additional games may be played by a team once it has been eliminated from the play-offs.
- A district tournament or district play-off does not count as one of the three tournaments.
- Games after district certification
- No VARSITY games may be scheduled or played after the certification date, except by teams who are in the play-offs.
- No additional games may be played by a team once it has been eliminated from the playoffs.
- no SUB VARSITY games can be scheduled or played after the district certification date.
- Schools may
- substitute two (2) games for a tournament
- or drop two (2) games and add an additional tournament.
- These changes should be clearly noted on the school's official schedule.
- A varsity starter shall not play on a junior varsity team unless the opposing coach agrees, and there are not enough junior varsity players to begin the contest. Under no circumstances should a varsity starter be allowed to play when there are junior varsity player(s) on the bench.
- All district games must be played and all district games count as varsity games on the schedule.
- No game is to be scheduled on Sunday
- SCHEDULES AND ROSTERS
- Schedules should be input into TAPPS database prior to the first interscholastic contest and should be updated as changes occur.
- Rosters should be input into TAPPS database prior to the first district contest and updated as changes occur.
- ADVANCE TO PLAYOFFS – See Section 141 and playoff format
- RESOLVING TIES IN WIN-LOSS PERCENTAGE. Districts should outline procedures (before the season begins) for determining the representatives in their district. Definite procedures should be outlined (in writing) to provide orderly facilitation for teams tied in win-loss percentage. Especially remember to outline a procedure to be used when three teams are tied for the district runner-up spot.
- CERTIFICATION. The District President shall certify the District Champion and other play-off qualifiers to the TAPPS office by the deadline indicated on the current year TAPPS calendar.
- District President's certification, play-off entries, and program information (rosters, etc.) shall be completed in TAPPS database.
Section 175 – Rules
NFHS SOFTBALL RULES,SHALL GOVERN ALL GAMES except as modified below.
- PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES. See Section 138.
- GAMES
- All games will be for seven innings (unless tied).
- 5 inning games or 1-1/2 hour time limit permitted by mutual consent through district play
- The following run rules shall be in effect:
- fifteen-run rule shall be in effect for all games (non district, district and post season)
- After three (3) innings of play, if one team is fifteen (15) or more runs ahead of its opponent, the game shall be over.
- Or if 2 ½ innings have been completed and the home team is fifteen or more runs ahead.
- ten-run rule shall be in effect for all games (non district, district and post season)
- After five (5) innings of play, if one team is ten (10) or more runs ahead of its opponent, the game shall be over.
- Or if 4 ½ innings have been completed and the home team is ten or more runs ahead.
- In district and non-district games, if a game is called before completion of the number of innings and conditions as specified in Rule 4, Section 2, Article 3, the umpire shall declare the contest "no game."
- TIE GAMES FOR DISTRICT AND NON-DISTRICT. Rule 4, Section 2, Article 3, Note 2: A regulation called game where a winner cannot be determined shall be counted as half (½) game won and half (½) game lost for each team and the game shall not be replayed. If the game is called before the completion of the number of innings and conditions as specified in 4-2-3, the umpire shall declare the contest "no game." The game shall be replayed from the start when and where determined by the two schools involved.
- SUSPENDED GAMES IN PLAYOFFS. In playoff games past the district level, any suspended game shall be continued from the point of suspension at a later time as outlined in Rule 4-3-1.
- PRACTICE BALLS. Each team is responsible for its own practice balls for warm-ups in batting and infield practice.
- COACHING BOXES. Student players and coaches in uniform or coaching attire representing school colors or mascot, may occupy the coaching boxes.
- PITCHING REGULATION. The pitcher shall take a position with both feet firmly on the ground and with one or both feet in contact with, but not off the side of the pitchers plate.
- PREGAME WARMUP. It is recommended that batting practice be eliminated and that each team be given 10 minutes for infield and outfield workouts prior to each game.
- HEAD PROTECTORS. All players must wear head protectors when batting and when on the base paths.
- COURTESY RUNNER REGULATIONS. National Federation Courtesy Runner regulations.
- The team at bat may use courtesy runners for the pitcher and/or the catcher as soon as they reach base. The same runner may not be used for both positions. Neither the pitcher nor the catcher will be required to leave the game under such circumstances.
- Players who have participated in the game in any other capacity are ineligible to serve as courtesy runners.
- A player may not run as a courtesy runner for the pitcher or the catcher and then be used as a substitute for another player in that half inning. Note: An unreported courtesy runner is an illegal substitute. Penalty: For illegal substitution, such substitute shall be ejected.
- COACH EJECTION PENALTY
- See section 138.
- ATHLETIC CODE FOR COACHES. Informing his or her immediate supervisor the next school day after a contest if he or she was ejected from that contest for unsportsmanlike actions knowing that such conduct requires automatic penalty.
- RAIN (BAD WEATHER) POLICY FOR SOFTBALL PLAYOFFS. (See TAPPS Weather Guidelines in Section 138)Teams may not play after the deadline for determining a district representative unless the following conditions are met:
- Every effort must be made by both teams to determine the winner before the deadline.
- If weather conditions make this impossible, then permission must be obtained from the potential next round opponents (or opponent). Example: District 1 winner and 2 runner-up find they cannot get their playoff decided by the deadline. They must obtain permission from District 3 winner and 4 runner-up representatives to play after the deadline. (Or just District 3 winner, if District 3 has already defeated District 4 runner-up in their respective playoff game.)
- If the teams or team involved in District 3 winner and 4 runner-up fail to give approval, then District 1 winner and 2 runner-up will have to determine a representative before the deadline specified in the softball playoff procedures.
- Extreme scheduling difficulties such as those mentioned above could result in a coin flip determining the representative to the next round.
- Every effort must be made to get the representative decided on time. This includes obtaining neutral sites and scrambling for any available field. This could mean giving up a home field advantage if another field is playable.
- In single elimination playoffs a team deciding a round after the deadline with the approval of the next round opponents will have to play on the date specified by the next round opponent.
- See Section 134
- PLAY-OFF GAMES. The first round of play-off games will be bi-district games, if more than eight teams qualify for the play-offs. If eight or less teams qualify, the first round shall be regional games.
- SITE OF BI-DISTRICT AND REGIONAL. Unless mutually agreed otherwise, bi-district/regional games shall be played at the site indicated in Section
- RESPONSIBLE FOR ARRANGEMENTS. The two teams involved shall be responsible for all arrangements for the game and shall pay all expenses.
- GATE RECEIPTS.
- Admission for Bi-district, Area and Regional games based on mutual agreement of teams involved
- Gate receipts, after expenses shall be divided between the two schools, unless otherwise agreed before the game is played.
- REPORTING SCORES
- The winning coach shall report playoff scores in TAPPS database as soon as possible after the conclusion of the contest.
- Coach shall enter the next playoff contest information in TAPPS database as soon as game information is concerned.
- ROSTERS. Team rosters of play-off qualifiers must be in the TAPPS STATE OFFICE by the deadline shown on the TAPPS calendar to be assured of being included in the state tournament programs.
- STATE PLAY-OFF FORMAT.
- Softball play-offs are single elimination.
- Admission for State shall be determined by TAPPS
- NATIONAL FEDERATION RULES SHALL APPLY, unless otherwise noted in the TAPPS manual.
- Time Limit. Time limit must be agreed upon prior to the game in the bi-district/regional rounds. There is NO TIME LIMIT in State Tournament Games.
- Run rule.
- Fifteen (15) run rule after 2 ½ or 3 innings
- Ten (10) run rule after 4 ½ or 5 innings.
- Three umpires per game shall be used in State Tournament (see Officials).
- Home team designations shall be determined by a coin flip in play-off games on neutral fields, unless mutually agreed otherwise.
- Softballs. Appropriate softballs, as described in Rule 1, Sec. 3, Art. 4 of the National Federation Rule Book shall be used. At the play-off games, each school shall provide four (4) new BADEN PERFECTION softballs, with each team retaining their own balls following the game. WILSON SPORTING GOODS will provide the softballs for the State Finals.
- In SOFTBALL Final Four Games,
- BATTING ORDER will be determined by coin flip prior to the game.
- DUGOUT assignment shall be made by TAPPS.
- BATTING CAGE times will be assigned prior to Final Four games.
- AWARDS AT STATE TOURNAMENT.
- Plaques shall be awarded as follows:
- State Champion
- State Runner-up
- Final Four plaque to each team eliminated in semi-final game.
- Individual State Champion Medallions for Players on program roster, up to 25
- Individual State Runner-up Medallions for Players on program roster, up to 25
- Individual State Final Four Medallions for Players on program roster, up to 25
- Champion, Runner-up, and Final Four teams may purchase additional medallions from the TAPPS State office for $10.00 each.
Section 176 – Pitch Count
- There is no pitch count system in place for softball for the current season.
Swimming Plan
Section 177 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter J
SWIMMING OVERVIEW
(Boys and Girls Events; Three Classifications)
Our season is built around the TAPPS directed/organized Regional and State Meets. There are no District competitions organized by TAPPS. In 2013 we created three Regions Meets (North, Central and East) designed to more efficiently run these meets as the swimming competition continues to grow. Dates and venues are posted on the TAPPS website.
Swimming is considered an Individual Sport, and has no beginning and ending dates for declaring a season or training period. While coaches can coach their swimmers and divers year round, TAPPS Coaches need to meet TAPPS coaching requirements to be entitled to represent a school at competitions. Please look at the Swimming Checklist.
Local meets are run by local high schools and TISCA sponsored meets. Swimmers may also compete in USA, YMCA and other swim competitions during the summer and school year. Ask other coaches for local meets for private or public high schools in your area.
Swimmers do not have to have swum the events they want to enter at Regionals during the current school year. However, best estimates on times will place your swimmer in the most competitive heat relative to their abilities.
ATHLETIC PURPOSE, CODE, PLAN APPLICABLE
Rules in Sections 130-144 also apply to the Swimming Plan.
Section 178 – Championship Meets
NFHS Rules will govern TAPPS Swim competitions. The regional meets as well as the State Meet are considered championship meets. In addition, TAPPS rules state:
- PARTICIPATION. No school may participate in TAPPS swimming/diving unless indicated on the current annual contract and appropriate fees paid.
- COMPETITIVE DIVISIONS.
- There shall be three divisions for high school boys
- Division I 6A
- Division II 5A
- Division III 4A/3A/2A/1A combined
- There shall be three divisions for high school girls
- Division I 6A
- Division II 5A
- Division III - 4A/3A/2A/1A combined
- BOYS/GIRLS RESTRICTIONS. Girls and boys will not compete against each other. This includes relays.
- MEET MANAGEMENT
- Regional Meets.
- Events will be swum in dual meet format order and will run as timed finals.
- All Divisions will swim together in an event, not by Division.
- We will alternate events. Girls first and then boys.
- Scoring will be done by 3 Divisions for Boys and Girls, by Team.
- There are three Regions – North, Central and East (determined by TAPPS).
- Scoring to 8th place. 9, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Double for relays.
- Entries must be submitted using Hy-tek programming. This is a must!
- State Meet
- Events will be run in dual meet format order.
- Events will run in a Time Final format.
- No preliminaries and Finals as in previous years.
- Swimmers will be seeded in heats relative to their Region Meet times.
- The meet will be conducted by Division as shown on TAPPS calendar.
- Scoring will be to 16th place in an event, regardless of heat beginning in 2019.
- 20,17,16,15,14,13,12,11,9,7,6,5,4,3,2,1 for individual swimming events.
- Double point values for relays. 40, 34, 32, 30, 28, 26, 24, 22, 18, 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2.
- Ties
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Qualifications for State.
- Qualification is by time only, and swimmers must qualify at the Region Meet to which the school is assigned.
- The top 3 swimmers in each event at the Region Meet are automatic qualifiers for the State Meet. They will be seeded by time at State.
- The next 7 fastest times from any Region will fill out the 16 qualifiers, provided their times are faster than the Upper Limit Qualifying time.
- No swimmer will be entered with a time slower than the upper limit time.
- If a qualified swimmer cannot participate at State, their school should notify the TAPPS State Swimming Director at least one week before the State Meet so a replacement can be found and notified of their eligibility.
- Relay members are qualified by team and can be changed from Region to State. There should be 16 qualified contestants in each Division of each event at the State Meet, provided enough swimmers made the upper limit qualifying time by Division. No exceptions will be granted if not enough swimmers in a Division made the upper limit qualifying time.
- USA Swimming ID numbers must be submitted at the time of your team’s Hy-tek entry. There is a place in the Hy-tek program for each swimmer’s ID. TAPPS and Meet Directors are not required to input these numbers after the Region Meet starts. Ask parents before you enter the Region. THIS IS A COACH’S REQUIREMENT!!
- Limited Entries:
A competitor at Regionals or State shall be permitted to enter:
- a maximum of four total events,
- no more than two of which may be individual events
- A swimmer may swim in 3 relays and one individual event.
- In relay events
- eight individuals may be designated per team card,
- and it shall not count as an entry unless the competitor actually competes in the event.
- Any of the eight individual swimmers may compete and/or swim- offs, and/or finals provided he/she does not exceed the permitted entries for the meet.
- Each school is limited to four scoring entries per individual event and one “A” relay per relay event.
- Entry Procedures and Forms.
- Entries for the regional meets will be sent to the regional meet director using Hy-Tek Team Manager by the required entry date.
- The Regional Meet Director will be responsible for submitting the regional results to the TAPPS State Meet Director using Hy-tek Meet Manager. Coaches and parents do not need to resubmit to enter into State.
- However, by 7 days before the State Meet, each coach must submit a Team Roster to the TAPPS Meet Director. This will be done on TAPPS database.
- All relay competitors must be noted, and scratches identified.
- Failure to submit this information may lead to disqualification.
- UNIFORMS
- NFHS Rule 3, Section 3 defines and describes the type of swimsuits that are permitted. TAPPS will follow USA and FINA on material types.
- It states that “a competitor shall not be permitted to participate wearing a suit that is not of decent appearance” especially during starts.
- Boys shall wear suits which cover their buttocks in competition.
- Girls suits should be one piece competition suits which cover the buttocks and breasts in competition.
- Only Team swim caps are allowed in competition. No club or USA swimming caps can be worn with their logos showing. Those caps should be turned inside out. Swimmers will be disqualified for this.
- TATTOOS MUST BE COVERED BY TAPE OR THE SWIM SUIT AT ALL TIMES. Exception is while warming up in the water, competing in the water and cooling down in the water.
- Temporary tattoos and other similar markings in pen are not allowed at TAPPS events. They will need to be removed before competing after being identified.
- REGION ASSIGNMENTS
- All Schools are to swim in the Region assigned by TAPPS Swimming each fall. If a school has a religious reason to ask for a reassignment for their Region Meet date to another Region, this request should be made to the TAPPS Athletic Executive Committee by January.
- Reassignment of Region must be made on a Team basis only. Reassigned Teams will compete for individual and team awards within the reassigned Region. Qualification for the State Meet will also remain constant within the reassigned Region.
- Any other requests for reassignment will be considered only on a case by case basis.
Section 179 – Rules
NFHS Rules will govern TAPPS Swimming, with exceptions noted in the current TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws and Contest Rules.
- PROTESTS/APPEALS
- All protests must be submitted,
- in writing
- accompanied by a $40.00 fee,
- on the official protest form available from TAPPS Meet Director
- and turned into the TAPPS Meet Director within 30 minutes after the event result has been posted.
- The fee will not be refunded if the appeal protest is upheld.
- No protests are allowed on the judgment calls made by the swimming officials. Video protests are limited to official equipment only.
- OFFICIAL ENTRIES
- A competitor or relay team is officially entered when the official entry sheet is delivered to the State Meet Director at the designated time and place, 7 days before the State Meet. No changes or scratches allowed.
- FAIR EFFORT RULE
- All competitors, once officially entered, shall complete all heats, swim-offs and rounds of competition for which they qualify except when an illness or injury certified by a physician or the referee forces a competitor to withdraw.
- This applies to:
- individual members of relay teams (not entire teams)
- as well as to competitors in individual events.
- Failure to compete for any reason other than illness or injury shall disqualify the competitor from any further competition in the meet.
- Previous performances are not nullified.
- A competitor may be reinstated by the referee in a later event after illness/ injury if a physician or referee verifies recuperation.
- SCORING.Region Meets
- Relays: 18, 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2
- Individual: 9, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1
- State Meets
- Relays: 40, 34, 32, 30, 28, 26, 24, 22, 18, 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, 4, 2
- Individual: 20, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 9, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1
- MEET DIRECTOR The Location Pool Meet Director will be responsible for and have full authority for the conduct and management of the meet. The Location Meet Director shall appoint all officials and judges. The TAPPS Swimming Director is not the Meet Director. The TAPPS Director is responsible for handling protests based on policy.
- MEET REFEREE The Meet Referee shall have final authority on all judgment rulings. This person will have the responsibility to run the meet in a fair, objective and impartial method. The current National Federation Swimming Rule Book will prevail.
- MEET COMMITTEE
- The State Meet Committee shall make decisions on matters not specifically covered by the rules or on the misapplication of a rule during a meet.
- Judgment calls are not subject to review by this committee.
- The committee shall consist of the TAPPS Swimming Director and one coach from each division and region. These coaches will be contacted before the meet for their involvement.
- The Division members of the committee involved in the protest will not vote during the resolution of the protest.
- The meet may be stopped at the discretion of the meet committee for a reasonable length of time to resolve pending protests.
- Any decisions of the meet committee shall be final.
- ADMISSION
- An entry fee determined by TAPPS per athlete will be charged for each Region Meet to offset costs of the meet.
- An entry fee determined by TAPPS per athlete will be charged for the State Swim Meet to offset the cost of the meet.
- Admission to the pool deck will be limited.
- Passes will be issued to
- coaches,
- managers
- and officials.
- Parents and non-swimmers will not be admitted to the deck
- School photographers will have limited access to the pool deck and must be credentialed before entering at Region and State Meets.
Section 180 – TAPPS Recognition
- Regional Competition
- Awards
- Medals for top three finishers.
- Ribbons for 4th-8th place finishers.
- The top three teams for each division will be given a team award (plaque or trophy).
- State Competition
- TAPPS Official State Meet Team Plaques for 1st through 4th place in each Division.
- First, second, and third place winners shall receive event medals in each event.
- State championship medallions will be given to each qualifying contestant on the championship team and two coaches.
- TISCA All State Awards The Texas Interscholastic Swim Coaches Association recognizes the Top 24 swimmers and Relays of all Private and Independent School swimmers in Texas for an academic year. These certificate awards are free to all coaches who are TISCA members, otherwise $10. They are available by April 15th each year.
- NISCA Academic All American Awards
The National Interscholastic Swim Coaches Association recognizes senior swimmers who have lettered and maintained a cumulative 3.75 GPA for the first 7 semesters of high school. Schools must submit for this award. Go to HERE for more info.
- NISCA also recognizes Teams that have collectively an outstanding GPA. Go to the Scholar Team Awards to find out more for this award. They have three levels – Gold, Silver and Bronze GPA Awards to deserving teams.
- And if you want to find out how your team stacks up against other private and independent schools from across the nation, look up Power Rankings at the NISCA website. It is a great motivator for every team to see how they stack up.
Tennis Plan
Section 181 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter K
TENNIS PLAN
(Boys & Girls Events; Five Classifications)
Rules in Sections 130-144 also apply to the Tennis Plan.
Section 182 – Qualifications
- PARTICIPATION
- Tennis is considered an Individual Sport by TAPPS
- Students not yet in High School may not participate with or against high school students.
- QUALIFICATION FOR STATE
- Teams must qualify for the state meet by competition in the district meet.
- DIVISIONS
- Boys’, Girls’ Divisions. There shall be the following divisions in the respective conferences:
- High school boys, singles and doubles.
- High school girls, singles and doubles.
- Entries. At the district meet each school may enter two boys’ singles and two girls’ singles, and two boys’ doubles and two girls’ doubles teams.
- Girls’, Boys’ Team Restrictions. No girls’ team shall compete against boys’ teams and vice versa.
- No individual shall be allowed to compete in both singles and doubles.
- Doubles alternates must be submitted prior to the District Tournament and may not be changed prior to the TAPPS State Tournament.
- ENTRY
- All entries must be submitted on TAPPS database.
- Doubles Alternates must be listed on the District Entry Form.
- District and State Fee sheets will be available on TAPPS database.
- ADVANCEMENT TO STATE. See Playoff Format – Section 141
- DISTRICT ASSIGNMENTS.
- Schools shall be assigned to districts by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- District Assignments will be made in the Fall of the current year.
- CERTIFICATION
- The District President shall certify the state qualifiers to the TAPPS office
- By the deadline indicated on the current year TAPPS calendar.
- FEES
- State Entry fees are owed for all players certified as advancing to the TAPPS State Tournament by the District president.
- There will be a fee determined by TAPPS.
- For each player certified advancing by the District
- Entries will be noted on the Entry Fee Sheet on TAPPS database
- Make check payable to TAPPS
- State Entry Form and Check must be sent to the TAPPS Office immediately upon district certification.
- A late fee may be assessed for all fees not received prior to the State Tennis Tournament.
- No admission cost for spectators.
Section 183 – Rules
The United States Tennis Association rules shall be used in all TAPPS matches for protocol and procedure on the courts, with exceptions as noted in this manual.
- DATES AND LOCATION FOR STATE.
- The State Tournament shall be held on the dates indicated on the current year TAPPS calendar.
- The State Tournament will be held at sites shown on the TAPPS website.
- TIMES FOR STATE TOURNAMENT.
- The first matches of the day shall start at times posted on the TAPPS website.
- Starting times will be noted on the posted brackets for reference only.
- Coaches and Players should be on site prepared to play when the DRAW is announced.
- It is the responsibility of the coach to have the players on site and checked in on time.
- Check In
- COACHES must register at the tournament desk prior to their player’s first match on Friday.
- PLAYERS must check in at the tournament desk at least 30 minutes before first scheduled match.
- Players not present when the DRAW is announced and are not present when the court is assigned for the match will be placed on a 15 minute clock. Once on the clock, if a player(s) does not check-in , the match will be considered a forfeit. Forfeits are not reversible.
- DIVISIONS - There shall be the following divisions in the TAPPS State Tournament:Boys; Singles and Doubles -- Class 6A, 5A, 4A, 3A, 2A, 1A
- Girls; Singles and Doubles -- Class 6A, 5A, 4A, 3A, 2A, 1A
- BALLS. TAPPS will supply balls for all tournament matches
- FOOT FAULTS. This rule shall be strictly enforced
- MATCHES/SETS.
- In all boys and girls matches, the best two of three sets (add scoring) shall determine the winner.
- In case of ties, the twelve point tie breaker as described by USTA rules shall be used.
- In the event of weather or other situations, the Tournament Director will determine the scoring to be used in each round.
- OFFICIALS.
- USTA Officials will be secured by the tournament director.
- Each school may be requested to furnish one coach to assist as designated by the tournament director.
- SPORTSMANSHIP. All players, teams, and coaches shall exhibit good sportsmanship. Specific care, by the contestants and fans alike, should be given to avoid improper cheering and "razzing." The Tournament Director has the right to declare any player, team, or coach ineligible who does not exhibit good sportsmanship.
- Coaches should inform contestants that acts such as throwing rackets, use of profanity, addressing an official disrespectfully, or any action which brings discredit to the individual, their school or TAPPS will be considered unsportsmanlike conduct and the player may be disqualified from further participation in the tournament. If the actions occur after a match, the placement or medals will be awarded to the next place finisher in that match.
- SUBSTITUTIONS.
- In doubles, the tournament director may allow an alternate to substitute for one of the doubles players in case of injury, illness, or loss of academic eligibility.
- The alternate must be named before District Competition
- The same individual must be the alternate at the State Tournament.
- A school may not substitute for a singles player or an entire doubles team.
- After the tournament has begun, substitutions are not permitted.
- If a singles player or a doubles team, who has qualified for the state tournament, cannot participate in all or part of the tournament; that school's coach is responsible for notifying the district alternate(s) so that the alternate(s) may compete at the State Tournament. The coach is also responsible for notifying the District President of the change.
- Any qualifying player who knows in advance that he/she cannot finish the State Tournament, should yield to the district alternate as described above. This is to prevent players from coming to State, playing one or two rounds, then pulling out; resulting in a forfeit in an advanced round at the State Tournament. Schools will be charged a fee equal to or in excess of the entry fee for all no shows.
- TEAM CHAMPIONSHIPS Points are awarded as follows:
- One (1) point for each round played + 1 ½ points to the winner of each round.
- A bye is considered a victory and points will be awarded to the advancing team.
- No points will be awarded to the defaulting team if they do not play the round. The “winning” team will receive points.
- total points(singles and doubles) per school determine team standings in Boys and Girls Divisions.
- Ties:
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- State Tournament Information
- DRAW
- The DRAW is determined by the TAPPS Tournament Director and his decisions are final. With no affiliation to TAPPS or to any member school, the TAPPS Tournament Director has the authority to manage the DRAW in accordance with the TAPPS rules and best practices as he determines best for the TAPPS State Tournament.
- No changes will be made to a DRAW once the tournament begins.
- DRAWS are not final until the beginning of the tournament. TAPPS will attempt to post the final DRAW prior to the tournament; however, the posted DRAW will not supersede the DRAW at the tournament desk at the beginning of the TAPPS State Tournament.
- The DRAW will not be configured in the event of players withdrawing from competition.
- District Champion and Runner Up cannot meet until final round.
- District Champions will face the lower seeded players from another district in the first round.
- District schools should not meet in the first round of the tournament.
- Players, both singles and doubles, from the same school will not meet until the semi-finals if possible.
- Seeding Information
- Must be Received by the TENNIS CERTIFICATION DEADLINE
- As shown on the TAPPS Calendar
- No late information will be accepted
- Information will be accepted for
- District Champions
- Nationally Ranked Players
- State Ranked Players
- Overall #1 Seed is based on previous year’s TAPPS State Tournament
- Champion
- Runner Up
- Semi-Finalist
- Remaining Seeds (2-4) are based on the results of current year’s District Tournaments.
- Only District Champions are eligible for seeding #1-#4.
- If #6 and #7 above do not determine all seeds, district winners will be seeded according to information forwarded from their respective schools.
- If none of the District Champions participated in the previous year’s TAPPS State Tournament and no seeding information is received, a blind draw of the district champions will be seed to produce the placement of overall tournament seeds.
- Coaches should not contact the TAPPS Tournament Director only to report spelling errors or errors in application of part 1 above. Seeding is final as determined by the TAPPS Tournament Director.
- DRESS CODE.
- All participants are to wear appropriate clothing.
- Standard tennis shorts, shirts, and flat-bottom shoes are to be worn at all times.
- Specifically prohibited are: tank tops, muscle shirts, spaghetti straps, cut-off jeans, shorts without pockets, any shoes other than approved court shoes.
- Spandex or similar styled shorts or leggings must be covered with modesty shorts
- (Racerback tennis jerseys shall be allowed)
- Clarification can be found on the TENNIS NEWS BRIEFS page at www.tapps.biz.
- Shirts must be long enough to tuck into shorts. (No bare midriffs). The torso must be covered during competition.
- School uniforms w/school colors & logos are encouraged. If not school color and logo, the uniform should not promote any other school or organization.
- The tournament director has the authority to determine whether the clothing is appropriate.
- TATTOOS MUST BE COVERED BY TAPE OR CLOTHING AT ALL TIMES.
- Temporary tattoos and other similar markings are not allowed at TAPPS events.
- COACHING.
- In order to coach at the District or State Tournament,
- The coach must have completed the TAPPS TEaMs Program for Tennis
- Reported completion of the TEaMs Program to the TAPPS Office.
- A maximum of one coach per team are to be designated and identified by the school at registration. The wristband or other identification must be highly visible if coaching during a match.
- These designated coaches are allowed to coach their players during the 90 second changeovers and at the end of the sets.
- The coach shall not go onto the court to coach; he/she must stay behind the fence or windscreen.
- Coaching is defined by the USTA as “communication, advice or instruction of any kind, audible or visible, to a player or players”.
- AWARDS AT STATE TOURNAMENT.
- Medals will be awarded to individual players as follows:
- State Champion(s)
- State Runner-up(s)
- Third Place – participants losing in the semifinals will be awarded a bronze medal. There is no additional play to determine third place.
- Plaques shall be awarded as follows:
- State Champion
- State Runner up
- Third Place
- Fourth Place
- Individual State Champion Medallions for State Team Champions, up to 6 players and 1 coach;
- Champion teams may purchase additional medallions from the TAPPS State office for $10.00 each.
Track & Field Plan
Section 185 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter L
TRACK AND FIELD PLAN
(Boys & Girls Events; Five Classifications)
Rules in Sections 130-144 also apply to the Track and Field Plan.
Section 186 – Qualifications
- Teams/individuals must qualify for the State Meet by competition at the district and /or regional meet.
- At the district meet, each member school may enter one boys' team and one girls' team. Each team may enter no more than three contestants in individual events and no more than one team in each relay event.
- Qualification for the State Meet shall be as follows:
- See Playoff Format Section 141
- Schools shall be assigned to districts by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- The District/Regional President shall certify the state qualifiers to the STATE TAPPS Office by the deadline shown on the current year TAPPS Calendar:
- USING Hy-Tek Meet Manager is required.
- Only TAPPS School Codes shall be used. No other codes will be accepted.
- Top six places must be certified to the TAPPS office.
- ROSTERS/PACKET
- Packets containing competitors’ numbers and coaches wristbands may be picked up prior to the start of the meet.
- TAPPS Events Passes will also be accepted (Signed and with Proper Identification), all others must pay at the gate. Competitors’ numbers will admit athletes.
- Each team must provide a minimum of one responsible adult to work one field event. Names of these individuals must be included on the roster mentioned above.
- Entries must be submitted through the TAPPS database.
- TAPPS EXCEPTION TO NFHS Track and Field Rules. – THIS RULE APPLIES TO DISTRICT, REGIONAL AND STATE MEETS.
- No contestant shall be allowed to compete in more than
- 3 running events, including the relays
- and in not more than 5 events in all;
- a contestant may compete in 5 field events.
- NOTE: Entry Maximums
- Maximum of 3 entries per school per event; only 1 relay per school.
- Maximum of 5 entries per athlete (no more than 3 running events). Listing an athlete as a relay alternate counts toward the maximum number of events for that athlete).
- A competitor who participates in more than the number of events allowed by this rule shall forfeit all individual places and points earned in those events exceeding the limit. If the event(s) exceeding the limitation is a relay, those points and places shall also be forfeited.
Section 187 – Rules for District, Regional and State Meets
- NFHS RULES
- The current National Federation Track and Field Rules shall govern TAPPS Track and Field unless otherwise designated by the TAPPS Executive Board.
- Girls long jump may use a temporary marker board as determined by event staff.
- Starting Heights at the State Meet shall be:
- Triple Jump: The scratch line or takeoff board shall be located by measuring from the nearer edge of the pit a distance of:
- Boys 32'
- Girls 22'
- Or as determined the facility
- High Jump:
- District – Minimum Starting height SHALL be 4’ for Girls and 5’ for boys.
- Regional – Minimum Starting height SHALL be 4’ 2” for Girls and 5’ 2” for Boys
- State – Minimum starting height SHALL be 4’4’’ for girls and 5’4” for boys.
- Pole Vault:
- District – Minimum Starting height SHALL be 6’ for Girls and 8’ for boys.
- Regional – Minimum Starting height SHALL be 6’ 6” for Girls and 8’ 6” for Boys
- State – Minimum starting height SHALL be 7’’ for girls and 9’ for boys
- MOVEMENT OF BAR
- The high jump bar is moved 2" at a time;
- The pole vault bar is moved 6" at a time,
- DISTRICT determined by DEC
- REGIONAL until winner is declared then one additional height may be attempted by the winner
- STATE until the State record is tied, then 2" at a time.
- ADVANCEMENT TO STATE. Four qualifiers from each region that meet the minimum qualifying heights for the regional meet
- PREFERRED LANES FOR FINALS. NFHS and facility approved format.
- FIELD EVENTS. Field events will be scheduled to avoid conflicts, as much as possible, at the State Meet, and shall include:
Boys Girls
Shot Put Shot Put
Discus Throw Discus Throw
High Jump High Jump
Long Jump Long Jump
Triple Jump Triple Jump
Pole Vault Pole Vault
- POINT SYSTEM. The point system for scoring TAPPS Track Meets shall be as follows:
Individual Events
First place | 10 points |
Second place | 8 points |
Third place | 6 points |
Fourth place | 5 points |
Fifth place | 4 points |
Sixth place | 3 points |
Seventh place | 2 points |
Eighth place | 1 points |
Relays
First place | 20 points |
Second place | 16 points |
Third place | 12 points |
Fourth place | 10 points |
Fifth place | 8 points |
Sixth place | 63 points |
Seventh place | 4 points |
Eighth place | 2 points |
- Team Ties at all levels of participation
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- FIELD EVENT JUDGES. At the District Meet, Field Event Judges must have officiated the specific event in previous meets; all field events except the high jump must have 3 adults working as officials.
- JUMPING MATS. All jumping mats must be NCAA standard with covers over adjoining mats.
- CROSS BARS. Fiberglass cross bars are to be used in pole vault and high jump.
- THROWING EVENTS. Each throw will be measured in throwing events.
- MARKING DISCUS AREA. The discus area is to be marked by arcs every 25', beginning at 75', extending to 120'. MARKING SHOT PUT AREA. The shot put area is to be marked by arcs every 5', beginning at 30', extending to 55'.
- MARKING RECORDS. The TAPPS records in the shot, discus, long jump and triple jump are to be marked by a large red marker, visible to the contestants along the right side of the event area.
- SCRATCHING AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
- THERE WILL BE NO SCRATCH MEETING AT THE STATE MEET. OTHER THAN RELAYS, THERE WILL BE NO SUBSTITUTIONS AT THE STATE MEET.
- Coaches who know in advance that any of their athletes cannot compete at the State Meet should contact the District President so that the next athlete may move up. Any changes must be made by the District / Regional President to the state office. There will be no changes after 5 pm on the Tuesday prior to the State Meet.
- In relay events, qualification is by school and not by individual, so substitutions are permitted. However, except for necessary (injuries, etc.) and minimal substitutions, the relay teams that run at the State Meet should be made up of individuals that ran on the relay team that qualified at district.
- THE FAIR EFFORT RULE - This rule will be strictly enforced only in all Final events (District, Regional and State).
- If an individual scratches (or fails to participate) in a finals event, that individual cannot participate in any other events during that meet.
- The Fair Effort Rule for Regional and State meets goes into effect when competitors qualify for the Regional meet or State meet.
- Any place or points earned prior to the scratch, shall stand.
- If the scratched individual is a member of a relay, and there is no substitute for the relay, it does not prevent other relay members from competing in individual events for which they have qualified .
- At district and regional meets coaches may make scratches until date indicated on the TAPPS calendar
- APPEALS. Appeals must go directly to the meet referee, and must be accompanied by a $40.00 deposit, which will be returned only if the appeal is upheld. The appeals committee is the referee, the clerk and the starter. Any interpretation required will be made by the rules committee. Coaches must return to the stands during deliberations.
- MATERIAL TO MARK TRACK. Any material used to mark zones, etc. on the host track must be approved by host coaches. Competitors shall remove all markings after competition.
- ALL COACHES, FANS, SCHOOL PERSONNEL AND CONTESTANTS NOT DIRECTLY INVOLVED (AT ANY GIVEN TIME) IN THE EXECUTION OF OR PREPARATION FOR PARTICIPATION IN THE STATE MEET MUST BE IN THE STANDS AND REMOVED FROM THE INFIELD AREA. THIS INCLUDES THE FIELD EVENTS, RUNNING PRELIMS, AND RUNNING FINALS.
- All athletes must be accompanied by a coach. Do not send athletes with parents or someone not accountable to the school. Each school must provide one coach per team (boys and girls) to assist in field events. Penalties will be assessed to each school who does not comply with this rule.
- UNIFORMS
- The track and field uniform consists of a minimum of jersey and shorts, of uniform color and design, which are not objectionable, and shoes, which may be supplied by the contestant. Socks are not part of the uniform.
- While tops of body suits may be considered a jersey, uniforms still require that shorts, which are not objectionable, be worn over the body suit.
- Shorts, which are not objectionable,must be worn over leotards, tights or biker shorts. In TAPPS competition, closed legged briefs must be covered with shorts that are not objectionable.
- In accordance with NFHS Rules, bare midriffs are not allowed.
- Contestants may not wear caps, toboggans, or headbands. They may use string, rubber bands or tape to keep their hair in place. Extra clothing and hats and/or gloves may be worn in inclement weather by the meet director's approval.
- Tattoos must be covered by tape or the uniform at all times.
- MEET OFFICIALS SHOULD CHECK UNIFORMS BEFORE THE EVENT AND WARN CONTESTANTS WHO ARE NOT IN UNIFORM. FAILURE BY OFFICIALS TO GIVE THIS WARNING DOES NOT EXCUSE THE ATHLETE FOR FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE RULES CONCERNING UNIFORMS, AND THE ATHLETE SHALL BE DISQUALIFIED IF HE/SHE COMPETES WHILE IN VIOLATION OF THE UNIFORM CODE.
- Any protest of objectionable jewelry or headwear being worn by a runner must be called to the attention of the officials prior to the race. When objectionable jewelry or head wear is discovered on a competitor in a field event, the objectionable material must be removed before the competitor can resume competition.
- TEAM MEMBERS, INCLUDING FIELD EVENT CONTESTANTS, SHALL WEAR THE SCHOOL UNIFORM. A COMPETITOR MUST BE IN THE PROPER TRACK UNIFORM AND WEARING THE ASSIGNED CONTESTANT NUMBER WHEN NUMBERS ARE USED.
- In relay races, all NFHS rules shall apply
- In individual events, when more than one undergarment is worn by the competitor, they do not have to be the same color.
- A contestant who competes with an illegal uniform, or is charged with unacceptable conduct, may be disqualified from that event.
- Assigned numbers must be worn by all participants at the State Track and Field Meet.
- Numbers to be worn on the front of uniform.
- Exception: Pole Vaulters shall wear on back.
- There will be a $10.00 fee to replace lost numbers at the state meet.
In keeping with NFHS rules the following are emphasized:
NFHS Rule 4.3.b.3
NFHS Rule 4.3.b.6
Violations may lead to disqualification
- UNSPORTSMANLIKE CONDUCT
- During the TAPPS State Meet, National Federation Track and Field Rules regarding unsportsmanlike conduct will be enforced. Acts such as: throwing clothing, equipment, medals, etc. on the field or track; use of profanity; addressing an official disrespectfully; or displaying any action which brings discredit to participants, their school, or TAPPS could bring disqualification to a competitor. Coaches will be held accountable for their behavior toward officials and could result in disqualification of their athlete(s) in one or more events.
- The penalty for unsportsmanlike conduct is disqualification in the event and further participation in the meet. If such acts occur following the event in which the disqualification occurs, the medal and/or points will go to the next place winner in that event. A Player ejection form must be filed by noon of the first school day following the State Track meet.
- SCHOOLS SHALL FOLLOW THESE GUIDELINES AT DISTRICT/REGIONAL MEETS.
- THE MEET DIRECTOR. The Meet Director shall have a current copy of the National Federation Track and Field Rules and the track and field section of the TAPPS Manual in his possession during the District Meet. All Decisions shall be based on these two documents.
Volleyball Plan
Section 189 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter M
VOLLEYBALL PLAN
(Girls' Event, Five Classifications;)
ATHLETIC PURPOSE, CODE, PLAN APPLICABLE
Rules in sections 130-142 also apply to the Volleyball Plan.
Section 190 – Qualifications
- ISSUANCE OF EQUIPMENT. Dates for issuing equipment before the season begins is indicated on the CURRENT TAPPS CALENDAR.
- STARTING DATES.
- Starting date for volleyball practice is shown on the CURRENT TAPPS CALENDAR.
- First day for volleyball inter-school scrimmages and matches are shown on the CURRENT TAPPS CALENDAR.
- NUMBER OF GAMES AND TOURNAMENTS.
- No team shall compete in more than
- three (3) individual tournaments,
- plus 24 matches in a season, up to and including the last date for certifying district champions.
- Schools may substitute
- two (2) matches for each tournament dropped
- or-add an additional tournament for each 2 dropped games. These changes should be clearly noted on the school’s official schedule.
- Games after district certification
- No VARSITY matches may be scheduled or played after the certification date, except by teams who are in the play-offs.
- No additional matches may be played by a team once it has been eliminated from the playoffs.
- No SUB-VARSITY matches can be scheduled or played after the district certification date.
- All District matches must be played
- All District games count as varsity matches on the schedule.
- No game is to be scheduled on Sunday.
- Those students who play on both the JV and Varsity may play in no more than 3 tournaments plus a total of 30 matches (Varsity and JV matches combined).
- A district tournament or district play-off does not count as one of the three allowable tournaments.
- Teams in the play offs are allowed one practice match between each round of the playoffs. These games do not count toward the total matches allowed.
- A varsity starter shall not play on a junior varsity team unless the opposing coach gives his permission, and there are not enough junior varsity players to begin the contest. Under no circumstances should a varsity starter be allowed to play when there are junior varsity player(s) on the bench
- SCHEDULES AND ROSTERS
- Schedules should be input into TAPPS database prior to the first interscholastic contest and should be updated as changes occur.
- Rosters should be input into TAPPS database prior to the first district contest and updated as changes occur.
- TEAM SELECTION FOR PLAY-OFFS.
- Teams shall qualify for the play-offs according to Section 141 The district president shall certify the district champion and other play-off qualifiers to the TAPPS office by the deadline shown on the current year’s TAPPS calendar.
Section 191 – Rules
- PLAYING RULES
- The current National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) Volleyball Rules shall govern TAPPS volleyball.
- PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES. See Section 138.
- The National Federation Volleyball Rules Committee has approved the rally scoring format.
- Warm-Up Procedures: It is recommended that schools use the following warm up procedure. This procedure will be used at TAPPS Regional and State Tournaments:Put 25 minutes on the clock......
- 6 minutes combined warm-up;
- 5 minutes for visitors on the net;
- 5 minutes for home team on the net;
- 2 minutes for combined serve
- 7 minutes for National Anthem/prayer/player introductions.
- LIBERO PLAYER: Rule 10.6
- The libero will be allowed to serve in one rotation.
- When serving, the libero would not be required to leave the playing area or be out of the game for one rally/dead ball before replacing the incoming player in the right back position.The libero is a back row player and is not allowed to complete an attack from anywhere if the ball at the moment of contact, is entirely above the height of the net. The libero wears a uniform in contrast to the other members of the team and is intended to be a player who specializes in defense and serve reception. The libero may replace a back row player without taking away from the team’s allowed number of substitutions. Only one libero may be designated per game. The libero may only serve in one position in the serving order. If the libero is in the game immediately prior to moving to a serving position there does not have to be a rally between libero replacements if the libero serves the next rally. Specific stipulations for using the libero include:
- The libero must be designated on the lineup sheet prior to each game.
- The libero must enter the game after the starting lineup has been checked.
- A team may exercise one replacement per dead ball.
- The libero must enter and exit the game between the attack and the baseline.
- The libero may be the team captain.
- The libero may be used as an exceptional substitute for an injured player if no other legal substitutions are available.
- The libero may not replace a disqualified player.
- The libero shall not block or attempt to block.
- The libero shall not set the ball using an overhead finger pass while in front of the attack line extended for an attack above the height of the net.
- THE USE OF THE LIBERO IS AN OPTION AND NOT A REQUIREMENT. The use of the libero is a coaching strategy and its use in a particular game is optional.
- OFFICIALS. See Section 134.
- Unless mutually decided other-wise, registered TAPPS APPROVED OFFICIALS shall be used.
- Schools should attempt to secure neutral officials, which are satisfactory to both parties and agreed upon in advance.
- Beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement.
- In non-district and district matches, a minimum of 2 TAPPS approved officials (referee and umpire) are required.
- In all play-off games, a minimum of 4 approved officials are required (referees, umpire and 2 line judges).
- FORMAT FOR BI-DISTRICT, AREA and REGIONAL GAMES
- Unless otherwise indicated, the first game on the bracket shall be the bi-district game.
- Unless mutually agreed otherwise, Bi-District games shall be played on the date(s) indicated on the current year's calendar.
- Unless mutually agreed otherwise, the game shall be played at the site indicated in Section 141.
- If a neutral site is chosen, a coin toss may be used to determine which team will be designated the home team.
- All arrangements for the bi-district games shall be according to the instructions in Section 141.
- A maximum admission of $5.00 for students/senior citizens and $10.00 for adults shall be charged for bi-district games.
- The home team shall furnish the game ball.
- Officials. TAPPS approved officials shall be used.
- Schools should attempt to secure neutral officials, which are
- satisfactory to both parties
- and agreed upon in advance
- beginning a game with an official constitutes agreement.
- Only TAPPS PASSES are acceptable for free admission to post district contests.
- Local and district passes are not acceptable.
- Spirit Squads in uniform shall be admitted free.
- The winning coach shall report playoff scores in TAPPS database as soon as possible after the conclusion of the contest.
- Coach shall enter the next playoff contest information in TAPPS database as soon as game information is concerned.
- Winning coach shall check the current year bracket for the next game.
- FORMAT FOR STATE FINAL FOUR In Basketball and Volleyball, for all playoff games, all coaches shall dress in a manner appropriate for the championship level of competition. Shorts, t-shirts, warm-ups and the like are not considered appropriate for the Final Four games. High- heeled shoes should not be worn at the regional and state level of competitions at the request of our hosting venues. The TAPPS officials on site will have the final determination in the appropriateness of dress.
- Admission shall be determined by TAPPS.
- Only current TAPPS EVENTS PASSES are acceptable for free admission.
- Local and district passes are not valid for playoff contests.
- Spirit Squads in uniform shall be admitted free if arriving as a group.
- The home team shall be determined by TAPPS prior to each contest. Game ball will be as indicated in section 138-Playing Rules.
- TAPPS will provide neutral TAPPS APPROVED OFFICIALS for the State Tournament.
- Officials for the tournament will be assigned from more than one chapter, if possible.
- Music for warm ups will be furnished by TAPPS. Specific requests shall not be accepted.
- No additional sources of music shall be allowed in the playing area or arena.
- A host for each team in the tournament and a hospitality room for coaches and officials, will be provided by the HOST city or university where possible.
- Official TAPPS Tournament T-Shirts will be sold at the games by TAPPS.
- Spring Volleyball
- Calendar
- 14 Days of instruction
- Days do not have to be consecutive
- Includes Saturdays
- Schools shall not provide instruction on Sundays
- 21 consecutive days from first to last day of instruction
- Participation
- Students not yet in High School may participate
- Students not enrolled and attending the TAPPS member school may not participate in Spring Volleyball
- Competition
- Schools may practice with another school
- Schools may have an inter-squad scrimmage or game
- School may not have an inter-school game or scrimmage
- PERFORMANCE GROUPS
- In order to maintain a proper perspective and to insure equity in competition for the participating teams, the following guidelines must be followed.
- The guidelines apply to
- Marching Bands
- Drum Lines
- Other live performance groups
- Music played over sound systems
- Band instruments, including drums, are not to be played at any time other than when the entire band is playing.
- During the contest, bands are to play only
- during pregame,
- between sets
- postgame,
- time-outs (except injury time-outs)
- Because the band acts as a spirit group,
- members should always act in a positive manner and
- must not do anything to distract or negatively affect the opposing team.
- It is the director’s responsibility to prevent his/her band from
- playing at inappropriate times,
- playing inappropriate music, or
- taunting the opposing team.
Section 192 – Sand Volleyball
- Student Entries
- For TAPPS purposes, Sand Volleyball is a Girls Only activity
- Each team shall consist of two (2) eligible students
- A school may submit alternates who may replace players if they are unable to compete subject to the following restrictions
- May be made prior to the beginning of pool play
- May not be made after the tournament officially begins
- Student Eligibility
- Incoming 9th Grade Students
- Must have COMPLETED the 8th grade
- Must be ENROLLED in the new school
- Must have completed all financial requirements of newly admitted student
- Transfer Students
- See Section 104 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- Must have completed all financial requirements of newly admitted students
- Graduating Seniors
- Graduating seniors are eligible provided they are
- In good standing with the member school
- Not yet participating in post high school programs
- Coach Eligibility
- Coaches must be assigned by the member school
- Coaches must complete the TEaMs program
- Coaches must be entered and identified in TAPPS database
- Coaching
- Active coaching is allowed during side changes.
- The coach may not enter the court.
- The interaction must take place during the time allowed when players change sides of the court and play must immediately begin after the side change.
- Coach may not have interaction with the opposing team members.
- Coach may not change or influence scoring decisions made on the court.
- Officials
- TAPPS shall provide rules officials shall be provided for the tournament
- Teams shall officiate the contests in which they play
- Only the players on the court may request assistance
- Rules official may overrule any violation noted when observing a match
- Scoring shall be kept by
- The two teams involved in the contest
- Volunteer scorekeepers shall record the score during the match
- The teams shall attest to the score upon completion of the match.
- Rules
- General Playing Rules
- Block counts as a contact
- No Open hand dinks/tips
- One Toss per serve
- Players may not “set” the ball or contact the ball with finger action in an attempt to play the ball when receiving the serve.
- Any contact with any part of the net by a player’s body is a violation.
- Players handling the ball must set the ball in the direction they are facing or directly behind them (shoulders squared) when returning the ball over the net.
- Side Changes in multiples of seven (7) when the set goes to 21 or 28. Side changes in multiples of five (5) when the set goes to 15.
- Scoring
- General
- All sets / games
- All sets / games
- Tournament Director shall determine if there is a hard scoring cap or if the sets shall continue until a two point margin is reached
- Pool Play
- 1 game to 21
- Consolation Bracket Play
- 1 game to 25
- Championship Bracket after one loss
- 1 game to 25
- Championship Bracket Play
- 1 Game to 25
- Time Outs
- Each team is allowed one time-out per set.
- The time out shall not exceed 2 minutes
- Injury time out shall be limited to no more than 3 minutes
- In addition, one technical time-out is allowed per each set of 21.
- The technical time-out is not awarded to each team, but rather a shared time-out when the total combined score is reached.
- During games 1 and 2 that are played to 21 points the technical time-out is taken when the combined score reaches 21.
- There is no technical time-out in a set of 15 points.
- For single sets the technical time-out is taken when the combined score reaches 21.
- Tournament Format
- Pool Play
- Bracket Play
- Official Ball
- The TAPPS official ball for Sand Volleyball is the Baden Perfection - Sand
Wrestling Plan
Section 193 – Athletic Purpose, Code, Plan Applicable
Subchapter N
WRESTLING PLAN
(Boys Event)
ATHLETIC PURPOSE, CODES, PLAN APPLICABLE.
Rules in Sections 130-142 also apply to the Wrestling Plan.
Section 194 – Qualifications
- National Federation of State High School Association (NFHS) Wrestling Rules shall apply to TAPPS Wrestling.
- PARTICIPATION. A school may not participate in The TAPPS State Wrestling Meet and/or against other TAPPS wrestling competitors unless indicated on current annual contract with appropriate fees paid.
- DIVISIONS. There shall be only one varsity division representing the entered school for a varsity wrestling competition. There cannot be two varsity teams competing in the same meet to wrestle from the same high school. NOTE: Only one entrant per school, per weight class, will be entered for the TAPPS State Wrestling Tournament.
- WEIGHT CLASSIFICATIONS. Current weight classes for all TAPPS competitors will be set forth in the National Federation Rule Book with any TAPPS/Prep State approved changes for allowances of minimum and/or maximum weight allowed as per weight class.
- Weight classes are in accordance with NFHS rules and guidelines.
- Any person that has participated in wrestling has entertained the notion that if he were to move down to the next weight class that he could win more matches. This may be true in some cases. PULLING WEIGHT DOWN IS TO BE DISCOURAGED! The use of a sweat box, rubberized weight reduction suits or similar process that induces excessive sweating for rapid weight loss is strictly forbidden by TAPPS and the National Federation Rules.
- SEASON.
- Wrestling is a lifetime sport and as such does not have a beginning or ending season date.
- Practice matches will not count for or against an individual's win/loss record.
Section 195 – Rules
- National Federation of State High School Association (NFHS) Wrestling Rules shall apply to TAPPS Wrestling. TAPPS RULES REQUIRE THAT TATTOOS MUST BE COVERED BY TAPE OR THE UNIFORM AT ALL TIMES WHEN NOT COMPETING ON THE MAT.
- The TAPPS State Wrestling Meet - TAPPS shall determine the location of the state meet. Efforts shall be made to place the TAPPS state meet at a location separate from the current year Prep State meet.
- OFFICIAL TEAM ENTRIES.
- State entry forms must be received by the TAPPS State Office and the Hosting Tournament Director by the deadline on the TAPPS calendar
- An entry fee determined by TAPPS shall be charged for each student entered into the competition.
- Only one name is to be submitted for each weight class on each school’s entry form.
- Schools may substitute a new wrestler up to and prior to the coaches meeting or weigh in whichever is first.
- The new wrestler must not have been an entry in the meet
- The replaced wrestler is out of the meet.
- A wrestler already entered cannot be moved to a different weight class.
- Participating schools must provide the required forms, Certified Alpha Roster, an Academic Eligibility form and the State Entry form; prior to any Seeding Meeting for the State Meet.
- An entry fee determined by TAPPS shall be charged for each student entered into the competition.
- AWARDS.
- Team Plaques shall be awarded as follows:
- State Champion
- State Runner-up
- Third place
- Fourth place
- Team ties in scoring
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- No more than 15 Individual (Team) State Championship Medallions will be awarded for the championships team qualifiers entered. Also, (2) additional medallions for the coaching staff.
- Medals for 1st, 2nd and 3rd place will be awarded.
- Additional team medallions may be purchased for the State Champion Team from the TAPPS Office for $10.00.
- OFFICIALS
- All Officials must be satisfactory to both parties and agreed upon in advance for all duals, triad, quad or tournaments. Teams are urged to always secure outside officials (ones who are not a part of either school's staff, etc.) The visiting school should insist upon an agreement on officials before the day of the meet. A school that refuses to compete because the official(s) agreed upon have not been secured shall not be considered as breaking its contract. Starting a meet with an official constitutes an agreement.
- In an attempt to standardize the officiating at meets and tournaments, it is encouraged that all officials and coaches be knowledgeable of all rules and the interpretations of the rules. Officials are always to be treated with respect. In return, officials are always to treat coaches with respect.
- At the TAPPS State Meet, the hosting school shall attempt to acquire a mixed group of referees from each area of the state. Thus, to truly represent the complete representation of the state’s competition for the various schools participating.
- The only officials used for the TAPPS State Meet must be a member of the Texas Wrestling Officials Association (TWOA)or other approved association.
- OXYGEN. No oxygen shall be used before or during any dual, triad, quad meet or tournament, unless directed by a Team Doctor or hosting medical staff.
- VIDEOS. Video tape machines will be allowed at all meets but the NFHS rules are in effect according to its rules towards video or taping allowed.
- PASSES. Only current TAPPS PASSES, with photo ID, will be accepted for free admission. Competitors must be identified and passed through the gate by the head coach/Athletic Director.
Section 196 – TAPPS Recognition
- All State. Top three places in each weight; however, no other medals or awards shall be presented. Reason: duplication of awards.
- Academic All State – See Section 139 – Academic All State
- Of the Year Nominations. Using the form on the TAPPS website, schools may nominate one person per category for the “Of the Year” awards. See deadlines on calendar. Only JUNIORS and SENIORS are eligible for this award. Preference will be given to SENIORS.
Section 197 – Questions and Answers
- Does the lowest allowable weight certify weight or weight-class?
- The lowest allowable weight certifies weight-class. E.g. Johnny is assessed and his lowest allowable weight is 104. He is now certified to the 112-lb weight class. When the growth allowance is added, he is still only eligible for the 112-lb. weight class.
- What weigh-ins count towards monitoring the descent plan, event weigh-ins or weigh-ins at practice?
- All weigh-ins count.
- What types of scales are acceptable for certifying weight?
- Acceptable scales are platform balance scales, the so-called "doctor's scales" and electronic scales IF and only IF they have been certified within one year of the date of the weigh-in. Only scales bearing a current seal (i.e. within one year of the date of the weigh-in) of a properly accredited scale manufacturer or certifier.
TAPPS Fine Arts Contest Rules: Meet Codes
Section 198 – Purpose of High School Fine Arts Competition
The purposes of the Fine Arts competitions are as follows:
- To assist, advise and aid TAPPS schools in organizing and conducting interschool fine arts competitions;
- To equalize and stimulate wholesome competition among schools of similar size;
- To regulate competition so that students can experience the greatest educational, social, and aesthetic benefits from the contests;
- To reinforce the concept that competition is an integral part of the educational program;
- To preserve the activity for the overall benefit of the contestant and not sacrifice the contestant to the activity;
- To promote a spirit of good sportsmanship and fair play in all contests;
- To promote among the participant schools a spirit of friendly rivalry and a respect for the rules; and
- To forward the concept of accepting decisions of contest officials without protest and treating officials as co-partners in the educational process of competition.
Section 199 – Fine Arts Codes
The Student Participation Code and the Adult Coach/Sponsor Code carries the force of rule. Member schools violating any of the provisions of these codes will be subject to penalty.
- FINE ARTS PARTICIPATION CODE. The general Participation Code requires that one:
- Observe all rules, both in letter and intent;
- Coach without resorting to unethical tactics, trickery that attempts to skirt the rules, or any use unfair tactic, which detracts from sound educational principles;
- Accept decisions of officials without protest, and without questioning their honesty or integrity, and extend protection and courtesy to contest officials;
- Win without boast and lose without bitterness;
- Not provide inducement for Fine Arts purposes. Inducement means to encourage a student to change schools for the purpose of participating in TAPPS activities by offering the student or the student’s parent/guardian cash, waiver of tuition, board or lodging, transportation, a job, or other valuable consideration to induce the student to enroll in a participant school.
- Sunday Participation. TAPPS member schools shall not sponsor nor shall students compete in TAPPS contests on Sunday. Exceptions: TAPPS district and state competitions may be held on Sunday due to unavoidable circumstances which cause hardship to participating schools, provided they are approved by all of the following:
- TAPPS director
- A majority of administrators involved
- The meet director
- The host schools
- COACH/SPONSOR CODE. This code includes the principles described in Section 199 and the purposes listed in Section 198. Further, the code requires that the coach/sponsor:
- Be aware of, understand, and follow all rules governing the competition for which the coach/sponsor is responsible;
- Treat contestants fairly and professionally for the general welfare of the student based on what is best for the general welfare of the student;
- Respect other coaches/sponsors;
- Adhere to policies that do not force students to specialize or restrict them from participation in other activities;
- Allow students to participate in one school activity without requiring, as a prerequisite, participation in another school or non-school activity;
- Abstain from any practice that makes a student feel pressured to participate in non-school activities.
- Utilize the best and most current teaching and coaching methods through affiliation with professional associations and publications;
- Abstain from any practice that solicits teachers to modify a participant student’s grade for eligibility purposes.
- Those actions shown in Section 138 – Prohibited Activities apply to fine art competitions.
- CONFIDENTIALITY CODE. Coaches, contest directors and contestants are responsible for maintaining confidentiality of contest materials. Transfer of information contained in the materials will be considered a violation of the Fine Arts Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
Section 200 – School Authority
- SCHOOL AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITY. Responsibility for the proper administration and scheduling of all contests shall be under the supervision of the designated administrator.
- PREVIOUS SUSPENSION. The TAPPS Executive Board shall forfeit any contest won by an individual or school if it finds a school employee previously suspended under Section 23 of the By-Laws participated on behalf of the individual or school in the contest while prohibited from doing so under order of the TAPPS Executive Board.
- COACH OR ADULT SPONSOR. No student shall represent his or her school at any time in connection with TAPPS competition unless accompanied by a coach or another appointed member of the school faculty/staff. Exception: A non-school employee may serve as the adult sponsor of students when appointed by the administrator in areas where no coaching/directing takes place. These individuals may provide the transportation to and from the activity and be responsible for the supervision of participants.
- PROFESSIONAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT FORM. All personnel coaching or sponsoring in grades 9-12 must sign a Professional Acknowledgment Form (Form) prior to the beginning of each school year.
- TMS. Each coach/sponsor shall complete the TAPPS Training for the activity they coach.
Section 201 – Student Eligibility
- INDIVIDUAL REPORT FORMS. It is the responsibility of each school to file the following required annual forms for each student who participates.
- Parent/Guardian Permit. Annual participation permit signed by the student’s parent/guardian
- Rules Acknowledgement. Annual TAPPS Rules Acknowledgement Form signed by the student.
- ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS.
- Eligibility Forms. Schools must submit eligibility forms (for all Fine Arts contestants) online. New students must be added before they can compete.
- Minimum Penalty. If an eligibility form was not filed prior to competition and it was an inadvertent error, and if the student is actually eligible under Article V of the Constitution a minimum penalty of private reprimand to the school will occur.
Section 202 – Eligible Schools
- ELIGIBLE SCHOOLS Only schools that are members of TAPPS as prescribed in Article III of the Constitution shall be eligible for competition. In order to be eligible to participate in the Fine Arts contests, schools must use TAPPS as the vehicle for its athletic competitions as well.
- MEETS Competition shall extend to a state championship in the contests listed on the previous page.
Academic Plan
Section 203 – Academic Plan
Subchapter Q
Rules in Sections 197-202 also apply to the Academic Plan. Coaches/Sponsors and contestants are responsible for all rules contained herein.
Section 204 – Academic Contests
- TAPPS sponsors the following competitions:
- Advanced Math
- Calculator Applications
- Current Issues and Events
- Duet Acting
- Lincoln Douglas Debate
- Literary Criticism
- Mathematics
- Number Sense
- Original Oratory
- Persuasive Speaking
- Poetry Interpretation
- Prose Interpretation
- Ready Writing
- Science
- Social Studies
- Solo Acting
- Spanish
- Spelling
- ELIGIBILITY. In addition to the eligibility requirements for contests in Article V of the Constitution, only students in grades 9-12 shall be permitted to enter the contests.
- REPRESENTATION - Each participant member school may enter up to THREE individual/duets per event.
- VERIFICATION PERIOD
- A 30-minute verification will follow the initial posting of all results. All results will be final at the conclusion of this time period.
- If it is evident that an error has been made in ranking a contestant’s score, the Meet Director is authorized to correct the error.
- A speech Verifier will ensure that all procedures and rules have been followed.
- If questions arise, contact the Classification Speech Coordinator, State Speech Director, or State Academic Director.
- NO Protest or Appeal shall be allowed regarding a student other than those who attend your school.
- USE OF AIDS
- Translators are not allowed.
- Irlen lenses, overlays, or colored paper are permitted.
- TEST PERSONNEL. (Contest Directors, Monitors, and Assistants must be professional and unbiased.)
- Contest Director. Must understand the rules of the contest he is administering.
- Proctor. Assist the Contest Director, monitors students taking exams, maintains silence in the halls, and performs other duties as necessary.
- Graders. Competent graders may include coaches who should maintain a professional and unbiased demeanor.
- If questions arise, contact the Classification Speech Coordinator, State Speech Director, or State Academic Director.
Section 205 – Academic Meet Organization
- CONTEST SCHEDULE
- Each school can send to the championship meet a maximum of 3 students per contest unless otherwise stated by TAPPS.
- No Schedule Changes due to conflicts between speaking and academic contests. Schools should plan their entries carefully.
- POINT VALUE FOR STATE MEET.
- CHAMPIONSHIPS. The total points in all academic events determines the state rankings. School standing will be based on the number of points accumulated for each contest place based on the following point values:
1st place | 10 points |
2nd place | 8 points |
3rd place | 6 points |
4th place | 5 points |
5th place | 4 points |
6th place | 3 points |
7th place | 2 points |
8th place | 1 point |
- DIVISION OF POINTS AMONG SCHOOLS TIED. To break ties within categories, add the places together and divide the points equally. For example, for a first place tie, add first and second place points and divide equally. The school which ranks next shall receive third place points. Points for ties for the remaining places shall be decided in the same manner, except that schools tied for last place shall divide equally the points assigned to that place.
- AWARDS
- First through eighth places will be given in each contest. First through third places will receive medals; fourth through eighth places will receive ribbons. There will be no award assemblies.
- Ties for final overall school ranking
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Overall Student Awards
- Tie Breakers
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
Section 206 – Invitational Competitions
TAPPS will be using TAPPS materials for the State Meet, so UIL Invitational Meets using UIL Sets A and B may be attended.
Section 208 – State Academic/Speech Meet
- ORGANIZATION
- State Meet
- All academic contests are co-ed.
- A tentative schedule of contests, events, and information regarding lodging will be posted on the TAPPS website.
- All participating schools are expected to be familiar with and abide by the TAPPS Constitution, By-Laws, and Academic Meet Code.
- School Responsibility. Each coach/sponsor is ultimately responsible for ascertaining the dates of the meet and scheduled times for each contest or event.
- ENTRIES
- There will be a fee per student, per event, for the state meet, as determined by TAPPS.
- The TAPPS Contest Roster Form (on TAPPS database) and money will be turned in at the time of registration at the state meet. Additional fees for State speech events can be approved by the Executive Board.
- JUDGES To be determined prior to competition.
- Proctor/Graders To be determined prior to competition.
- Registration Schools must be registered and fees paid prior to students participating in the TAPPS State Competition.
Section 209 – Contest Procedures
- Written Contest Procedures (Also see Individual Contest Rules)
- Substitutions must be made before the contest begins in the registration room.
- Assembly: Once materials are passed out, no late contestants will be allowed to enter the contest room.
- Distribution of Papers. The contest director should distribute the test papers and answer sheets.
- Scratch paper: the Contest Director may provide scratch paper.
- Read Contest Rules to students exactly as printed under individual contests.
- Start and Stop Signals. After all test materials are ready and instructions read, indicate that the contest is about to begin and answer no additional questions. The signal to start/stop should be given in a manner that is clear and understood by all contestants.
- Collecting the Papers. After giving the signal to stop, the Contest Director should collect all tests, answer sheets, and scratch paper. These must be turned in immediately to the Meet Director or the Grading Room Monitor, along with extra tests, answer sheets, and contest support materials at the end of the contest
- Grading
- Grading is in a room designated by the Meet Director. Only assigned graders will be allowed in this room.
- Grade and initial all exams using 2 different graders if possible. If a difference in scores results, the graders should consult to rectify the situation. The top 12 papers will be graded a third time. Three different colors are preferred.
- If a majority of graders agree the key contains an error, the question may be brought to the attention of the Meet Director who may authorize a change in the correct answer or delete the question.
- Rank the exams by score. Exams should be separated into classifications before ranking.
- Places and Ties. First place goes to the contestant making the highest score; second place to the contestant making the next highest score, and so on. (See individual contest rules to see if and how ties are broken.) The tie breaking procedure should be used through the top eight places qualifying for state. Should there be a tie for first place, there is no second place.
- Should there be a tie for second place, there is no third, and so on.
- Record the results on the contest roster and turn in to the grading room supervisor when complete.
- The Fine Art Executive Committee will have the final say on all contested issues.
- Tie Breakers for Individual Contests
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
Grading Overview of Written Exams
Times and Grading Procedures for Objective Academic Contests. Specific instructions are contained in the rules for each contest. These are merely point values. Scoring instructions provided with the test take precedence.
Science – 90 Minute Test
+6 Pts. Correct Answer
-2 Pts. Incorrect Answer
0 Pts. Skipped Question
Spanish - 90 Minute Test
+1 Pts. Correct Answer
0 Pts. Skipped Question
Current Events & Issues -60 Minute Test
+1 Pt. Correct Answer
0 Pts. Skipped Question
Number Sense - 10 Minute Test
+5 Pts. Correct Answer
-4 Pts. Incorrect Answer
-4 Pts. Skipped problem
0 Pts. Unanswered after last attempted Problem
or equivalently
+5 Pts. Each attempted problem (5 x last number attempted)
-9 Pts. Each problem skipped (before the last number attempted), changed, or incorrect.
Calculator - 30 Minute Test
+5 Pts. Correct Answer
+3 Pts. Wrong number of Significant Digits on problems marked SD
-2 Pts. Incorrect Answer
-2 Pts. Skipped problem
0 Pts. Unanswered after last attempted Problem
or equivalently
+5 Pts. Each attempted problem (5 x last number attempted)
-7 Pts. Each problem skipped (before last number attempted) or incorrect.
-2 Pts. For the wrong number of Significant Digits on problems marked SD
Advanced Math - 40 Minute Test
+6 Pts. Correct Answer
-2 Pts. Incorrect Answer
0 Pts. Skipped Question
Social Studies - 90 Minute Test
+1 Pt. Part I
+2 Pts. Part II
+3 Pts. Part III
+1 Pt. Part IV
Literary Criticism -90 Minute Test
+1 Pt. A Handbook for Literature Section
+3 Pts. Reading List Section
+2 Pts Specific Application to Literature
Mathematics - 40 Minute Test
+6 Pts. Correct Answer
-2 Pts. Incorrect Answer
0 Pts. Skipped Question
Spelling - 90 Minute Test
Part I - 15 Minutes
+1 Pt. Correct Answer
Part II - Words are read at the rate of 4 per minute with the provided definition.
+1 Pt. Correct Answer
A positive score must be made on any test to place at the state level of competition.
Section 210 – Advanced Math Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST.
- Test Questions. The 40-minute test will consist of 60 multiple-choice questions designed to test knowledge and understanding in the areas of algebra I and II, geometry, trigonometry, math analysis, analytic geometry, pre-calculus, probability, and elementary calculus.
- USE OF CALCULATORS.
- Student May Use Calculators. Contestants will be allowed to use any commercial silent hand-held calculator that does not require auxiliary electric power and as long as they are not modified. Each student may bring one spare calculator. Small, hand-held computers are not permitted. Calculator memories are not cleared.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices besides permitted calculators and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Indicate your answers using capital letters on the appropriate blank provided on the answer sheet. Failure to do so will result in disqualification.
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. Any contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- You will be allowed the use of calculators on this test.
- You have 40 minutes for this test. If you are in the process of writing down an answer, you may finish; you may not do additional work on a test question.
- You will receive plus six points for each correct answer and two points shall be deducted for an incorrect answer. No points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions.
- If you finish the test before the end of the allotted time, you may leave the room quietly. No talking or distracting noises may be made. Turn in all your testing materials as you leave.
- You may place as many notations as you desire anywhere on the test paper except on the answer sheet, which is reserved for answers only. You may use additional scratch paper provided by the contest director.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- Stop and Start Signals: Exactly 40 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test and answer sheet. If contestants are in the process of writing down an answer, they may finish; they may not do additional work on a test question.
- Scoring. Each contestant will be awarded six points for each question answered correctly, not points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions, and two points will be deducted for an incorrect answer.
- Ties.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- NO STUDENT MAY PARTICIPATE IN BOTH TAPPS MATH AND ADVANCED MATH.
Section 211 – Calculator Applications Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST.
- Test Questions. The 30-minute contest shall include calculations involving addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, roots, powers, exponentiation, logarithms, trigonometric functions, and inverse trigonometric functions. In addition to straightforward calculation problems, the contest shall include geometric and stated problems similar to that found in high school algebra, geometry, and precalculus textbooks.
- USE OF CALCULATORS.
- Students May Use Calculators. Contestants will be allowed to use any commercial silent hand-held calculator that does not require auxiliary electric power and as long as they are not modified. Each student may bring one spare calculator. Small, hand-held computers are not permitted.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices besides permitted calculators and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. The contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- You may write on the test paper, but only the answer should be written in the answer space. You may erase or mark out a previously written answer, provided you write the revised answer within the answer space and clearly indicate the answer you wish to have graded. Answers may be written in decimal or in powers of 10 notation of the form, 1.23 X 10-6. Except in integer, dollar sign, and certain stated problems, answers should be written with three significant digits only, with plus or minus one unit error in the third significant digit permitted. Integer problems require answers written as an integer and no error is permitted. Dollar sign problems should be answered to the exact cent, but plus or minus one cent error is permitted. Stated problems using inexact numbers require use of the method of least significant digits. Problems requiring the method of least significant digits are indicated by “sd” in the answer blank. Plus or minus one unit error in the last significant digit is permitted. Answers should be given in the units specified and with the correct sign. The test cover sheet illustrates how answers should be written.
- You have 30 minutes for this test.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- All problems through the last problem completed or attempted will be graded. A problem is considered to have been attempted if any mark or erasure appears in the answer space for that problem. Scoring is plus five points for correct answers and minus two points for incorrect, skipped, or illegible answers. Stated problems involving inexact numbers that are answered correctly but with the incorrect number of significant digits are awarded plus three points, provided at least two significant digits are indicated and the more precise answer rounds exactly to the lesser precise answer.
- When the end of the contest period is indicated, you must cease calculator operations. After the signal to stop is given you may, however, write down one number displayed on your calculator.
- You may do calculations on your test paper as long as it is not in the designated answer space.
- You may use any silent, hand-held calculator that does not require auxiliary electric power.
- If you finish the test before the end of the allotted time, you may leave the room quietly. No talking or distracting noises may be made. Turn in all your testing materials as you leave.
- Stop and Start Signals. Exactly 30 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test. If contestants are in the process of writing down an answer, they may write down one number displayed on their calculator; they may not do additional calculations on their calculator or test.
- Scoring. Each contestant shall be awarded five points for each question answered correctly; two points will be subtracted for each question answered incorrectly, or is skipped. Stated problems involving inexact numbers and labeled ‘sd’ that are answered correctly but with the incorrect number of significant digits are awarded plus three points, provided at least two significant digits are indicated and the more precise answer rounds exactly to the lesser precise answer. No points shall be deducted for unanswered questions after the last attempted problem.
- Ties.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
Section 212 – Reserved for Future Use
Section 213 – Current Issues and Events Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST.
- Test Questions. The 60 minute test will consist of 40 multiple choice questions and a written essay. The contest will focus on a basic knowledge of current state, national and world events and issues. “Current events” are defined as those which have occurred during the current school year. (State Test - October 1 to March 1.)
- Contestants who fail to write an essay will be disqualified.
- SOURCES AND ESSAY. ( No materials may be used during the exam)
- Sources. National daily newspapers or Texas metropolitan newspapers, business newspapers, specialized periodicals, weekly news magazines, journals of political or social nature, and other periodicals that report, summarize or explain world events shall be considered as contest sources. “Current events” web pages available via the Internet are also excellent sources of information.
- Essays. The essay should be of an expository nature. The essay should be approximately 200 words in length. Contestants should attempt to substantially develop a full range of points relative to the essay prompt. All contestants are required to answer the essay question. Contestants who fail to write an essay shall be disqualified. A grading rubric will be used to judge the essay question. The essay will be used in the event of a tie score.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices besides permitted calculators and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Indicate your answers using capital letters on the appropriate blank provided on the answer sheet. Failure to do so will result in disqualification.
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. Any contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- You have 60 minutes for this test. No oral time warnings shall be given. You are required to turn off any audible signals on any timing devices during the contest.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining on the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- You will receive 1 point for each correct answer. The essay is required, but will be judged only in the event of a tie. Failure to complete the essay will result in disqualification.
- When the signal is given to stop, you must cease all writing.
- If you finish the test before the allotted time, you may leave quietly. No distracting noises will be permitted. Turn in all your test materials as you leave.
- Stop and Start Signals. Exactly 60 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test. If contestants are in the process of writing down an answer, they may finish; they may not do additional work on a test question.
- Scoring. Each contestant shall be awarded one point for each question answered correctly and no points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions on the objective portion of the test. Each contestant is required to write a short essay. No points will be given for the essay. One or three judges who are not coaches of the tied contestants shall rank the essay sections. The ranking of the judge(s) will break the tie. Each contestant is required to answer the essay question. Failure to answer the essay will result in disqualification.
- Ties.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
Section 214 – Literary Criticism Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST.
- Test Questions. The 90-minute 65 multiple choice and essay test requires knowledge of literary history and of critical terms, and ability in literary criticism. Students are tested over material on the reading list and required to select the best answers involving judgment in literary criticism. Students must also analyze literary passages not on the reading list. A tie breaker is required in which the student must write a short essay dealing with a specified topic about a short literary passage.
- SOURCES AND ESSAY.
- Sources. A Handbook to Literature by William Harmon and C. Hugh Holman, (current edition), state adopted texts, and the reading list for the current year will be used as sources for the tests. The TAPPS office will publish the current reading list as soon as it is made available.
- Essays. Although the essay section will only be used if a tie exists, all contestants are required to write an essay. No points will be awarded for the essay question. The following are judging criteria for the essays:
- How well the contestant followed the instructions accompanying the questions;
- The excellence of the literary insights expressed;
- The effectiveness of the written expression; and
- The grammatical correctness of the writing.
- No Source Materials may be present in the testing room.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices besides permitted calculators and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Indicate your answers using capital letters on the appropriate blank provided on the answer sheet. Failure to do so will result in disqualification.
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. The contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- You have 90 minutes for this test.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- You will receive one point for each correct answer covering the Handbook for Literature, 2 points for questions application to literature and 3 points for questions covering the reading list selections. No points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions. The score from the objective portion will determine your score. If there is a tie, the essay for those contestants will be read and ranked. No points will be given for the essay.
- If you finish the test before the end of the allotted time, you may turn in your test, answer sheet and essay and quietly leave the room. No talking or distracting noises will be permitted.
- When the signal is given to stop, you must cease all writing.
- Start and Stop Signals. Exactly 90 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired.
- Scoring. Each contestant shall be awarded one point for each correct answer covering the Handbook for Literature, 2 points for questions application to literature and 3 points for questions covering the reading list selections. The essays will only be read if a tie exists. Each contestant is required to write a short essay. Failure to complete the essay will result in disqualification. No points will be given for the essay. One or three judges who are not coaches of the tied contestants shall rank the essay sections. The following are judging criteria for the essays:
- How well the contestant followed the instructions accompanying the questions;
- The excellence of the literary insights expressed;
- The effectiveness of the written expression; and
- The grammatical correctness of the writing.
- Ties.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
Section 215 – Math Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST.
- Test Questions. The 40-minute test will consist of 45 multiple choice questions designed to test knowledge and understanding in the areas of algebra I and II, and geometry.
- STUDENTS MAY NOT USE CALCULATORS.
- Only 9th and 10th grade students currently enrolled in algebra I, algebra II or geometry should be entered in the TAPPS math contest.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Indicate your answers using capital letters on the appropriate blank provided on the answer sheet. Failure to do so will result in disqualification.
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. Any contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- You will NOT be allowed to use a calculator during this test.
- You have 40 minutes for this test. If you are in the process of writing down an answer, you may finish; you may not do additional work on a test question.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- You will receive plus six points for each correct answer and two points shall be deducted for an incorrect answer. No points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions.
- If you finish the test before the allotted time, you may leave quietly. No distracting noises will be permitted. Turn in all your test materials as you leave.
- You may place as many notations as you desire anywhere on the test paper except on the answer sheet, which is reserved for answers only. You may use additional scratch paper provided by the contest director.
- Start and Stop Signals. Exactly 40 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test and answer sheet
- Scoring. Each contestant shall be awarded six points for each question answered correctly, no points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions, and two points shall be deducted for an incorrect answer.
- Ties.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Students may not be entered in TAPPS Math and Advanced Math.
Section 216 – Reserved for Future Use
Section 217 – Number Sense Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST. The 10-minute test will consist of 80 mental mathematics problems designed to test speed and accuracy in working problems of varying levels of difficulty. ALL PROBLEMS ARE TO BE SOLVED MENTALLY.
- USE OF CALCULATORS AND CALCULATIONS.
- No Calculators. Contestants will not be allowed the use of calculators.
- Paper and Pencil Calculations. ALL PROBLEMS ARE TO BE SOLVED MENTALLY. Make no calculations with paper and pencil. Only the results of calculations arrived at without the use of pencil and paper should be accepted. A contestant will be disqualified for violating this rule. A blue pen is mandatory for this contest
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. The contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- Non-erasable blue ball point pen must be used to take the number sense test. Write only the answer in the space provided at the end of each problem. No erasures, mark-overs, and/or mark-outs are permitted. These will be counted as incorrect answers.
- You have 10 minutes for this test.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- All problems through the last problem completed or attempted will be graded. A problem is considered attempted if any mark or erasure appears in the answer space for that problem. Scoring is plus five points for correct answers and minus four points for incorrect, skipped, changed, or illegible answers.
- If you finish the test before the end of the allotted time, you must remain in your seat and retain your paper until told to do otherwise. No talking or distracting noises will be permitted.
- If you are in the process of actually writing down an answer on the answer sheet when the signal to stop is given, immediately stop writing, even if the answer is incomplete.
- All problems are to be solved mentally. Make no calculations with paper and pencil. Do not attempt to solve the problem on paper, the desk, your hand, etc. You can be disqualified for violating this rule. All fractions must be reduced to the lowest terms. Decimal answers are permitted for those un-starred problems whose answers are exactly expressible as decimals. Starred problems on test sheet require approximate integral answers, i.e. they permit 5% error; un-starred problems require exact answers. Answers require only the writing of numerals. If a symbol is omitted from the printed test, the contestant need not include it in the answer. All dollars and cents problems must have complete answers. For example: twenty-three dollars must be written as $23.00. Sixteen cents would be written $.16 or 16¢, depending on the answer blank format. Answers should be written in the most efficient form possible. For example: if the answer is 16, 16.000 is not acceptable. Extraneous zeros are not to be used. For example: if .16 is the answer, 0.16 is not an acceptable answer. Answers should not be left in exponential form.
- You will not be allowed the use of calculators on this test.
- Start and Stop Signals. Exactly 10 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test and answer sheet.
- Scoring.
- Scoring problems. Those problems occurring after the last problem solved correctly or attempted are not considered skipped and hence no deduction for them is made. “Attempted problem” means having a mark in the answer blank. Only the answers to the problems should be written on the paper. No other writing is permitted. An answer once written must be allowed to stand. Answers may not be crossed out. Erasures, mark-overs, and mark-outs are not permitted. Should there be an erasure or a mark-out or any indication the answer was changed, that problem is to be counted incorrect. The contest director is empowered to determine if a number is legible.
- Fractions. All fractions in test papers must be reduced to the lowest terms. Decimal answers are permitted for those un-starred problems whose answers are exactly expressible as decimals. For example, 3/2, 1 ½, and 1.5 are all acceptable. Starred problems on test sheets require approximate integral answers, i.e., they permit five percent error: un-starred problems require exact answers.
- Symbols. Symbols such as % and $ are usually printed on the test. Therefore, answers require only the writing of numerals. If a symbol is omitted from the printed test, it is not the responsibility of the contestant to make sure the answer is complete. If not printed, the student need not include it in the answer.
- Dollars and Cents. In agreement with the philosophy that answers should be complete, all dollars and cents problems must have complete answers. That is, twenty-three dollars must be written as $23.00 (with $ and 00). Sixteen cents would be written $.16 or 16¢, depending on the answer blank format.
- Numerical answers. Numerical answers should be written so that the answers are complete as in the two examples above. However, the answer should be written in the most efficient form possible. For example, if the answer is 16, the written answer 16.000 is not acceptable for the purposes of the number sense competition. Extraneous zeros are not to be used. For example, if .16 is the answer, 0.16 is not an acceptable answer.
- Exponentials. An answer such as 3 x 103 should be expressed as 3000 and not left in exponential form.
- Ties. No ties are to be broken
Section 218 – Ready Writing Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST.
- Purpose. The purpose of this 90 minute contest is for the contestant to compose and write an original expository essay on a current topic during the allotted time. The expository essay should be interesting, organized and conform to the correct English writing style. Contestants are given a choice between two prompts, each an excerpt from literature, publications (past and present), or speeches. The entire essay must explicitly develop the chosen topic.
- THE COMPOSITION.
- Nature. The composition is to be expository. Expository writing explains, proves, or explores a topic in a balanced way, allowing the argument and the evidence given to be the deciding factor in the paper. Descriptive or narrative passages may be used to illustrate or reinforce an idea or point that is being explained, but must be clearly subordinate or incidental to the exposition. All writing should pertain to and develop the chosen prompt.
- Length. There is no minimum or maximum length. An excellent essay is noted for its well-developed ideas and use of evidence to support the main point(s) as related to the chosen prompt.
- Title. Each contestant shall write a title based on the subject statement he has chosen. The penalty for omitting the title will be disqualification of the paper.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- This contest will be conducted online approximately 6-8 weeks before the Academic State Meet. Additional instructions for accessing the Ready Writing contest will be posted on tapps.biz.
- Contestants must be directly supervised at all times by someone who is not a parent of a contestant or the school's ready writing coach.
- You have ninety (90) minutes for this contest. You are required to turn off any audible signals on any timing devices during the contest.
- The essay should be interesting, organized and conform to the correct English writing style. The composition is to be expository. Wordiness is to be avoided. There is no minimum or maximum length. The entire essay should explicitly develop the chosen prompt. Generic essays that could pertain to any topic are not allowed.
- During the writing period, no questions may be asked or answered. There will be no communication among the contestants, the contestants and their coaches and other individuals.
- You may use a print copy of a Thesaurus and a Dictionary during the contest. Resource materials MAY NOT be shared between contestants.
- Scoring. Three judges will score and rank each essay for preliminary round. Three different judges will score, rank, and give comments for the final judging round.
- Using the Rubric. The three judges will use the supplied rubric to evaluate each essay. Judges will complete a rubric for each essay. The rubric is for focusing the judges comments and assisting when ranking the students’ work.
- Scoring. After each judge has evaluated all essays, the contestant’s score for each of the judges is the total sum from the rubric to determine the individual's rank per judge. The sum of the 3 judges ranks will determine the overall rank with lowest sum of ranks determining 1st place.
- Ties
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- See the TAPPS website for instruction details for taking the test.
Section 219 – Science Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST.
- Purpose. The purpose of the Science Contest is to challenge high school students to do a wide range of reading in the areas of science, to gain an understanding of the significance of experiments rather than to recall obscure details, to be alert to new discoveries and information in the areas of science, to gain an understanding of the basic principles as well as knowledge of the history and philosophy of science, and to foster a sense of enthusiasm about science and how it affects our daily lives.
- Test Questions. The 90-minute test will consist of 60 objective-type questions, 20 from each of the three subject areas of biology, chemistry and physics, designed to test the student’s understanding of basic principles; the history and methods of science; recent developments in science; and ability to evaluate experimental results, rather than ability to memorize details. A periodic table and some useful mathematical relations are included at the front of the test.
- USE OF CALCULATORS.
- Students May Use Calculators. Contestants will be allowed to use any commercial silent hand-held calculator that does not require external power. Each student may bring one spare calculator into the contest room. Handheld computers are not allowed.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST. .
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed.
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices besides permitted calculators and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Indicate your answers using capital letters on the appropriate blank provided on the answer sheet. Failure to do so will result in disqualification.
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. Any contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- You will be allowed the use of calculators on this test.
- You have 90 minutes for this test. If you are in the process of writing down an answer, you may finish; you may not do additional work on a test question.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- You will receive plus six points for each correct answer and two points shall be deducted for an incorrect answer. No points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions.
- If you finish the test before the end of the allotted time, you may leave the room quietly. No talking or distracting noises will be permitted. Turn in all your test material as you leave.
- You may place as many notations as you desire anywhere on the test paper except on the answer sheet, which is reserved for answers only. You may use additional scratch paper provided by the contest director.
- Stop and Start Signals. Exactly 90 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test and answer sheet.
- Grading the Contest. Each contestant shall be awarded six points for each question answered correctly and two points shall be deducted for an incorrect answer. No points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions.
- The top Biology, Chemistry, and Physics scorers will be recognized in addition to the top 8 scoring students and will receive gold medals for this achievement. No additional points will be awarded to these students.
- Tie Breaker
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
Section 220 – Social Studies Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- Test Questions. The 90-minute test will consist of 45 objective questions and an essay. Each year the contest will have a theme that focuses on a different, specific facet of Social Studies (people, places, events, and concepts).
- SOURCES. The questions will come from the Social Studies Reading Selection List posted on the TAPPS website (www.tapps.biz).
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices besides permitted calculators and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Indicate your answers using capital letters on the appropriate blank provided on the answer sheet. Failure to do so will result in disqualification.
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. The contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- You have 90 minutes for this test.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- You will receive plus one point for each correct answer in Part I General Knowledge, two points for Part II Primary Reading, and 3 points for Part III Supporting Documents. The essay is required but will only be judged in the event of a tie. Failure to complete the essay will result in disqualification.
- If you are in the process of actually writing down an answer on the answer sheet when the signal to stop is given, you may finish writing that answer.
- If you finish the test before the end of the allotted time, you may leave the room quietly. No talking or distracting noises will be permitted. Turn in all your test materials as you leave.
- Start and Stop Signals. Exactly 90 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test and answer sheet. If contestants are in the process of writing down an answer, they may finish; they may not do additional work on a test question.
- Scoring. Will follow guidelines on test. Each contestant is required to write a short essay. No points will be given for the essay. Failure to answer the essay will result in disqualification.
- TIES.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information..
Section 221 – Spanish Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST. The 90-minute test will consist of 60 multiple choice questions and an essay. There are three (3) parts to the test that include: 1) listening 2) reading and answering questions 3) writing the essay.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices besides permitted calculators and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Indicate your answers using capital letters on the appropriate blank provided on the answer sheet. Failure to do so will result in disqualification.
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. Any contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- The audio portion of the test will be completed prior to the written portion.
- After the listening portion of the test is complete, you have 60 minutes for the reading and writing portion of the test. When time is called, if you are in the process of writing down an answer, you may finish; you may not do additional work on a test question.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- You will receive one point for each correct answer. There is no penalty for skipped or incorrect answers. The essay is required but will only be judged in the event of a tie. Failure to complete the essay will result in disqualification.
- If you finish the test before the end of the allotted time, you may leave the room quietly. No talking or distracting noises will be permitted. Turn in all test materials as you leave.
- Start and Stop Signals. Exactly 60 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test and answer sheet. If contestants are in the process of writing down an answer, they may finish; they may not do additional work on a test question.
- Grading the Contest. Each contestant shall be awarded one point for each question answered correctly.No points shall be deducted for an incorrect answer. No points will be given or subtracted for unanswered questions. Each contestant is required to write a short essay. No points will be given for the essay. Failure to answer the essay will result in disqualification.
- Ties.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
Section 222 – Spelling Contest
All rules in Section 209 apply to this contest.
- NATURE OF THE CONTEST.
- Test Questions. The 90-minute test will consist of three (3) parts. Part I consists of a written vocabulary and a proofreading section. A total of fifteen minutes shall be allotted. There are thirty (30) questions in Part I. Part II consists of pronounced words. Part III consists of pronounced words and is the tiebreaker. Part III will begin immediately after Part II. The words in Part II and III should be pronounced at a rate of approximately four words per minute and will include the definition. Only Parts I and II will be graded. In the event of a tie in Parts I and II, Part III of only those involved shall be graded and used to break the tie. A contestant is required to take all three parts.
- SOURCES.
- At least 80 percent of the test will come from ASW “Word Power”; however, up to 20 percent may be from other sources. Refer to the Academic page at tapps.biz for ordering information.
- CONDUCTING THE CONTEST.
- Reading the Contest Instructions. The contest director will read the following directions exactly as they are printed:
- Turn off your cell phone and any other electronic devices besides permitted calculators and place them on the edge of the table in front of you. You may not use your electronic device(s) in any manner during the contest. If your device(s) make any noise or if you use your device(s) in any manner, you will be disqualified.
- Print your name, school, and school classification in the directed place on your test and answer sheet. Failure to write your name and school may result in disqualification. (Allow time for this to be done).
- Indicate your answers using capital letters on the appropriate blank provided on the answer sheet. Failure to do so will result in disqualification.
- Keep your papers closed until told to do otherwise; this is particularly important while test papers are being distributed and before the signal to begin has been given.
- During the test, no questions may be asked or answered. Any contestant talking or making distracting noises may be disqualified.
- Leaving the room with any contest materials will result in disqualification.
- Transferring information concerning this test to other contestants or coaches is a violation of the Academic Meet Code and subject to penalties up to and including disqualification.
- You have 15 minutes to complete Part I. Part II will immediately follow and consist of pronounced words. Part III is the tiebreaker section and will immediately follow Part II. A contestant must take all three parts.
- No audible time warnings will be given once the contest begins. It is the responsibility of each contestant to monitor the time remaining in the contest with a device that does not connect to the internet or make audible sounds.
- Words may be written in blue or black ink, but no pencil. A contestant may print or write in cursive. Make sure all letters are legible. On Part I, use capital letters to indicate your answer.
- You will receive plus one point for each correct answer.
- If you are in the process of actually writing down an answer on the answer sheet for Part I when the signal to stop is given, you may finish writing that answer.
- Contractions and possessive forms may be written with all letters connected or with letters separated by the apostrophe. Either way is correct.
- A misspelling, the misuse of an apostrophe or hyphen, or a mistake in capitalization is considered an error.
- Stop and Start Signals. Exactly 15 minutes after the start signal was given, announce that time has expired and that contestants must turn in their test and answer sheet for Part I. If the contestants are in the process of writing down an answer, they may finish; they may not do additional work on a test question.
- Scoring. Each contestant shall be awarded one point for each question answered correctly.
- Legibility. Words must be spelled correctly and all letters must be legible. Printing the word is acceptable. Legibility, and not the handwriting style, is to be emphasized. To determine whether a given letter is legible, place a blank piece of paper to either side of it, thus separating it from its context, and then see whether the letter can be identified. Any letter, even though it may not be perfectly written, is considered correct if it can still be identified when separated from the remainder of the word. If two of the three graders rule a letter is legible, it should be considered correct.
- Errors. A misspelling, the misuse of an apostrophe or hyphen, or a mistake in capitalization is considered an error.
- Contractions and Possessive Forms. Contractions and possessive forms may be written with all letters connected or with letters separated by the apostrophe. Either way is correct.
- Misspelling on “Word Power” List. If any word is misspelled on the ASW “Word Power” list, that word is not to be considered in grading the tests. It will be omitted from the test.
- Ties.
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
Section 223 – Reserved
Section 224 – General Speech Information
Rules concerning Eligibility, Representation, Substitutes, and Alternates are the same as those for the written tests (Section 204)
All speaking events will utilize the following rules. Differences between types of speaking events will be listed under each individual event.
No Cell Phones or other electronic devices allowed in the Contest room.
NATURE OF SPEAKING EVENTS
- Purpose. The purpose of speaking events is to encourage contestants to understand, experience, and share their personal interpretation and/or thoughts via the selections presented.
- Selections. Selections must be from a printed, published source. No Internet sources are allowed except for research for Original Oratory, Persuasive Speaking, and Debate.
- Each TAPPS speaking event requires a different selection.
- No selection may be reused during a contestant’s four year high school career for TAPPS Academics/Speech competition.
- Failure to follow these guidelines will result in disqualification.
- Content Standards.
- In selecting material to be used in the contest, coaches and contestants must choose literature of high quality and literary merit. The selection should be in good taste. If in doubt, do not do it.
- Material
- should be high school level or above. Lower level pieces may be performed subject to part b. below.
- a degree of difficulty will be assigned by the judges to be used in overall ranking.
- Avoid literature that is in poor taste. Not all material by an author is appropriate for competition.
- TAPPS membership includes schools from across the state and with different standards for acceptable content and presentation. While selections may involve content or themes that reflect a fallen world, directors should consider if the selection glorifies those themes or employs them merely for shock value. TAPPS shall determine if the resolution reflects a redemptive process, one in which good triumphs over evil or one which brings social awareness to an issue. Finally, schools should consider if the integrity of the piece remains if permissible cuts or adaptations are made. TAPPS has determined certain subject matter, themes, content, or portrayal including but not limited to the following list, will not be acceptable for performance in TAPPS competition:
- Profanity or using the Lord’s name in vain (in an irreverent or disrespectful manner or as an expletive) even as euphemism is prohibited
- Abortion
- Adultery
- Homosexuality
- Incest
- Suicide
- Teen Pregnancy
- Selections must not offend the moral standards of the community, contain profanity or sexually explicit language or actions, use the Lord’s name in vain, nor contain subject matter or actions that are offensive.
- Coaches should revise or reject all selections that in any way fail to meet these qualifications.
- Contestants violating these standards face disqualification at the discretion of the Meet Director.
- Questions regarding literary merit/content should be directed to the TAPPS Office in advance of the meet.
- Review At the State Meet, if there is a question concerning a selection by the judge or judges in the first round of competition for the event, the State Speech Director will appoint a committee of at least 3 State Speech Committee Members to discuss the contents/presentation of the selection. After discussion, the State Speech Coordinator will make the final decision if a contestant is to be disqualified due to content/presentation. The State Speech Coordinator will notify the State Meet Director of any disqualification.
- Protest: Protest: The contest judge(s) shall be responsible for the adherence to standards and guidelines. No protest of a selection or performance shall be allowed regarding the performance by any other persons.
- Documentation. Proof that the material is printed and published must be made available to the Meet Director on the appropriate form for all contestants prior to competition for Solo, Duet, Prose and Poetry. Violation of this rule will result in disqualification.
- Documentation must include
- at least two of the following: title page, table of contents, index
- A full cutting of the manuscript to be performed must be submitted. The committee needs to see the original manuscript with the cuttings marked. Providing the performance manuscript is not necessary.
- Internet publications are not acceptable. However, documentation from the internet which could include Library of Congress information or the books ISBN are acceptable forms of documentation- provided the piece is found in the book. If an on-line data service is used for persuasive speaking research, the URL information must be included on the printed page.
- Documentation must be available at time of contest.
- The original source must be available at the state meet and shall be provided to the meet director/speech coordinator upon request.
- Introduction. A memorized introduction is required in Prose, Poetry, Solo, and Duet Acting. See event information for Persuasive Speaking and Original Oratory.
- The contestant must include the title and author of the material being presented in addition to appropriate commentary about the selection.
- The introduction should not include the name of the contestant nor his school but rather should prepare the audience to listen to the selection by use of commentary which applies to the presentation.
- While the introduction should reflect spontaneity, it should be prepared ahead of time.
- An embedded introduction is allowed but must be completed within the first 2 minutes of the presentation. (Embedded: A portion of the selection is presented prior to the memorized introduction. After the introduction is completed, the selection continues.)
- If there is no introduction or it is not memorized, the contestant will be disqualified.
- Manuscript. Note specific rules for each speaking event.
- Movement. Note specific rules for each speaking event.
- Presentation. A contestant’s performance must follow these rules:
- No props or costumes are allowed. In Solo Acting one chair may be used and in Duet Acting two chairs may be used. Do not wear clothing suggestive of the role being portrayed.
- No talking or disruptive noises may be made during another contestant’s performance.
- During the contest, no coaching or prompting will be permitted. Coaching includes verbal or body communication. The penalty is disqualification.
- Judges are not allowed to ask for a copy of any selection.
- The judge’s opinion regarding style and delivery is final. Prepare your students for the fact that perceptions of style and delivery will vary from judge to judge.
- Time Signals. Time cards will be held up to indicate time remaining for all events. Time cards will count down. Towards the end of the maximum, the contestant will be shown a 1 minute card, a :30 card and when the maximum time is reached a “Stop” card will be shown. There will be no card shown when the end of the grace period is reached. See times for each event under the specifications for that event.
- Disqualification. A serious penalty, disqualification will occur for the following:
- Inappropriate subject matter (see Content Standards)
- Inaccurate time (either over the grace period of 10 seconds allowed in all speaking events or under the minimum time required in all speaking events (except Persuasive) which includes a 10-second grace period).
- Re-use of material. A selection may be used only once throughout the contestant’s four year high school career in an Academic/Speech event.
- No introduction or if the introduction is not memorized or does not include required content.
- No documentation or inappropriate documentation, including failure to provide original source.
- Being absent at time of roll call at the discretion of the Meet Director. (Sect. 209, A, 2)
- Coaching a student during his performance will result in the student’s disqualification.
- Any use of items deemed a prop or costume.
- See individual events for event specific disqualification rules.
- Any rule not addressed here will result in a drop of rank.
CONTEST PERSONNEL
- Judges. Judges should be competent and have training in the field of speech.
- The Meet Director shall appoint an odd number of judges or one critic judge.
- Coaches and/or sponsors should not be used to judge rounds containing students from their schools.
- All Judges should view the TAPPS Training Module prior to the event.
- At the State Meet, an attempt is made to use three judges in the preliminary, semi, and final rounds whenever possible. If this is not possible, one critic judge will be used.
- Duties of the Judge. See Conducting the Contest Part E.
- Timekeepers. A timekeeper will be provided. (See Conducting the Contest Section E as well as specific times for each event)
- The timekeeper will use a stopwatch to time each contestant and will display time cards to indicate time remaining.
- The length of time used by each contestant must be recorded on the contestant’s ballot by the judge(s) and recorded on the Master Ballot.
- Doorkeepers. If noise in the hall presents a problem for the contestants, the Meet Director shall assign an individual to maintain order/quiet in the halls.
CONDUCTING THE CONTEST
- Sections. If there are more than ten (10) contestants, preliminary rounds should be held. Finals for each event will be held in a single room after all preliminary results have been determined.
- Speaking Order. The Meet Director will determine and post the speaking order in a prominent place for all contestants to view.
- Assembly and Roll Call. At the designated contest time, roll is taken. Substitutions may be made at this time with certified alternates. Once roll is completed, no late contestants will be allowed to enter the contest room without prior approval.
- Audience. Audiences will not be permitted.
- Contestants must remain in the room following roll call until all contestants have performed. This rule does not apply to Persuasive Speakers.
- No talking or disruptive noises may be made during another contestant’s performance. Clapping when the performer has finished is encouraged.
- No filming, recording or taping of presentations will be allowed.
- Timing. When the contestant begins to talk, timing begins. The timekeeper will use cards to display remaining time. If a contestant exceeds the maximum time limit, he will be disqualified. If a piece is under the minimum time, then that piece will be disqualified. (See rules for individual time requirements under each event).
- Judges. Judging will be by an odd number of judges or one critic judge.
- Responsibilities of the judges include
- evaluate the performance
- write on ballot constructive suggestions/criticisms to individuals; praise where praise is due
- denote inappropriate selections and/or presentations on the ballot
- report to the tabulation room before the beginning of the contest to pick up ballots and contestant roster plus substitutions
- record time of each contestant on ballot and Master Ballot at the close of the round, rank all speakers from first (best) to last without discussing with the other judges.
- when ranking speakers, note any potential problems or potential disqualifications on the ballot. The Speech Director must officially make this decision.
- no ties are allowed
- use only the ballots provided for each event
- Ranking and Ties. Judges will rank contestants from first to last. In the case of panel judging, the following criteria, in the following order, shall be used to determine all ranks: (1) lowest sum of total ranks; (2) judges’ preference. The contestant with the lowest sum of ranks shall be awarded first place. If at this point two or more contestants tie with the same low sum of total ranks, the tie shall be broken by the use of judges’ preference. The judges’ preference is written, not oral. (See procedure H in this section of the manual). If a tie existed for first place, after breaking the tie by the above methods, the person who was tied with the first-place winner is automatically given second place. Once a place has been determined, the Speech Coordinator shall revert back to the first criteria (lowest sum) to determine the next rank, unless there is another tie, whereupon all contestants who tied shall be awarded a place before going on to another contestant or place.
If contestants are still tied, see the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Judges’ Preference. Following is an example: Suppose contestants A and B had the same total number of points, hence neither could be ranked separately except through use of judges’ preference. Remember, use of judges’ preference is written, not oral.
Contestant | Judge #1 Ranking | Judge #2 Ranking | Judge #3 Ranking | Total Points | Preference of Judges | Final Rank |
A | 2(+) | 5(-) | 3(+) | =10 | +-+ | 2nd |
B | 4(-) | 2(+) | 4(-) | +10 | -+- | 3rd |
Explanation: Contestant A is ranked higher (or receives higher preference) than Contestant B by two of the three judges (#1 and #3) and thus is awarded the higher place. Contestant B shall be awarded the lower place before any other contestants or places are considered.
- Protests. If a coach wants to lodge a protest they must put their complaint in writing and submit $20 in cash to the Meet Director to have their protest heard.
Section 225 – Individual Speech Contests
INDIVIDUAL SPEAKING EVENTS. Following are the rules specific to each individual event. Be certain you have read and understood all the rules/suggestions listed under the general topic of Speaking Events.
- DUET ACTING
- Time:
- 12 minute maximum
- 8 minute minimum
- 10 second grace period.
- Purpose: Interpret cuttings from dramatic/humorous works. Introduction and all material must be memorized.
- Notes, manuscripts, props, or costumes are not permitted. The performer’s hair, glasses, clothing, etc. must remain the same during the performance as it was in the introduction. The performer may pantomime the removal of glasses, letting hair down, etc., but must not actually do so. No permanent adjustment can be made to the appearance of the contestant (ie – removal/addition of glasses, clothes or shoes, taking hair down or permanently putting in a ponytail, etc.) but any use of the body is appropriate to communicate the message of the scene. Failure to comply will result in a disqualification.
- Exception:
- Two chairs may be used in duet acting to create atmosphere and environment. Chairs will be supplied. All contestants must use the same chairs provided for them.
- Contestants interpret material through characterization, blocking, and interaction with your scene partner. This is part of acting so stage blocking and movement are expected.
- Selections: Selections must be cuttings from published, printed novels, short stories, plays or poetry. Recorded material that is not printed and published is prohibited. Adaptations may be for the purpose of continuity only. Material may be serious or humorous in nature. A selection must be from a single source. No Internet sources are allowed. The dialogue portion of a musical may be used. No more than 2 minutes of a song may be sung.
- Introduction: A memorized introduction should set the scene and mood and include the title and author. Time for the introduction is included in the overall time limit.
- Accept suggestions and criticism with good grace.
- ORIGINAL ORATORY.
- Time:
- 10 minute maximum
- 6 minute minimum
- 10 second grace period.
- Purpose: Contestant should present an oration which they have composed personally and which is memorized. No props or visual aids are permitted.
- Contents:
- Any appropriate subject may be used.
- Speech should be persuasive in nature
- Not more than 150 words of the oration may be direct quotation from any other speech or writing. Such quotations must be identified. Extensive paraphrasing from other sources is prohibited.
- An Original Oratory is not poetry, nor song.
- Documentation: Quotations from any other speech or writing must be identified in a typewritten copy of the oration supplied to the meet director. A copy of Statement of Originality should be attached to the speech.
- Movement: No restrictions
- No podium or similar device allowed.
- Accept suggestions and criticism with good grace.
- PERSUASIVE SPEAKING.
- Time:
- 7 minute maximum;
- no minimum.
- 10 second grace period.
- Purpose: To train contestants to analyze a topic about a current issue, choose a point of view, and develop an original synthesis of current fact and opinion on the topic. The contestant then organizes and delivers an extemporaneous speech that seeks to persuade the listeners to agree with his viewpoint.
- Materials: One 3 x 5 card may be used by the contestant when delivering his speech. No limit is placed on the information on that one card. Other than that one card and the topic slip, no other materials may be taken out of the preparation room.
- Sources. Contestants should prepare for this contest by reading a daily newspaper and any of the many news magazines, as well as listening to the radio and television news broadcasts.
- References. To prepare their speeches, contestants may use magazines, newspapers and other printed source materials and legal copies made by a copier as long as the material cannot be considered an outline of a speech. Published material from computer on-line data services may be used. The source of the published material should be included. Laptop computers may be brought into the preparation room but NO ACCESS TO THE INTERNET will be granted. Students should have articles already downloaded to use with the proper URL address on the document. Typed mimeographed or hand-written materials may not be brought into the preparation room except as a card index file prepared by the contestant solely to find references to specific topics.
- Procedure. The following process will be used to conduct this contest.
- Drawing. The Speech Director will separate the topics into individual slips, leaving one topic on each slip. These slips will be placed in a receptacle and one contestant will be required to draw out five slips. Each contestants must draw all five (5) slips before looking at any slip. He may then take as his topic any one of those slips. After he has made his selection and the Speech Director has recorded the topic selected, the remaining four slips will be returned to the receptacle. The slips should be mixed before the next contestant is allowed to draw. Contestants draw topics at approximately seven-minute intervals. After drawing topics, contestants should not discuss them with others. Coaches/spectators are not allowed in the preparation room.
- Preparation Time. Preparation time begins for each contestant when the 5th slip has been drawn. A contestant is allowed thirty (30) minutes for preparation. He is not allowed to discuss his topic with others. A monitor on duty will make certain the contestants work quietly in preparing their speeches. At the end of 30 minutes of preparation, the contestant will be sent to the speaking room to deliver his speech.
- Movement: No restrictions
- Accept suggestions and criticism with good grace.
- POETRY INTERPRETATION.
- Time:
- 7 minute maximum;
- 3 minute minimum.
- 10 second grace period.
- Manuscript: Student should read selection(s) from a folder or notebook. Students shall not read from books or magazines. While students have usually practiced their selections often enough to have them memorized, they must visually refer to the manuscript as though it is being read.
- Introduction: Must be memorized and delivered with notebook closed; it must contain the name and author of each selection, and include commentary which prepares audience for the performance. Embedded introductions are allowed.
- Selection: Cutting must be from a single poem or medley of poems from the same source (book) but not necessarily the same poet. Selections must be published. Selections from plays, screen plays, or song lyrics shall not be used in this category.
- Movement: Spontaneous changes in posture and gesture are permissible, however the speaker must be careful to draw the line between “acting” and “moving.” Use of movement should
- Be appropriate to the demands of the selection;
- Be a natural outgrowth from the literature being read;
- Not call attention to itself; and
- Be limited to one (1) step in any direction and returning to the base position before any other movement is begun. The idea is the same as a basketball pivot – the contestant can have one foot planted while the other can move but the foot must return to the base position before picking up the other foot.
- No props or costumes may be used. Dress appropriately for a public presentation.
- No podium or similar device allowed.
- Accept suggestion and criticism with good grace.
- PROSE INTERPRETATION.
- Time:
- 7 minute maximum;
- 3 minute minimum
- 10 second grace period.
- Manuscript: Student should read selection from a folder or notebook. Students shall not read from books or magazines. While students have usually practiced their selections often enough to have them memorized, they must visually refer to the manuscript as though it is being read.
- Introduction: Must be memorized and delivered with notebook closed; it must contain the name and author of each selection, and include commentary which prepares audience for the performance. Embedded introductions are allowed.
- Selection: Cutting must be from a single source (book). Selections must be published in hard copy (no Internet sources). Documentation must be provided in advance. Selections from plays, screen plays, or song lyrics shall not be used in this category.
- Movement: Spontaneous changes in posture and gesture are permissible, however the speaker must be careful to draw the line between “acting” and “moving.” Use of movement should
- Be appropriate to the demands of the selection;
- Be a natural outgrowth from the literature being read;
- Not call attention to itself; and
- Be limited to one (1) step in any direction and returning to the base position before any other movement is begun. The idea is the same as a basketball pivot – the contestant can have one foot planted while the other can move but the foot must return to the base position before picking up the other foot.
- No props or costumes may be used. Dress appropriately for a public presentation.
- No podium or similar device allowed.
- Accept suggestion and criticism with good grace.
- SOLO ACTING.
- Time:
- 10 minute maximum.
- 6-minute minimum
- 10 second grace period.
- Purpose: Interpret cuttings from dramatic/humorous works. Contestants evaluate literary material through research and study and translate their interpretations into physical performances.
- Notes, manuscripts, props, or costumes are not permitted. The performer’s hair, glasses, clothing, etc. must remain the same during the performance as it was in the introduction. The performer may pantomime the removal of glasses, letting hair down, etc. but must not actually do so. No permanent adjustment can be made to the appearance of the contestant (ie – removal/addition of glasses, clothes or shoes, taking hair down or permanently putting in a ponytail, etc.) buy any use of the body is appropriate to communicate the message of the scene.
- Exception:
- One chair may be used in solo acting to create atmosphere and environment. Chairs will be supplied. All contestants must use the same chairs provided for them.
- Contestants interpret material through characterization and blocking. This is part of acting so stage blocking and movement are expected.
- Selections: Selections for Solo Acting may be cuttings from published, printed novels, short stories, plays or poetry. Recorded material that is not printed and published is prohibited. Adaptations may be for the purpose of continuity only. Monologues are acceptable. Material may be humorous or serious in nature. A selection must be from a single source. No Internet sources are allowed. The dialogue portion of a musical may be used. No more than 2 minutes of a song may be sung.
- A memorized introduction should set the scene and mood and include the title and author. Time for the introduction is included in the overall time limit.
- Accept suggestions and criticism with good grace.
(Sections 226-227 reserved for expansion.)
Section 226 – Reserved for Future Use
Section 227 – Lincoln Douglas Debate
- ELIGIBILITY
- Each member school may enter three students in Lincoln-Douglas Debate
- Member schools shall declare participation in Lincoln-Douglas Debate on the annual TAPPS contract
- ORGANIZATION
- The Lincoln-Douglas Debate shall be organized by divisions.
- Division I 6A
- Division II 5A
- Division III 4A
- Division IV 1A-3A
- Divisions may be combined or separated based on actual registered entries.
- The points shall be added to team totals at the State Meets.
- PURPOSE. Lincoln-Douglas Debate investigates the truth of a resolution of value. Lincoln-Douglas debate provides training for development of skills in argumentation, persuasion, research and audience analysis. Through this contest, students are encouraged to develop a direct and communicative style of oral delivery.
- DEBATE OF VALUE. Lincoln-Douglas Debate centers around the resolution’s support or lack of support for something that is valued. Values typically offered are abstract concepts: freedom, justice, a good quality of life, etc. Debaters should provide a criterion by which the value is achieved or measured. For example, justice may be upheld by a due process of law or a healthy economy is necessary for a good quality of life.
- RESOLUTION. The resolution to be used for regional meets and the state meet will be determined by the state debate committee or chair and will be communicated to all schools through the TAPPS website in a timely fashion.
- JUDGES. The winner of a debate is determined by a third individual or panel of individuals. In the event of a panel, each judge should come to his/her own conclusion without conferring with others. Judges should be guided by the following principles:
- Judges should seek to evaluate which debater was more persuasive in presenting his/her side.
- Judges should set aside their own personal beliefs about the resolution.
- Judges should only consider those arguments made within the context of the debate. Anything said by either debater after a speech time limit or after the conclusion of the debate should not be considered in the decision.
- Judges should refrain from providing oral critiques of the arguments made by debaters either during or after the debate. At the conclusion of the debate, a judge may offer some encouragement or comments regarding a debater’s presentation or speaking style.
- Judges should not interrupt debaters during speeches and should not present their own questions to debaters.
- Judges’ decisions with respect to winners and losers are final. A meet director may ask a judge to verify a winner or loser.
- Judges should not disclose the winner orally to the debaters at the conclusion of the round. Rather, the judge should return a ballot with
- a clear winner marked,
- a reason for decision,
- speaker points.
- STRUCTURE
- Sides.Each side of the debate is represented by one debater.
- The Affirmative seeks to prove that the resolution is true.
- The Negative seeks to disprove the resolution.
- The side a debater is to defend is determined before the round, either in a posting or by a coin toss as determined by the meet host.
- Burdens
- Burden of Proof: Each debater has the equal burden to prove the validity of his/her side of the resolution as a general principle.
- Burden of Refutation (or Clash): Each debater has an equal burden to refute the arguments made by his/her opponent
- Burden to Address the Resolution: Each debater should focus his/her arguments on the central questions of the resolution.
- Speeches. The debate consists of a series of speeches and cross-examination (question and answer) periods. The speech time limits are as follows:
- Affirmative constructive speech: 6 minutes
- Negative’s cross examination of the Affirmative: 3 minutes
- Negative constructive speech and refutation of Affirmative: 7 minutes
- Affirmative’s cross examination of the Negative: 3 minutes
- Affirmative rebuttal: 4 minutes
- Negative rebuttal: 6 minutes
- Affirmative rebuttal: 3 minutes
- Preparation Time: Each side also has four minutes “prep” time that may be used during the round.
- Going past time limits may count against a debater at the discretion of the judge.
- Excessive abuse of the time allotments may result in disqualification at the discretion of the contest director.
- DELIVERY. Communication with the audience is to be considered a high priority for TAPPS debaters. Oral delivery in Lincoln-Douglas debate is to be communicative and persuasive.
- EVIDENCE.
- Supporting evidence adds to the persuasiveness of the reasoning and argumentation of the debate. Whenever a debater quotes at any length the words of another, the fact the evidence is quoted material should be plainly stated.
- Availability of Materials. Speakers may use notes if they wish.
- Available in Writing on Demand. All participants submitting evidence in competition shall do so orally and possess and present upon demand of debater such evidence in published form. The evidence shall display full bibliographic source citation, even if the full citation is not orally delivered. Full citation should include the following elements: author’s name, author’s qualifications, complete source information, complete date and page number. Citations of online publications or from online data bases also require the publication medium (online), the Internet URL, or the name of the computer service, and the date of access. Failure to meet this requirement can, at the discretion of the judge and contest director, result in:
- the evidence not being counted in the round, or
- the evidence not being given as much weight in the decision of the round, or
- loss of round.
- A debater found to be falsifying evidence may be disqualified at the discretion of the contest director.
- STATE CONTEST
- Entries
- Debaters must be eligible under the guidelines established by TAPPS.
- Organization
- Schools are required to provide judges for the state meet.
- A school with one or two qualifying debaters must provide one judge.
- A school with three debaters must provide two judges.
- Schools that do not meet their judge quota must pay $150 per uncovered judge.
- Conducting the contest.
- The state meet shall consist of three or four preliminary rounds. Debaters should be paired by the tournament director, who should try to prevent, where possible, debaters from the same school or region from meeting except in power-matched preliminary rounds or elimination rounds.
- The tournament will have elimination rounds based on the following formulae:
- For fewer than 12 debaters, four advance to semifinals.
- For 12 to 24 debaters, eight advance to quarterfinals.
- For 25 to 48 debaters, sixteen advance to octofinals.
- For more than 48 debaters, the tournament will break 32 to double octofinals.
- Breaks are determined by the following:
- win/loss record
- head to head (if applicable and if only two debaters have the same record)
- number of opponents’ wins
- speaker points
- tie-breaking debate
- Panels of at least three judges are to be used for semi-final and final rounds.
- The elimination brackets will be as follows: 1 v. 8, 2 v. 7, 3 v. 6, 4 v. 5.
- Brackets may be broken to prevent two debaters from the same school debating each other. In breaking the brackets, the tournament director should seek to abide by the elimination bracket system as closely as possible (1 v. 7, 2 v. 8, for example).
- AUDIENCES and SCOUTING
- State Competition
- No Audiences are allowed for any preliminary rounds.
- Audience is permitted if space allows for quarter-finals, semi-finals, and final rounds.
- Audiences should refrain from interfering in any way with the debate including, but not limited to,
- making comments or noises distracting to the debaters,
- prompting debaters,
- making visual signs at the debaters,
- applauding, except at the conclusion of the round.
- Audience members should not take notes.
- Debaters competing in the tournament should not watch other rounds until they have been eliminated from competition.
- AWARDS
- State
- Points from the individual competitor shall be incorporated towards the overall Speech and Academic Points for their classification
- School Awards shall be made for Division Placement in LD Debate
- First through third place shall be recognized
- CONTENT STANDARD
- Debaters should conduct themselves in a manner conducive to a professional, respectful debate.
- Debaters should restrict their speeches to disagreements about arguments and points of contention regarding the resolution.
- Debaters should refrain from ad hominem attacks against opponents and should refrain from hostile language and behavior against opponents.
- Debaters must not offend the moral standards of the community, use profanity or sexually explicit language or actions, use the Lord’s name in vain, nor utilize subject matter or actions that are offensive.
- Penalty for violations of the Content Standard.
- A judge may penalize a student found to be in violation of the content standard by reducing points awarded for “speaker points.”
- A judge may also penalize a student found to be in violation of the content standard by giving the student a loss in the round.
- The contest director may disqualify a student who is found to be in repeated violation of the content standard. Such action should only occur after consulting judges who judged rounds with the student and after consulting with the debater’s coach.
Art Plan
Section 229 – General Information
ENTRIES
- Refer to Section 230 for specific Categories and detailed descriptions
- Refer to Section 231 for specific information about the TAPPS State Art Competition
- Refer to TAPPS.biz art page for all current news briefs on the Art Competition.
- GENERAL INFORMATION
- The competition is divided into six classifications.
- ART TEACHER and/or SCHOOL REPRESENTATIVE and/or SCHOOL RESPONSIBILITIES:
- It is the responsibility of the art teacher (s), school representative (s), and school to be aware of all due dates, and adhere to them; and to understand and apply the guidelines and rules found within the art manual.
- Missed deadlines can result in double fees, sanctions, and a school not being able to compete.
- The art teacher and or a representative of the school must accompany students and the artwork to the competition. He/she will be responsible for registration, bringing the school notebook, placing the labels on the artwork, placing the artwork in the venue, picking up artwork at the end of the day, and chaperoning students.
- Responsibility to familiarize and knowledge of TAPPS art rules and guidelines.
- It’s the Teacher and or school representative responsibility to complete TEaMs compliance.
- Completing the Student eligibility form and submitting prior to competition.
- In addition to the eligibility requirements for contests in Article V of The Constitution, only students in grades 9-12 shall be permitted to enter the contests.
- Students must be listed on the eligibility form prior to the competition.
- Entry information
- NO group projects with the exception of Short Film.
- All artwork must have been done within the last two school years with the exception of Senior Portfolio.
- Any one student may not enter more than 2 pieces in any one category 1-14 .
- Schools will have the opportunity to enter a
- maximum of 3 entries per category 1-14.
- unlimited Art History (cat. 17) students (test will be offered once, and all schools will need to enter their students into TAPPS database on or before the selected school test date. All students must test at the same selected time)
- unlimited Senior Portfolio (cat. 15) submissions. In order for seniors to compete in this category, schools must have their entry into the TAPPS database no later than the date posted on the TAPPS website.
- a maximum of Three (3) On-Site Drawing (cat. 16) entries
- a maximum of Three (3) Seek and Sketch Black/White (cat. 18) entries
- a maximum of Three (3) Seek and Sketch Color (cat. 19) entries
- a maximum of Nine (9) Short Films (cat. 20) (3 per subcategory).
- No entry can be re-entered into the State Competition after placing 1st through 8th in any previous year, in any category, except for Senior Portfolios (previous works that have placed may be entered in the set of 6 total works).
- Students may sign their work.
- There are size limitations on work being entered in the competition. Please review Section 230 for each category description for further information on specific size limits by category.
- Artwork must be set flat on the tables ready for judging. ONLY categories 10 (Sculpture), 12 (Fashion, etc), and 14 (pottery) will be allowed to be presented vertically. No easels or frames can be used.
- No batteries, electricity, running water or other outside influences are to be functioning while at the competition in any work of art.
- All entries are to be input into TAPPS database
- Before schools can enter student entries they must take and pass the TEaMsTest and submit their Student Eligibility form.
- GUIDELINES FOR ALL 2D WORK-
- Must be matted or mounted, except for work done on canvas/panel. Maximum mat/mount size may not exceed 2" in any direction, but may be flush with the work.
- Black or white mats/mounts only.
- Single mats only – no multiple, layered mats allowed.
- GUIDELINES FOR ALL 3D WORK-
- Must have a black/white mat no larger than 3″x 4″ next to the work for the label.
- Once a school receives their official TAPPS database labels at registration, they are to be put onto the matboard and then placed next to the work of art. Categories possibly affected are 5 (Painting), 10 (Sculpture), 11 (Relief), 12 (Fashion), 13 (Applied Design), 14 (Pottery).
- SOURCE MATERIAL
- ALL WORK MUST BE ENTIRELY CONCEPTUALIZED, DEVELOPED, AND CREATED BY THE STUDENT.
- For the purpose of TAPPS Art Competition, direct reproduction of another artist’s work or images off the internet (non-public domain and public domain) is prohibited.
- Copying a published photograph, painting, or drawing is ILLEGAL, not just undesirable, and the work will be disqualified from competition.
- Trademarked or copyrighted source material is prohibited, including but not limited to: video game or comic book characters, T.V. or film sources/personalities/concepts, entertainment, etc.
- All students are to use personal photographs and imagination in place of other people's work such as photos, magazines, books, and the internet, but are allowed use of public domain material in Category 3 (Communication Design) ONLY.
- Student-taken images must have a copy of the photo/photos on the back of the piece.
- DOCUMENTATION:
- Schools will assemble a notebook with the following included in it:
- Teacher or Representative contact information for the duration of the Competition
- Inventory Forms
- Fee Form
- Fee Check
- This notebook will stay in the facility for the duration of the competition.
- Schools will have all artwork verified at registration and approved to be placed in the facility.
- Schools will be provided with all official TAPPS database labels at registration.
- Once registration is complete, schools will be able to place their work in the facility.
- Schools may be allowed to provide proper documentation until check-in is complete. Proper documentation includes:
- Student taken source photos for drawings
- Original photos for photography categories
- Process photos or process screenshots
- Programs used for Computer Generated art
- TAPPS artwork may not include:
- NUDITY
- NUDITY is not permitted in TAPPS artwork.
- The human body will be clothed with no exposure or implied exposure of skin from the armpit to 3 inches above the knees.
- The only exception for a study of the human form with less restriction will be the portrayal of Jesus during the scourging, hanging on the cross, or burial – each with the appropriate garb.
- profane references to anything,
- obscene language
- extreme violence
- self mutilation
- any content that offends the moral standards of the community, fellow peers, and the TAPPS Board of Directors and Officers.
- Any attempt to override the restrictions will cause the artwork to be disqualified.
- TAPPS database INFORMATION
- The TAPPS State Art Competition will close for all adds, deletes and changes as shown on the TAPPS calendar.
- Once the competition has closed for all changes, adds, and deletes, schools will be able to make changes to their entries on TAPPS database.
- Late entries are subject to double fees, school sanctions, and the possibility of not competing.
- Student substitutions ONLY (no additions) for categories 13, 15, 16 can be made until the date posted on the TAPPS website. TAPPS database results during the competition will be posted as soon as they are verified.
Section 230 – Category Descriptions
CATEGORY 1 : DRAWING – BLACK AND WHITE
- Drawing must be rendered in any single or mixed black and white media that is dry.
- Drawings must be applied to a single color background, on a single flat paper surface (no pre-printed surfaces).
- Suggested mediums: charcoal, black ballpoint pen, calligraphy pens, sharpie, pastels including conte (black and white), black and white scratchboard, graphite
- Must be a:
- single image
- single mat opening
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 18”x 24”.
- Maximum mat size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white.
- Include student taken source photo on the back of artwork if not drawn from imagination or in person observation.
CATEGORY 2 : DRAWING – COLOR
- Drawings rendered in any single or mixed color media that is dry.
- Drawings must be applied to a single color background, on a single flat paper surface (no pre-printed surfaces).
- Suggested mediums: markers, colored pencils, color ballpoint pen, crayon, multi colored scratchboard, colored pastels including colored conte.
- Must be a:
- single image
- single mat opening
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 18”x 24”.
- Maximum mat size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white.
- Include student taken source photo on back of artwork if not drawn from imagination or in person observation.
CATEGORY 3 : COMMUNICATION DESIGN – to include all the below types:
- Graphic Design – art that pertains to arranging printed words and images including original signs, symbols, logos, calligraphy, magazine and CD covers, business cards, stationery, posters, brochures, book jacket covers, labels, greeting cards, restaurant menus, calendars and packaging/marketing.
- Illustration Design – art that enhances and creates a visual representation of associated text and includes: advertisements, fashion (i.e. Andy Warhol’s shoe illustrations) magazines, newspapers, illuminated manuscripts, caricature drawings, textbooks and medical illustrations, and flyers.
- Sequential Design – combining words and images to form entertaining and effective narratives such as comic strips, manga, children’s book illustrations, and storyboards.
- Students may use the computer for public domain graphics, text, clipart and fonts (students are required to include internet documentation as evidence of permission from source(s).
- Any photos used/scanned must be student-taken only. All original student photos and or student-scanned original artwork must be included in notebook documentation AND on the back of the work – these should be 4″x6″ in size – copy paper is permitted.
- Copyrighted images are not allowed.
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 18”x 24”.
- Maximum mat size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white.
CATEGORY 4 : COMPUTER RENDERED ART –
- Students are to ONLY use the computer directly to create work in this category.
- Students will create all elements of the work of art directly on the computer, including ANY text that is added, using a mouse or pen tablet (such as Wacom) only. Text cannot be downloaded from the internet nor taken from any software program.
- Finished work will be in 2D form only.
- Students cannot scan drawings to work from. All work must originate from computer renderings/sketches by the student
- If student taken source information is used to create the work, it must be included on the back.
- Students must provide a minimum of (3) screenshots (whole computer screen, including computer program with work) to show early, mid- and late progress – attach to back of entry AND in notebook.
- Computer program used must be listed on the back of the work AND on Information Form.
- Work must be on a single flat paper surface.
- Maximum size of artwork not be exceed 18”x 24”.
- Maximum mat size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white.
CATEGORY 5 : PAINTING –
- Any single or mixed media that is wet including these suggested mediums: oil, acrylic, watercolor, ink wash, liquid ink, gouache, tempera, spray paint, and any other liquid substance.
- No dry media allowed (except initial layout of image).
- Must be:
- a single image
- single mat opening
- on a single flat surface (such as canvas, canvas board, watercolor paper, panel, etc.)
- dry on the day of the competition
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 24”x 36”
- Maximum mat size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white. Canvas, canvas boards and panel do not need to be matted/mounted
- Include student taken source photo on back of artwork if not painted from imagination or in person observation.
CATEGORY 6 : PRINTMAKING -
- Art made by the process of printing on a flat surface. Includes any 2D printing technique applied to a 2D single, flat surface.
- Suggested works to include printing on a single surface such as paper, wood, metal, fabric, etc.: monotype, collograph, woodcut/linocut, intaglio, lithography, etching, silkscreen
- Media to be applied by printmaking process(es) only.
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 18”x 24”
- Maximum mat size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white.
CATEGORY 7 : 2D MIXED MEDIA -
- 2D Mixed media is any artwork that has been created from more than one media
- Suggested works to include: collage, assemblage, cut paper, batik, layered works, fiber-based/handmade paper art, additive and subtractive, printmaking with media added by hand, or any combination of media
- Media can be wet and/or dry.
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 36”x 48” and (1”) from starting surface
- Maximum mat size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white.
CATEGORY 8 : PHOTOGRAPHY – Black and White
- This category includes only original black and white photos taken by the student that are:
- unaltered
- altered
- All submitted, final photos must be printed on photographic paper only and be a minimum size of 8”x 10” and a maximum size of 16”x 20”
- Original student photos may be cropped for better composition, or edited using a computer software program.
- The original photo(s) prior to editing or cropping should be printed on 4″x 6″ copy paper and attached to the back of entry.
- Maximum mat/mount size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white.
- White edges of photo act as a mat. You may trim them before matting, mat over them, print full page without the white edges, or flush mount photo with white edges.
- single mat opening
CATEGORY 9 : PHOTOGRAPHY – Color
- This category includes only original color photos taken by the student that are:
- unaltered
- altered
- All submitted, final photos must be printed on photographic paper only and be a minimum size of 8”x 10” and a maximum size of 16”x 20”
- Original student photos may be cropped for better composition, or edited using a computer software program.
- The original photo(s) prior to editing or cropping should be printed on 4″x 6″ copy paper and attached to the back of entry.
- Maximum mat/mount size not to exceed 2” from all sides and must be black or white
- White edges of photo act as a mat. You may trim them before matting, mat over them, print full page without the white edges, or flush mount photo with white edges.
- single mat opening
CATEGORY 10 : SCULPTURE –
- Artwork in the round – three-dimensional art objects created by molding, carving, casting, constructing, assembling or other shaping techniques. Work must stand or be able to hang freely.
- Student may use any material including, but not limited to: clay, cardboard, metal, acrylic, wood, glass, stone, marble, textiles, plastics, and found objects. Examples to include but not be limited to: Ceramic or glass sculptures, such as busts, figures or abstract forms, mixed media assemblages to be viewed as a sculpture (in the round)
- Altered books need to be viewed upright and from all sides.
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 36” wide, 36” deep and 50” tall (including any stand use for hanging).
- All clay must be fired to bisque
CATEGORY 11 : RELIEF -
- Artwork is intended to represent high relief, mid-relief, low-relief , and sunk relief, which should clearly demonstrate work is above or below the surface. This means sculpted material has been raised above the background plane.
- Artwork will be flat on back and meant to be viewed from one side only.
- Prefabricated shadow boxes are not allowed.
- Student may use any material including but not limited to: clay, paper, cardboard, metal, acrylic, wood, glass, stone, marble, textiles, plastics, and found objects.
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 36” wide, 36” tall/long and no more than 15” deep, a minimum of ½” below or above the surface plane is required.
- Works will be displayed flat on the table
CATEGORY 12 :FASHION DESIGN, TEXTILE ARTS and JEWELRY DESIGN – To include all the below types:
- Any item intended to be WORN and functional, including but not limited to: hats, dresses, handbags, scarves, jackets, etc.
- Fully realized objects – (including but not limited to): weavings, hand-made paper, quilts, fiber arts, crocheted pieces, embroidery works, handmade books, felting, rug making, fabric art, etc… Note: while the material the student might be working with may be purchased, whatever they do to the material (i.e. fabric, thread, paper, buttons, etc.) must be done by hand, or hand-run machine (i.e. sewing machine).
- Any jewelry in any medium including, but not limited to: – metal, semi-precious stones, glass, clay, wire, paper, etc. Students can enter a necklace and earrings as a set –to count as one entry.
- Prefabricated patterns, packages, kits or molds are not allowed. For example, students may not buy a dress pattern, jewelry-making kit, pre-made wax designs for casting or 3D printed piece to use for their work. Student must: design, invent, fabricate, build, construct and create all aspects of their work.
- Students are required to include documentation of creative process with a minimum of 3 images.
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 36” wide, by 36” deep by 78” tall (including mannequin).
- 3D Printing is NOT allowed
CATEGORY 13 : APPLIED/INDUSTRIAL DESIGN – To include all the below types:
- Original student design of any architectural structure, potentially functional/functional and decorative item for household use, furniture, etc…
- Student must: design, fabricate, build, invent, construct and create all aspects of their work.
- Prefabricated patterns, kits or molds are not allowed. For example, students are not allowed to use pre-made instructions for a bookshelf, store-bought ceramic molds, architectural landscaping kits or 3D printed models/pieces to assemble for their work.
- Suggested materials that could be used include: paper, wood, metal, glass, mosaic tiles, cardboard, foam board, clay, textiles, etc...
- This category emphasizes concept in design rather than fully-realized, functional end products. As such, the mechanical and electrically engineered aspects are not the focus. Examples of non-qualifying purchased elements would be wires, gears, cords, motors.
- Work can be a set of student-created concept renderings of a particular item/structure. At least 3 renderings of different views/aspects made by hand or CAD program is required. CAD designs require at least 3 computer screenshots of student progress stages for documentation as well as the 3 final renderings.
- A fully-realized object, prototype or scale model is encouraged, but is not required.
- All elements must be created by hand. The use or purchase of wire, string, nails, etc. for construction purposes is acceptable, but all embellishments must be created, not found or purchased
- Students are required to include documentation of creative process with a minimum of 3 images.
- Any text used must be typed. Any entry that is not full-scale must have a typed legend for comparison.
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 36” wide, by 36” deep by 70” tall.
- 3D Printing is NOT allowed.
CATEGORY 14 : POTTERY, CERAMICS and PLASTIC ARTS -
- Any artwork that is: wheel thrown, hand-built, cast, slumped, molded
- Work must have a functional, practical and useful purpose.
- All work that should be fired must be fired. Bisque-fired work that has not been glazed is acceptable.
- Work in this category could include but not be limited to: cups, plates, bowls, tea sets, baskets, planters, vases, platters etc…
- Media in this category to include but not be limited to: clay, metal, wood, glass, stone, plastic, etc.
- Maximum size of artwork not to exceed 36” wide, 36” deep and 42” tall.
- 3D Printing is NOT allowed
CATEGORY 15 : SENIOR PORTFOLIO
- A selection of six (6) pieces of artwork which are representative of the quality and excellence of the senior’s work representing concentration or breadth during their high school years (9-12).
- Senior Portfolio works are not eligible to compete in any other category.
- A portfolio with more or fewer than 6 pieces will be disqualified.
- Mounted photographs of entries that are not able to travel to the state competition may be submitted instead of the actual work.
- While a senior portfolio is viewed as a unit for judging purposes, every work within the portfolio should follow all rules and regulations within the TAPPS Art Manual – including all size restrictions. However, works can still be entered that have been framed. An individual piece that does not adhere to the rules and regulations will subject the entire portfolio to disqualification. [Clarification: Beginning Sept 1, 2018, supporting documentation such as the creative process is required for all works created after Sept 2018. Works created prior to Sept 2018: Supporting documentation for creative process recommended. 9th-11th grade students should maintain documentation of current works for future use in Senior Portfolio.]
- In addition to the senior portfolio entry, students are required to submit a maximum of 750 word Artist Statement (typed) answering as many of the questions below as they feel would be helpful in explaining their selection of art pieces for their portfolio:
- Why did you select the works you submitted for your Senior Portfolio?
- How do you hope people will react when they view your works?
- When did you create these works – how recent are they?
- What role does art play in your life?
- What piece or pieces are your favorite –of which pieces are you most proud?
- Detailed instructions for creating the google slides presentation is found on the TAPPS.biz Art page.
- Senior portfolio selections do not move into other categories. They remain together as a set of six. Duplicates of photography, printmaking, computer generated, and communication design work may not be entered in other categories.
- The 1st round of portfolio judging will be in the form of a digital submission of all 6 works of art. A Senior Portfolio packet with instructions and all necessary documentation necessary will be available on the TAPPS website (click on art page).
- Ten (10) Portfolios in each Division will move on to the 2nd round of judging to take place at the TAPPS State Art Competition.
- If a school has an advancing portfolio(s) they will be notified before the entry deadline.
- All portfolios advancing to State will place 1st through 8th with 2 HM and be provided with an opportunity for critique.
- After the Senior Portfolio notification deadline, non-advancing senior portfolio individual works which meet qualifications may be entered into TAPPS database and counted as part of the category 1-14 works a school can bring to the State Competition.
CATEGORY 16 : ON-SITE DRAWING
- Each school may enter up to 3 students into the State Competition.
- Students will be provided with drawing paper that has the official TAPPS stamp and official TAPPS database label.
- Students must bring their own drawing supplies and drawing board.
- Students must use graphite pencil or stick only.
- Students will create a composition based on direct observation of the still life only; drawing one, a few, or all of the objects in the still life.
- The finished piece will be judged from the spot it was drawn.
- Pieces are not be moved or removed until the judging is complete.
- There is no folding of paper, mounting of paper, or matting of paper allowed in this category.
CATEGORY 17 : ART HISTORY
- Each school may enter an unlimited number of students into the State Art Competition.
- Students must provide a computer to take the test.
- Student login access is given on their Student Profile in TAPPS database.
- The test is derived from 40 TUNE IN art images that change every two years.
- This is a multiple choice test. The test will include color images of at least 20 of the works of art available for selection. The test is timed and only accessible within a time period set by TAPPS.
- The study materials, practice tests, “Art Smart Bulletin” booklet and prints must be ordered from tuneinnet.com.
- Study materials may not be present during testing as supervised by the member school.
CATEGORY 18 :SEEK AND SKETCH – BLACK AND WHITE
- Each school may enter up to 3 students to compete in this event.
- Students will be provided with:
- Official TAPPS database entry label
- one sheet of TAPPS official stamped drawing paper.
- Students will provide the following:
- dry black and white media (see Category 1 for media options)
- drawing board.
- There will be 2 hours for this event. Works will be time-stamped.
- Students are not to draw indoors, they must stay outside.
- Final works must be turned in on the stamped drawing paper.
- Students will create a work of art that is black and white only.
- Student may use any dry media they choose to complete this project in and it may be mixed.
- Final works will not be mounted or matted.
- Entry registration will be made in TAPPS database as the other Art work entries. Specific time sign-ups will be through TAPPS database Sign-up and available within 3 weeks of the event.
- Disqualification of the work of art will result if:
- teachers, school representatives and/or parents are discovered assisting students in any way, including critiquing and advice during the two hours of this event
- artwork is returned past the deadline.
CATEGORY 19 : SEEK AND SKETCH – COLOR
- Each school may enter up to 3 students to compete in this event.
- Students will be provided with:
- Official TAPPS database entry label
- one sheet of TAPPS official stamped drawing paper.
- Students will provide the following:
- dry color media (see Category 2 for media options)
- drawing board.
- There will be 2 hours for this event. Works will be time-stamped.
- Students are not to draw indoors, they must stay outside.
- Final works must be turned in on the stamped drawing paper.
- Students will create a work of art that is in color.
- Student may use any dry color media they choose to complete this project in and it may be mixed.
- Final works will not be mounted or matted.
- Entry registration will be made in TAPPS database as the other Art work entries. Specific time sign-ups will be through TAPPS database Sign-up and available within 3 weeks of the event.
- Disqualification of the work of art will result if:
- teachers, school representatives and/or parents are discovered assisting students in any way, including critiquing and advice during the two hours of this event
- artwork is returned past the deadline.
CATEGORY 20 :SHORT FILM Competition
The Competition shall be open to every member school that includes Art on the annual TAPPS contract.
- CONTENT
- Films should meet the minimum community standards for the school and TAPPS; with TAPPS having the final say with regards to appropriateness.
- TAPPS membership includes schools from across the state and with different standards for acceptable content and presentation. TAPPS has determined certain subject matter, themes, content, or portrayal including but not limited to the following list, will not be acceptable for short film performance in TAPPS competition:
- Profanity or using the Lord’s name in vain (in an irreverent or disrespectful manner or as an expletive) even as euphemism is prohibited
- Abortion
- Adultery
- Homosexuality
- Incest
- Suicide
- Teen Pregnancy
- Any illegal acts including but not limited to substance use.
- GENERAL INFORMATION
- Student must be in good academic standing as outlined in TAPPS and member schools policy during the contest time period.
- Submissions will be accepted beginning January 1st.
- Deadline for submissions and documentation materials is as posted on the TAPPS Calendar.
- Fee – a $30.00 screening fee shall be accessed on each submission – fees will be reflected on a school’s fee form at the State Meet.
- Each school may enter up to 3 short films in each of the following categories:
- Narrative
- Documentary
- Animation- traditional animation, claymation, hand-drawn, stop-motion
- Entries may be the work of 1 student and no more than 6 students. This limit does not include on-screen talent.
- Definition of Adult Involvement. Adults participating:
- must be approved by the school
- may be an advisor to the students
- may be used as On-Screen Talent
- Time Limits
- Narrative and Documentary films shall be 3 to 10 minutes in length
- Animation entries shall be 1 to 3 minutes in length
- Brief introduction and outline of the film process will be required of all works submitted and will be part of the overall time allotment. Introduction to include:
- Director, major actors
- Central concept (plot if applicable)
- Filming process
- Additional Information may be included.
- JUDGING
- Criteria to be used:
- Originality
- Cinematic storytelling
- Technical execution
- Overall presentation of concept/story
- Submitted films will be judged by a panel of three judges
- Determined by TAPPS
- Judges will be knowledgeable of the film industry and HS-level work.
- Schools will be notified of results prior to the Championship Meet.
- Winning films will be viewed during the Championship Meet if facility space allows.
- Copyrighted materials include but are not limited to: Music and Pictures: Schools are responsible for the legalities of the music, location use, and pictures used in the film. Teachers must certify that all necessary permission and/or licensing has been obtained from the owner of any and all rights, including copyright, of all music and images used in the TAPPS Short Film contest by the school. TAPPS is not responsible for obtaining any necessary permission or licensing of the music performed or images used by the school during the course of the TAPPS competition.
Section 231 – Art Competition Information
- JUDGING AND CRITERIA
Entries will be judged on the following criteria:
- Technique – the use of media and tools (execution and technical skills). The student chooses and controls media and tools effectively to enhance the appearance of the work.
- Personal Expression – the level of imagination, creativity and individuality. The expression is unique and the concept presented in a fresh way that is imaginative and inventive.
- Organization – The use of elements and principles of art, effectively choosing those which enhance the overall appearance of the work.
- Integration – the work integrates technique, expression, and organization through aesthetic and critical judgment to achieve an effective interpretation.
- Judges will be provided by TAPPS.
- Decisions of the judges will be final.
- LABELS
- The OFFICIAL TAPPS database LABELS will be generated and handed out at registration to each school once their artwork is verified.
- Once a school has received their official TAPPS database labels they are to be affixed to the front lower right hand corner of the mat on a 2D work of art. And for 3D works affixed to the school provided matboard and placed next to the work.
- All official TAPPS database labels will be printed by TAPPS.
- STATE FEES can be found on tapps.biz and are payable at the State Championship event.
- AWARDS
- Categories 1-16 will place 1st through 8th.
- Two Honorable Mentions awarded in each category 1-16.
- There are no Ties
- Points awarded as follows:
1st place | 10 |
2nd place | 8 |
3rd place | 6 |
4th place | 5 |
5th place | 4 |
6th place | 3 |
7th place | 2 |
8th place | 1 |
HM | 0 |
- Awards (Tiebreakers)
- Team awardsTies
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Overall student awards
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- LOSS or DAMAGE
- TAPPS assumes no responsibility for
- Loss
- Damage
- Or breakage of art.
- Those that submit breakable objects should understand that they do so at their own risk.
- Artwork is not to be “finished” fixed or added to once it is placed in the facility for judging. Work in question will be removed from competition.
- All artwork left behind after the competition will be discarded.
Music Plan
[1]Section 236 – Music Overview
- PURPOSE. The purpose of the Texas Association of Private and Parochial Schools Music Event is to provide each student with an opportunity to learn, grow and perform. The God-given talents that have been developed with taught skills along with the personality of the students are challenged to meet a set standard. The subjective opinion of the judges provides a tool so all who participate can measure their progress. The rating in each event reflects a culmination of the student's accomplishments and the judge's evaluation.
- GOALS
- As many students as possible are encouraged to participate. The guidelines are clear and attainable for any school.
- Students are given the opportunity to grow and to receive another opinion of how their talent and skill is developing.
- Judges will understand the standard, acknowledge students who meet it, and inform the students how they can improve.
- Each director and student should leave the event with information concerning areas in which they have excelled as well as what they can do to improve their skill. Each performer is a success; we are not creating winners and losers.
- OVERVIEW
- Organization
- Schools are assigned to Classifications (1A, 2A, 3A, etc.) as determined annually by TAPPS.
- Drumline Exhibition. For the Drum Line Exhibition in the fall, Classifications are combined to form two Divisions and each school will compete with other schools within the same Division. There is no District or Region qualifying required for entry
- Vocal, Band, and String Championship Competition. At each Open Championship competition in the spring, schools will compete with other schools within the same Classification. There is no District or Regional qualifying required for entry.
- School Directors/Sponsors. Each school designates a Head Vocal, Head Band, and Head Orchestra Director. Schools may have more than one Assistant Director.
- Music Committee. The Music Committee is made up of volunteers from mixed classifications representing each medium and the TAPPS Music Director. The Committee will coordinate the Championship Competitions and rule on challenges, exceptions, etc. The TAPPS Music Director will preside over the Music Committee and any meetings.
- Music Contest Categories
- FALL BAND (Fall Event)
- Drumline
- Field Band
- Marching Band
- VOCAL CONTESTS (Spring Event)
- Large Ensemble/Sight-Reading
- Small Ensemble
- Solo
- Female Vocal
- Male Vocal
- Piano
- Sacred Ensemble
- Pop/Show Ensemble
- BAND CONTESTS (Spring Event)
- Large Ensemble/Sight-Reading
- Small Ensemble
- Woodwind
- Brass
- Percussion
- Handbell
- Solo
- Woodwind
- Brass
- Percussion
- Piano
- Guitar
- Medium Ensemble
- Jazz Ensemble
- STRING CONTESTS (Spring Event)
- Large Ensemble/Sight-Reading
- Small Ensemble
- Duet
- Solo
- String (includes harp and guitar)
- Piano
- Medium Ensemble
- Single Gender Schools may use students from an associated school for the following competitions
- Large Ensembles
- Points will be awarded to the school entered in the competition
Section 237 – Fall Band
- Eligibility
- School
- Schools must declare their intent to participate by the deadline established on the TAPPS calendar.
- Schools do not have to participate in the TAPPS Band competition to enter
- Sponsor
- Completed must complete TEaMs testing in TAPPS database
- Professional ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RULES form on file with TAPPS
- Student
- Student ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RULES form on file at school
- Eligibility form filed on TAPPS database
- Students in grades 7-12 may participate in Tier 1-3 Drumline; majority HS
- Students in grades 6 may participate in MS/HS Drumline only; Non majority HS
- Entries
- Each participating school may submit
- One varsity entry for Field Band or Marching Band
- If space allows a second entry may be allowed in the MS/HS Drumline
- ENTRY procedure completed on TAPPS database
- Roster of student participants
- Photo
- Music Selection Performance pieces may be original or a documented source.
- Judging
- Groups will be judged by a critic or a panel of judges as determined by TAPPS.
- Judges shall be knowledgeable of the contest and student level of work.
- Judging shall be
- Independent
- Judges may be on the field during the performance
- Each performance will receive a critique.
- Recorded comments from judges to be given to competitors if possible
- Written comments may be given in lieu of oral critiques if necessary
- Judging Criteria
- Musicianship: Technique and Execution
- Overall Performance Effect
- Overall Program Content
- Awards
- Points
- Drumline - 35
- Field Band - 50
- Marching Band - 100
- School Awards
- Performances shall be ranked by division.
- Plaques for 1st-3rd place in each division will be awarded.
- Within each Drumline division section awards shall be made for the following as determined by the judge(s).
- Snare
- Tenor
- Bass
- Cymbal
- Outstanding Front Ensemble
- Drumline Competition
- The competition is an open competition with no district or regional qualifying required for entry.
- The competition shall be divided into divisions as entries warrant
- Tier 1 Drumline 16 or more students (7th through 12th grade); majority HS
- Tier 2 Drumline 10 to 15 students (7th through 12th grade); majority HS
- Tier 3 Drumline 3 to 9 students (7th through 12th grade); majority HS
- MS/HS Drumline 3 or more students (6th through 12th grade); majority HS
- Adjudication and awards only - no points toward Henderson Cup
- MS Drumline 3 or more students (6th through 12th grade); majority MS
- Adjudication and awards only - no points toward Henderson Cup
- Content
- Announcer and Introduction
- Each group will be introduced by the announcer.
- Once the line assumes a “ready” position the judge on the field will say “________ High School, are you ready?”
- At this time, a simple salute or verbal affirmation that the line is ready for judging will be given.
- The announcer will then say “_________ High School, you now have the field for competition”.
- Time Constraints
- Setup- 8 minutes
- Prep play while setting up is allowed during setup
- Performance- 4 minute minimum,10 minute maximum
- Take down- 2 minutes
- Penalty shall be enforced for exceeding 20 total time
- Mini Clinic/Critique 5 minute
- Warm-up will take place outside the competition area (parking lot) and must not interfere with the group in judged performance.
- Performance area
- Outdoor: From 35 to 35 horizontal on field, and constrained from the sideline to the nearest hash.
- These dimensions are 90’ X 55”
- Indoor: Restricted to the boundary lines of a high school basketball floor.
- Critique shall take place outside of the performance area
- Field Band/Marching Band Competition
- The competition is an open competition with no district or regional qualifying required for entry.
- Content
- Announcer and Introduction
- Each group will be introduced by the announcer.
- Once the line assumes a “ready” position the judge on the field will say “________ High School, are you ready?”
- At this time, a simple salute or verbal affirmation that the line is ready for judging will be given.
- The announcer will then say “_________ High School, you now have the field for competition”.
- Time Constraints
- Setup - 8 minutes
- Prep play while setting up is allowed during setup
- Performance - 3 minute minimum,10 minute maximum
- Take down - 2 minutes
- Penalty shall be enforced for exceeding 20 total time
- Mini Clinic/Critique 5 minute (if time allows)
- Warm-up will take place outside the competition area (parking lot) and must not interfere with the group in judged performance.
- Performance area: As outlined by TAPPS at the event
Section 238 – Vocal Contest
- PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
- Eligibility. Eligibility regulations are outlined in Article V of the TAPPS Constitution.
- Schools declare intent to participate by September 1.
- Sponsor must complete TEaMs compliance including Professional Acknowledgement of Rules form in the TAPPS database.
- Students must have a Student Acknowledgement of Rules form on file at school.
- Students must be listed on the Eligibility form prior to registration of the competition.
- The Director declares each student eligible for competition when listing them on the Eligibility Form and Roster.
- Individual Students.
- A student may perform in a MAXIMUM of six total Vocal entries
- Including at most 2 large ensembles of overlapping personnel. Ensembles may be same or different voice. If the ensembles are the same voice, one must be Primary and one must be Secondary. (A student may be in a Primary Mixed and a Secondary Mixed, but not 2 Secondary Mixed.
- Including at most one vocal solo and one piano solo.
- A student may be in multiple ensembles of the same category.
- Ensemble Personnel.
- Ensembles with identical personnel
- may NOT enter the same category twice.
- may enter two or more different categories with the exception of both Large Ensemble and Small Ensemble. (An identical group may not enter both Large Ensemble and Small Ensemble, but may enter Large, Sacred, and Show or Small, Sacred, and Show.)
- An ensemble confronted with inappropriate numbers due to illness, injury, emergency, etc., may perform as long as the ensemble can provide all of the necessary parts as demanded by the score. If you are unable to provide all necessary parts, you may submit a substitution request to the Meet Coordinator before the contest.
- 7th and 8th Grade Student Participation. The intent of allowing 7th and 8th grade students, is to provide an ensemble opportunity to schools which otherwise would not have an ensemble without the use of 7th and 8th grade students.
- Only ONE single ensemble may include 7th and 8th grade students. It must be the largest ensemble and the majority of personnel for that ensemble must be 9th – 12th grade students.
- 7th and 8th Grade students may participate in solo or small ensemble events for adjudication only.
- Schools must complete a 7th and 8th Grade Student approval form which will be reviewed by the State Music Committee.
- MUSIC QUALIFICATIONS.
- No ensemble or soloist may perform the same music selection(s) they used in previous TAPPS competition in the previous 3 years.
- A Large Ensemble may not perform the same music as a different Large Ensemble from the same school.
- A Non-Large Ensemble may not perform the same music as a different ensemble from the same school unless the majority of the personnel are different.
- Each Music Category has specific music qualifications, some from the University Interscholastic League Prescribed Music List (UIL PML). The qualifications are outlined in the individual event sections
- UIL PML Music must be selected from the current list (Published August 1). This list may be purchased from the University Interscholastic League or viewed online. UIL Prescribed Music List 2022-23
- All solos and ensembles shall be accompanied except those works which are written expressly for unaccompanied instrument(s) or voice(s).
- SCORES COPYRIGHT RULE. Directors are responsible for the legality of the scored presented.
- Each soloist and each director of an ensemble must supply the judge with an ORIGINAL conductor's score with measures numbered (NO PHOTO COPIES). The judge is instructed not to permit performance to begin until he or she has received such a score.
- No eprints for Judges
- If eprints are the only option available for your piece, proof of purchase of 3 printouts from the publisher must be presented at time of registration.
EXCEPTION: A judge may hear an ensemble without an original score under one of the following provisions:
- A statement from the music retailer or publisher stating that no published score exists or it is permanently out of print and that a photocopy is permitted to be used. Or
- A set of original parts are supplied in lieu of the conductor's score.
- Music selections must be scored appropriately for the ensembles (no guitar lead sheets, no solo music for 2+ part ensembles).
- Published scores must be used as written unless the copyright holder supplies a letter granting permission to make modification.
- Non-Published scores may be used with the following guidelines:
- Arrangements of copyrighted material must have a letter from the copyright holder granting permission to arrange for choir and to make necessary photo copies.
- Original works must include a letter from the composer granting permission to use for the contest and make necessary photo copies.
- GENERAL INFORMATION
- Events are open to the public if space allows with the exception that Solo events and Sight-Reading may not have an audience.
- All vocal events require memorization.
- Participants are responsible for providing all instruments and equipment necessary for their performance. Pianos in good tune (A-440) will be provided for each performance venue.
- JUDGES
- Qualifications. A judge should
- Be currently teaching, conducting, performing, or retired in the area in which they are asked to judge.
- Have at least 5 years experience
- Have a college or music conservatory background in music
- 2. Responsibilities.
- Listen to each repertoire selection.
- Judge based on what is performed.
- Give written comments of encouragement and constructive criticism with a spirit of support.
- Give a rating which supports the given comments independent of any other judge on the panel.
- EVENT CATEGORIES
- SOLOS - To be performed at the Solo & Ensemble event.
- Students may only perform a maximum of one vocal solo and one piano solo.
- There is no limit to the number of solos a school may enter.
- Solos will be adjudicated by one judge. ONE Original score must be provided with all measures numbered.
- Vocal Solos
- Live accompaniment is preferred. Taped accompaniment may be used, but the student must supply own playback equipment. The accompaniment track is the only acceptable track to be used. Soloists may NOT use tracks with added vocals.
- When possible, Eight minutes maximum will be allowed for set up and performance. (Changes may be made based on entries)
- Each soloist will perform one selection from memory taken from the CURRENT (Published August 1) UIL PML (108- ALL VOCAL SOLOS) Class 1, 2, or 3.
- Vocal Solos may be sung in any key, published or transposed.
- Songs with titles listed in a foreign language must be sung in that language. Songs with titles in English may be sung in another published language unless otherwise noted in the specifications
- Piano Solos
- When possible, a ten minutes maximum will be allowed for set up, seat adjustment and performance. (subject to change as determined by entries)
- Each soloist will perform one selection from memory taken from the current UIL PML (603- for Piano Solo) Class 1, 2, or 3.
- Piano Solos may be entered as a Vocal event or Instrumental event, but not both.
- SMALL ENSEMBLE - To be performed at the Solo & Ensemble event.
- The Small Ensemble will consist of 3-20 members.
- Ensembles with 7 or fewer members may not have a director.
- Ensembles with 8-20 members may have a director.
- Members may not be identical personnel as a large ensemble.
- There is no limit to the number of small ensembles a school may enter.
- Live accompaniment is preferred. Taped accompaniment may be used, but ensembles must supply their own playback equipment. The accompaniment track is the only acceptable track to be used. Ensembles may NOT use the tracks with added vocals.
- Eight minutes maximum will be allowed for set up and performance.
- 1A/2A/3A/4A Small Ensembles must perform one selection from the Current (Published Aug 1) UIL PML from memory 1) either a Class 1, 2, 3 from the current ensemble list (171- for Treble Small Ensemble, 172- for Tenor-Bass Small Ensemble, or 179- for Madrigal. A Madrigal group must have a minimum of one voice per part but no more than two on a part) 2) or Grade I, II, III, IV, or V selections taken from the current chorus UIL PML (931- for Mixed Chorus , 933- for Tenor-Bass Chorus, or 935- for Treble Chorus)
- 5A/6A Small Ensembles must perform one selection from the Current (Published Aug 1) UIL PML from memory 1) either a Class 1 or 2 from the current ensemble list (171- for Treble Small Ensemble, 172- for Tenor-Bass Small Ensemble, or 179- for Madrigal. A Madrigal group must have a minimum of one voice per part but no more than two on a part) 2) or Grade II, III, IV, or V selections taken from the current chorus UIL PML (931- for Mixed Chorus , 933- for Tenor-Bass Chorus, or 935- for Treble Chorus)
- Small ensembles will be adjudicated by one judge. ONE Original score must be provided with all measures numbered.
- LARGE ENSEMBLE - To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event
- Large Ensemble will consist of a minimum of 8 members.
- Large Ensemble may not have identical personnel as a small ensemble.
- Students may perform in a maximum of 2 large ensembles. If the ensembles are the same voice, one must be Primary and one must be Secondary. (A student may be in a Primary Mixed and a Secondary Mixed, but not 2 Secondary Mixed.)
- Schools may enter ONE Primary Large Ensemble per voice (Mixed, Treble, or Tenor Bass).
- Schools may enter one or more Secondary Large Ensemble per voice provided that a Primary Large Ensemble is entered.
- Large Ensembles must use Live Accompaniment.
- When possible, a maximum time allowed will be fifteen minutes for warm-up and twenty minutes for set up and performance. (Changes may be made based on entries)
- Large Ensembles must perform three selections from memory:
- Two selections taken from the CURRENT (Published after August 1) UIL PML chorus list (931- for mixed chorus, 933- for tenor-bass chorus or 935- for treble chorus) not an ensemble list.
- 1A/2A/3A/4A Primary Large Ensemble
- Selection one must be Grade I, II, III, IV, or V.
- Selection two must be Grade II, III, IV, or V.
- 1A/2A/3A/4A Secondary Large Ensemble may perform two selections Grade I, II, III, IV, or V.
- 5A/6A Primary Large Ensemble
- Selection one must be Grade II, III, IV, or V.
- Selection two must be Grade III, IV, or V.
- 5A/6A Secondary Large Ensemble may perform two selections Grade II, III, IV, or V.
- One selection of the director’s choice. This selection must be a published score.
- Of the three selections, one selection must be performed a cappella
- Large ensembles will be adjudicated by a panel of 3 judges. THREE Original scores must be provided with all measures numbered.
- SIGHT-READING - To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event Refer to the Sight-Reading Guidelines on the Vocal Page on TAPPS.biz for procedure and expectations.
- All Large Ensembles have the option to participate in Sight-reading.
- Large Ensembles that do not sight-read are ineligible for the Sweepstakes award at the State level.
- Twenty minutes will be allowed for sight-reading which will immediately follow the concert performance.
- TAPPS Music Director provides music: SAB or SATB for mixed choirs, SSA for treble choirs, and TTB for tenor-bass choirs.
- Accompanist will be provided.
- Sight Reading will be adjudicated by one judge.
- Music Level
- 1A/2A/3A/4A Primary: Level 2
- 1A/2A/3A/4A Secondary: Level 1
- 5A/6A Primary: Level 3
- 5A/6A Secondary: Level 2
- SACRED ENSEMBLE - To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event if 11 or more students or at Solo & Small event if 10 or less students
- The Ensemble will consist of a minimum of 3 and maximum of 24 members
- An instrumental back-up ensemble may consist of up to 8 musicians. This must contain only high school students, with the exception of the pianist who may be a school-approved adult.
- Live accompaniment is preferred. Taped accompaniment may be used, but ensemble must supply their own playback equipment. The accompaniment track is the only acceptable track to be used. Ensembles may NOT use the tracks with added vocals.
- Sacred ensembles may not use electronic vocal enhancement or microphones.
- When possible, a Fifteen minute maximum will be allowed for set up, tuning and performance. ( Changes may be made based on entries)
- This Ensemble will perform
- two selections if 11 or more students or
- one selection if 10 or less students, of director's choice from memory.
Selections for this category includes religious, gospel, contemporary Christian, etc., selections which are of high quality not on the UIL PML.
- Sacred ensembles will be adjudicated by
- a panel of 3 judges if 11 or more students or
- 1 judge if 10 or less students.
Original scores must be provided for EACH judge with all measures numbered.
- POP/SHOW ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event 11 or more students or at Solo & Small event if less than 10 students
- The ensemble will consist of a minimum of 3 and maximum of 24 members.
- An instrumental back-up ensemble may consist of up to 8 musicians. This must contain only high school students, with the exception of the pianist who may be a school-approved adult.
- Live accompaniment is preferred. Taped accompaniment may be used, but ensemble must supply their own playback equipment. The accompaniment track is the only acceptable track to be used. Ensembles may NOT use the tracks with added vocals.
- Pop/Show ensembles may not use electronic vocal enhancement or microphones. These ensembles must be judged on vocal quality.
- When possible, a Fifteen minute maximum will be allowed for set up, tuning and performance. ( Changes may be made based on entries)
- This Ensemble will perform
- two selections if 11 or more students or
- one selection if 10 or less students, of director's choice from memory.
Selections for this category includes secular, pop, jazz, sacred, Broadway, etc. selections which are in good taste and of high quality but not on the UIL PML.
- Movement, choreography, or costumes are appropriate for this category and will be evaluated by the judges
- Pop/Show ensembles will be adjudicated by
- a panel of 3 judges if 11 or more students or
- 1 judge if less than 10 students.
Original scores must be provided for EACH Judge with all measures numbered.
- RATINGS, POINTS, AWARDS
- RATINGS. Each entry will be given a rating based on performance.
- Ratings for each event will be posted in TAPPS database as soon as possible so that any mistakes may be caught. Contesting of posted results must be made within one hour of posting time.
- Complaints and rule violations should be made in writing to the Meet coordinator within 48 hours of any alleged violation.
- A rule violation will result in a minimum penalty of a single rating reduction.
- INDIVIDUAL AND ENSEMBLE AWARDS. The following awards will be given for those entries receiving a Division I Superior Rating.
- Large Ensemble: plaque
- Sight Reading: plaque
- Sweepstakes*: plaque
- Medium Sacred Ensemble: plaque
- Medium Pop/Show Ensemble: plague
- Small Ensemble, Small Sacred, Small Pop/Show: medals
- Solos: medal
- All-State Honor** certificate
*The Sweepstakes Award is presented to any Large Ensemble receiving a I-Superior Rating in both Concert and Sight Reading and given in place of the large ensemble and sight reading plaques.
** All-State Honor Award is presented to any Class 1 solo receiving a I-Superior Rating.
- SCHOOL AWARDS. In recognition of outstanding achievement of a school in their music program, the top four schools will receive an award.
- POINTS.
- For each Division I Superior rating in each category, the school will receive the following points:
- Large Ensembles. Points will be totaled for both UIL Selection pieces. (One grade 2 selection and one grade 3 selection would make a total of 138 pts)
- Grade 1 = 50 points
- Grade 2 = 63 points
- Grade 3 = 75 points
- Grade 4 = 88 points
- Grade 5 = 100 points
- Sight Reading = 50 points
- State Sweepstakes = 25 points
- Sacred Ensemble
- 11 or more students = 30 points;
- 10 or less students = 20 points
- Pop/Show Ensemble
- 11 or more students = 30 points
- 10 or less students = 20 points
- Small Ensemble
- Class 1 / Grade 4 or 5 = 25 points
- Class 2 / Grade 2 or 3 = 20 points
- Class 3 / Grade 1 = 15 points
- Solo
- Class 1 = 10 points
- Class 2 = 5 points
- Class 3 = 3 points
- For each Division II Excellent rating in Large Ensemble, the school will receive 50% of the value of large ensemble points. No other entry receiving a II-rating will earn points.
- AWARDS.
- Points for all events for both the Solo & Ensemble Event and the Concert & Sight Reading Event are totaled by school and overall school rankings are awarded at the end of the Concert & Sight Reading Event.
- Schools must earn a minimum of 50 points to be eligible for overall school awards.
- The top three (3) schools in each Classification with the minimum point requirements will receive plaques.
- Ties
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- CONTEST ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURES
- ONLINE MUSIC ENTRY All Entries will be submitted through the online entry process (entry spreadsheet).
- TEaMs Testing must be completed by the Fine Arts Director and Vocal Director before entries may be entered.
- Eligibility Form must be submitted before entries may be entered.
- Entries must be entered on the TAPPS spreadsheet supplied by the TAPPS office by the entries deadline at which time they will be registered.
- Solo and Ensemble Event entries will be registered in a separate meet from the Concert and Sight Reading Event entries.
- Entries must be ACCURATE. Double check spelling, UIL codes, order of performance, accompanist is listed, etc. Mistakes on the entry page transfer to all forms.
- After entries are REGISTERED, view each Adjudication Form for errors and notify the Meet Director of any changes.
- Prior to each event, ALL registered entries must be verified and confirmed before the Scratch Deadline. Certification of students to both Solo and Ensemble Event and the Concert and Sight Reading Event is a commitment by the student and school. Fees shall be paid for all students not scratched prior to the scratch deadline even if they do not participate at the Meet.
- Fees Form. Once entries are REGISTERED for each Meet (Solo & Ensemble then Concert & SR), Invoice forms can be found on the Vocal page on the TAPPS.biz website. Invoice and fees (made payable to TAPPS) should be brought to each Meet.
- SUPERVISION Parents/adults from each school must assist (no unsupervised students). In addition to the director and/or accompanist of a school, there should be 1 adult for every 10 students at the Music meet. Students should not be left unattended. Chaperone list must be completed through the TAPPS database.
- VOLUNTEERS. Each school will be assigned a volunteer time slot a minimum of 1 hour at the State meet (time keeper, stage-set-up crew, room monitor, etc.). All schools will be expected to honor their commitment. Volunteer sign-up will be completed on a spreadsheet provided by the TAPPS office..
- STAGE SET-UP. It is the responsibility of the school to set-up for performance, tune, perform, and break-down the stage all within the time limits set forth for each ensemble. Chaperones and other school volunteers should aid in setting up their school to keep within the time limits.
- SCHEDULING.
- Schedules will be made based on student participation, not on accompanist availability. Consider having multiple accompanists.
- Monitors shall keep the contest moving by permitting out-of-order appearances using the following:
- First Priority: contestants that are on time and in order.
- Second Priority: late contestants; lowest number first.
- Third Priority: contestants who wish to perform in advance of schedule.
- A scheduled contestant must appear within 30 minutes of the last scheduled performance in any division or they will be considered “scratched” by the Coordinator.
NOTE: Accurate ensemble rosters and listing of accompanists enable the coordinator to avoid conflicts in the schedule. Notify monitor of conflicts or delays as soon as possible and make schedule arrangements accordingly.
- CHECK- IN/ CHECK-OUT
- Check-in when you arrive at the Meet.
- Volunteer/Chaperone Form complete with cell numbers so chaperones may be contacted in case of emergency while at the meet.
- State Fee forms and a check for fees (Fees made payable to TAPPS)
- Verify schedule of events.
- Check-out before you leave the Meet.
- Pick up director packet
- All adjudication forms
- Any stray music
- Awards earned
- Sign out verifying your results with ratings and points with the amount of awards given and the amount of awards to be ordered. Fill out a Award Order form if there are some awards not available at the Meet.
Section 239 – Band Contest
- PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
- Eligibility. Eligibility regulations are outlined in Article V of the TAPPS Constitution.
- Schools declare intent to participate by September 1.
- Sponsor must complete TEaMs course in the TAPPS database.
- Students must have a Student Acknowledgement of Rules form on file at school.
- Students must be listed on the Eligibility form prior to registration of the competition.
- The Director declares each student eligible for competition when listing them on the Eligibility Form and Ensemble Roster. If ineligibility occurs after the Ensemble Roster is submitted but before the contest, the Meet Coordinator must be notified in writing of the change in status prior to the event.
- Individual Students.
- A student may perform in a MAXIMUM of six total entries
- including at most one large ensemble.
- including at most one solo per instrument.
- A student may be in multiple ensembles of the same category.
- Ensemble Personnel.
- Ensembles with identical personnel
- may NOT enter the same category twice.
- may enter two or more different categories with the exception of both Large Ensemble and Small Ensemble. (An identical group may not enter both Large Ensemble and Small Ensemble, but may enter Large, Jazz, and Medium or Small, Jazz, and Medium.)
- An ensemble confronted with inappropriate numbers due to illness, injury, emergency, etc., may perform as long as the ensemble can provide all of the necessary parts as demanded by the score. If you are unable to provide all necessary parts, you may submit a substitution request to the Meet Coordinator before the contest.
- 7th and 8th Grade Student Participation. The intent of allowing 7th and 8th grade students, is to provide an ensemble opportunity to schools which otherwise would not have an ensemble without the use of 7th and 8th grade students.
- Only ONE single ensemble may include 7th and 8th grade students. It must be the largest ensemble and the majority of personnel for that ensemble must be 9th – 12th grade students.
- Schools must complete a 7th and 8th Grade Student Approval Form which will be reviewed by the State Music Committee.
- 7th and 8th Grade students may participate in solo or small ensemble events for adjudication only.
- MUSIC QUALIFICATIONS.
- No ensemble or soloist may perform any part of any music selection(s) they used previously in TAPPS competition the previous 3 years.
- A Large Ensemble may not perform the same music as a different Large Ensemble from the same school.
FLEX ARRANGEMENTS: When used as the PML selection, approval must be obtained from the music committee before performing.
- Medium Ensembles may not perform the same music as a different ensemble from the same school unless the majority of the personnel are different.
- No more than three (3) Small Ensembles from the same school may perform the same music selection for competition.
- Each Music Category has specific music qualifications, some from the University Interscholastic League Prescribed Music List (UIL PML). The qualifications are outlined in the individual event sections
- UIL PML Music must be selected from the current list (Published August 1) and played with the number of listed performers. This list may be purchased from the University Interscholastic League or viewed online. http://www.utexas.edu/uil/pml/
- All solos and ensembles shall be accompanied except those works which are written expressly for unaccompanied instruments.
- SCORES COPYRIGHT RULE. Directors are responsible for the legality of the score presented.
- Each soloist and each director of an ensemble must supply the judge with an ORIGINAL conductor's score with measures numbered (NO PHOTO COPIES). The judge is instructed not to permit performance to begin until he or she has received such a score.
- No eprints for Judges
- If eprints are the only option available for your piece, proof of purchase of 3 printouts from the publisher must be presented at time of registration.
EXCEPTION: A judge may hear an ensemble without an original score under one of the following provisions:
- A statement from the music retailer or publisher stating that no published score exists or it is permanently out of print and that a photocopy is permitted to be used. Or
- A set of original parts are supplied in lieu of conductor's score.
- Music selections must be scored appropriately for the ensembles (no guitar lead sheets, no solo music for 2+ part ensembles).
- Published scores must be used as written unless the copyright holder supplies a letter granting permission to make modifications.
- Non-Published scores may be used with the following guidelines:
- Arrangements of copyrighted material must have a letter from the copyright holder granting permission to arrange for band/orchestra and to make necessary photo copies.
- Original works must include a letter from the composer granting permission to use for contest and make necessary photo copies.
- GENERAL INFORMATION
- Events are open to the public if space allows with the exception that Solo events and Sight-Reading may not have an audience.
- Instrumental events do not require memorization except piano solos.
- Participants are responsible for providing all instruments and equipment necessary for their performance.
- Pianos in good tune (A-440) will be provided for each performance venue.
- Some percussion instruments may be provided for the Large Ensemble venue.
- JUDGES
- Qualifications. A judge should
- Be currently teaching, conducting, or performing in the area in which they are asked to judge.
- Have at least 5 years experience
- Have a college or music conservatory background in music
- Responsibilities.
- Listen to each repertoire selection.
- Judge based on what is performed.
- Give written comments of encouragement and constructive criticism with a spirit of support.
- Give a rating which supports the given comments independent of any other judge on the panel.
- EVENT CATEGORIES at the Solo and Ensemble Event
- SMALL ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Solo & Ensemble event.
- The Small Ensemble will consist of 3-10 members unless the PML requires more players.
- Ensembles with 3-5 members must not have a director
- Ensembles with 6 or more members may a director
- Percussion ensembles may have a director.
- There is no limit to the number of small ensembles a school may enter.
- Live accompaniment is preferred. Taped accompaniment may be used, but ensemble must supply their own playback equipment. The accompaniment track is the only acceptable track to be used. Ensembles may NOT use the tracks with added vocals.
- When possible, ten minutes maximum will be allowed for set up, tuning, performance, and break-down. (Changes may be made based on entries)
- Small ensembles must perform one selection from the current (Published August 1) UIL PML. Duet Music may not be used. View performance requirement notes for each subsection http://www2.uiltexas.org/music/BandSECodesPerfReq.html
- 1A/2A/3A/4A/5A/6A may all perform a Class 1, 2, or 3
- You may substitute instruments( within reasonable limits) for class 2 and class 3. Parts may be transposed and re-written for other similar instruments but not simplified. The composer’s intent must be respected. Class 1 must be played as listed on the PML.
- Small ensembles will be adjudicated by one judge. ONE Original score must be provided with all measures numbered.
- SOLOS- To be performed at the Solo & Ensemble event.
- Students may only perform a maximum of one solo per instrument.
- There is no limit to the number of solos a school may enter.
- A tenn minute maximum will be allowed for set up, tuning and performance. ( Changes may be made based on entries)
- Piano solos require memorization. All other instrumental solos do not require memorization.
- Piano Solos may be entered as either a Vocal, Band, or String event.
- Guitar Solos may be entered as either a Band or String event, but not both.
- Handbell Solos will perform at the Concert & Sight Reading event with Handbell Ensembles.
- Each soloist will perform one selection taken from the Current (Published August 1) UIL PML Class 1, 2, or 3. View performance requirement notes for each subsection at http://www2.uiltexas.org/music/BandSECodesPerfReq.html.
- Live accompaniment is preferred. Recorded accompaniment may be used, but the student must supply own playback equipment. The accompaniment track is the only acceptable track to be used. If a score has accompaniment, accompaniment must be provided.
- Solos will be adjudicated by one judge. ONE Original score must be provided with all measures numbered.
- EVENT CATEGORIES at the Concert and Sight Reading Event
- LARGE ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event
- Large Ensemble will consist of a minimum of 8 members.
- Large ensemble may not have identical personnel as a small ensemble.
- Students may perform in a maximum of ONE large ensembles.
- Schools may enter ONE Primary Band Large Ensemble
- Schools may enter one or more Secondary Band Large Ensembles provided that a Primary Band Large Ensemble is entered. (Secondary ensembles are for adjudication only.
- When possible a maximum time allowed will be 20 minutes for warm-up and 30 minutes for Concert. Time begins when you enter the room and includes set-up, tuning, performance, and break-down. (Changes may be made based on entries)
- Keyboards may be used in the large ensemble only to play parts specifically written for them by the original composer/ arranger, or to substitute for one instrument (bass, vibes, chimes, etc.), not for a whole section of instruments (brass, strings, woodwinds, etc.).
- Large Ensembles must perform three selections:
- One selection taken from the CURRENT (Published after August 1) UIL PML list (100- for Band)
- Two selections of the director’s choice.
- Bands must choose a march for one of the director’s choice selections
- Large Ensembles may not perform the same selection as another Large Ensemble from the same school.
- Large ensembles will be adjudicated by a panel of 3 judges. THREE Original scores must be provided with all measures numbered.
- SIGHT-READING- To be performed at the Concert & Sight-Reading Event
Refer to the Sight Reading Instructions on the Band page on TAPPS.biz for procedure and expectations.
- All Large Ensembles have the option to participate in Sight-reading.
- Large Ensembles that do not sight-read are ineligible for the Sweepstakes award at the State level.
- When possible, Twenty minutes will be allowed for sight-reading which will immediately follow the concert performance. (Changes may be made based on entries)
- TAPPS will provide Sight Reading music.
- Sight Reading will be adjudicated by one judge.
- Music Level
- 1A/2A/3A/4A Primary: Level 2
- 1A/2A/3A /4A Secondary: Level 1
- 5A/6A Primary: Level 3
- 5A/6A Secondary: Level 2
- JAZZ ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event
- The Jazz Ensemble will consist of a minimum of 5 and a maximum of 20 members.
- Ensembles with 5-7 members must not have a director.
- Ensembles with 8-20 members may have a director.
- Schools may enter a maximum of FOUR Jazz Ensembles.
- When possible, Twenty minutes maximum will be allowed for set up, tuning, performance and break-down. Time begins when you enter the room.
- This ensemble will perform two selections of the director's choice which are scored for Jazz Bands.
- Jazz Ensembles will be adjudicated by a panel of three judges. THREE Original scores must be provided with all measures numbered
- MEDIUM ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Concert & Sight-Reading Event
- The Medium Ensemble will consist of a minimum of 9 and a maximum of 24 members.
- Medium Ensembles may be directed.
- Schools may enter a maximum of FOUR Band Medium Ensembles.
- When possible, Twenty minutes maximum will be allowed for set-up, tuning, performance, and break-down. Time begins when you enter the room.
- This ensemble will perform two selections of the director’s choice.
- Medium ensembles will be adjudicated by a panel of three judges. THREE Original scores must be provided with all the measures numbered.
- HANDBELL ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event
- The Handbell Ensemble will consist of 3-10 members unless the score requires more players and is considered a small ensemble.
- There is no limit to the number of handbell ensembles a school may enter.
- Ten minutes maximum will be allowed for set up and tuning
- When possible, Fifteen minutes maximum will be allowed for performance, and break-down.
- Handbell choirs must perform one selection which is rated as an American Guild of English Handbell Ringers Grading System Level 2 or above as set forth in the Handbell Musicians of America Grading System.
- Handbell ensembles will be adjudicated by one judge. ONE Original score must be provided with all measures numbered.
- RATINGS, POINTS, AWARDS
- RATINGS. Each entry will be given a rating based on performance.
- Ratings for each event will be posted by TAPPS as soon as possible so that any mistakes may be caught. Contesting of posted results must be made within one hour of posting time.
- Complaints and rule violations should be made in writing to the Meet coordinator within 48 hours of any alleged violation.
- A rule violation will result in a minimum penalty of a single rating reduction.
- INDIVIDUAL AND ENSEMBLE AWARDS. The following awards will be given for those entries receiving a Division I Superior Rating.
- Large Ensemble - plaque
- Sight Reading - plaque
- Sweepstakes* - plaque
- Jazz Ensemble - plaque
- Medium Ensemble - plague
- Small Ensemble - medals
- Solos - medal
- All-State Honor** - certificate
*The Sweepstakes Award is presented to any Large Ensemble receiving a I-Superior Rating in both Concert and Sight Reading and given in place of the large ensemble and sight reading plaques.
** All-State Honor Award is presented to any Class 1 solo receiving a I-Superior Rating.
- SCHOOL AWARDS. In recognition of outstanding achievement of a school in their music program, the top four schools will receive an award.
- POINTS.
- For each Division I Superior rating in each category, the school will receive the following points:
- Large Ensembles.
- Grade 1 = 100 points
- Grade 2 = 125 points
- Grade 3 = 150 points
- Grade 4 = 175 points
- Grade 5 = 200 points
- Sight Reading = 50 points
- State Sweepstakes = 25 points
- Jazz Ensemble = 35 points
- Medium Ensemble = 35 points
- Small Ensemble
- Class 1 = 34 points
- Class 2 = 18 points
- Class 3 = 10 points
- Handbell Ensemble
- Level 6/Level 5 = 25 points
- Level 4/Level 3 = 20 points
- Level 2/Level 1 = 15 points
- Solo
- Class 1 = 10 points
- Class 2 = 5 points
- Class 3 = 3 points
- For each Division II Excellent rating in Large Ensemble, the school will receive 50% of the value of large ensemble points. No other entry receiving a II-rating will earn points.
- AWARDS.
- Points for all events for the Fall Band, Solo & Ensemble Event and the Concert & Sight Reading Event are totaled by school and overall school rankings are awarded at the end of the Concert & Sight-Reading Event.
- Schools must earn a minimum of 50 points to be eligible for overall school awards.
- The top three (3) schools in each Classification with the minimum point requirements will receive plaques.
- Ties
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- CONTEST ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURES
- ONLINE MUSIC ENTRY All Entries and will be submitted through the online entry process. Instructions are on the TAPPS website. and describe step-by-step the process of entering all entries.
- TEaMs Testing must be completed by Fine Arts Director and Band Director before entries may be entered.
- Eligibility Form must be submitted before entries may be entered.
- Entries must be in TAPPS database by the deadline on the TAPPS calendar at which time they will be registered.
- Solo and Ensemble Event entries will be registered in a separate meet from the Concert and Sight Reading Event entries.
- Entries must be ACCURATE. Double check spelling, UIL codes, order of performance, accompanist is listed, etc. Mistakes on the entry page transfer to all forms.
- After entries are REGISTERED, view each Adjudication Form for errors and notify the Meet Director of any changes.
- Prior to each event, ALL registered entries must be verified and confirmed before the Scratch Deadline. Certification of students to both Solo and Ensemble Event and the Concert and Sight Reading Event is a commitment by the student and school. Fees shall be paid for all students not scratched prior to the scratch deadline even if they do not participate at the Meet.
- Fees Form. Once entries are REGISTERED for each Meet (Solo & Ensemble then Concert & SR), invoices are available on the Band page on TAPPS.biz. Invoices and fees (made payable to TAPPS) should be brought to each Meet.
- SUPERVISION Parents/adults from each school must assist (no unsupervised students). In addition to the director and/or accompanist of a school, there should be 1 adult for every 10 students at the Music meet. Students should not be left unattended. Chaperone list must be completed through the TAPPS spreadsheet..
- VOLUNTEERS. Each school will be assigned a volunteer time slot a minimum of 1 hour at the State meet (time keeper, stage-set-up crew, room monitor, etc.). All schools will be expected to honor their commitment. Volunteer sign-up must be completed through the TAPPS spreadsheet.
- STAGE SET-UP. It is the responsibility of the school to set-up for performance, tune, perform, and break-down the stage all within the time limits set forth for each ensemble. Chaperones and other school volunteers should aid in setting up their school to keep within the time limits.
- SCHEDULING.
- Schedules will be made based on student participation, not on accompanist availability. Consider having multiple accompanists.
- Monitors shall keep the contest moving by permitting out-of-order appearances using the following:
- First Priority: contestants that are on time and in order.
- Second Priority: late contestants; lowest number first.
- Third Priority: contestants who wish to perform in advance of schedule.
- A scheduled contestant must appear within 30 minutes of the last scheduled performance in any division or they will be considered “scratched” by the Coordinator. NOTE: Accurate ensemble rosters and listing of accompanists enable the coordinator to avoid conflicts in the schedule. Notify monitor of conflicts or delays as soon as possible and make schedule arrangements accordingly.
- CHECK- IN/ CHECK-OUT
- Check-in when you arrive at the Meet.
- Volunteer/Chaperone Form complete with cell numbers so chaperones may be contacted in case of emergency while at the meet.
- State Fee forms and a check for fees (Fees made payable to TAPPS)
- Verify schedule of events.
- Check-out before you leave the Meet.
- Pick up director packet
- All adjudication forms
- Any stray music
- Awards earned
- Sign out verifying your results with ratings and points with the amount of awards given and the amount of awards to be ordered. Fill out an Award Order form if there are some awards not available at the Meet.
Section 240 – Orchestra Contest
- PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
- Eligibility. Eligibility regulations are outlined in Article V of the TAPPS Constitution.
- Schools declare intent to participate by September 1.
- Sponsor must complete TEaMs testing in the TAPPS database including the Professional Acknowledgement of Rules.
- Students must have a Student Acknowledgement of Rules form on file at school.
- Students must be listed on the Eligibility form prior to registration of the competition.
- The Director declares each student eligible for competition when listing them on the Eligibility Form and Ensemble Roster. If ineligibility occurs after the Ensemble Roster is submitted but before the contest, the Meet Coordinator must be notified in writing of the change in status prior to the event.
- Individual Students.
- A student may perform in a MAXIMUM of six total entries
- including at most two large ensembles with overlapping personnel.
- including at most one solo per instrument.
- A student may be in multiple ensembles of the same category.
- Ensemble Personnel.
- Ensembles with identical personnel
- may NOT enter the same category twice.
- may enter two or more different categories with the exception of both Large Ensemble and Small Ensemble. (An identical group may not enter both Large Ensemble and Small Ensemble, but may enter Large and Medium or Small and Medium.)
- An ensemble confronted with inappropriate numbers due to illness, injury, emergency, etc., may perform as long as the ensemble can provide all of the necessary parts as demanded by the score. If you are unable to provide all necessary parts, you may submit a substitution request to the Meet Coordinator before the contest.
- 7th and 8th Grade Student Participation. The intent of allowing 7th and 8th grade students, is to provide an ensemble opportunity to schools which otherwise would not have an ensemble without the use of 7th and 8th grade students.
- Only ONE single ensemble may include 7th and 8th grade students. It must be in each of the following:
- String Orchestra Large Ensemble
- Full Orchestra Large Ensemble
- If no Large ensemble, a medium ensemble and the majority of personnel for that ensemble must be 9th – 12th grade students.
- 7th and 8th Grade students may participate in solo or small ensemble events for adjudication only.
- Schools must complete a 7th and 8th Grade Student approval form with will be reviewed by the State Music Committee.
- MUSIC QUALIFICATIONS.
- No ensemble or soloist may perform any part of any music selection(s) they used previously in TAPPS competition the previous 3 years.
- A Large Ensemble may not perform the same music as a different Large Ensemble from the same school.
FLEX ARRANGEMENTS: When used as the PML selection, approval must be obtained from the music committee before performing.
- Medium Ensembles may not perform the same music as a different ensemble from the same school unless the majority of the personnel are different.
- No more than three (3) Small Ensembles from the same school may perform the same music selection for competition.
- Each Music Category has specific music qualifications, some from the University Interscholastic League Prescribed Music List (UIL PML). The qualifications are outlined in the individual event sections
- UIL PML Music must be selected from the current list (Published August 1). This list may be purchased from the University Interscholastic League or viewed online. http://www.utexas.edu/uil/pml/
- All solos and ensembles shall be accompanied except those works which are written expressly for unaccompanied instruments.
- SCORES COPYRIGHT RULE. Directors are responsible for the legality of the scored presented.
- Each soloist and each director of an ensemble must supply the judge with an ORIGINAL conductor's score with measures numbered (NO PHOTO COPIES). The judge is instructed not to permit performance to begin until he or she has received such a score.
- No eprints for Judges
- If eprints are the only option available for your piece, proof of purchase of 3 printouts from the publisher must be presented at time of registration.
EXCEPTION: A judge may hear an ensemble without an original score under one of the following provisions:
- A statement from the music retailer or publisher stating that no published score exists or it is permanently out of print and that a photocopy is permitted to be used. Or
- A set of original parts are supplied in lieu of conductor's score.
- Music selections must be scored appropriately for the ensembles (no guitar lead sheets, no solo music for 2+ part ensembles).
- Published scores must be used as written unless the copyright holder supplies a letter granting permission to make modifications.
- Non-Published scores may be used with the following guidelines:
- Arrangements of copyrighted material must have a letter from the copyright holder granting permission to arrange for band/orchestra and to make necessary photo copies.
- Original works must include a letter from the composer granting permission to use for the contest and make necessary photo copies.
- GENERAL INFORMATION
- Events are open to the public if space allows with the exception that Solo events and Sight-Reading may not have an audience.
- Instrumental events do not require memorization except piano solos.
- Participants are responsible for providing all instruments and equipment necessary for their performance.
- Pianos in good tune (A-440) will be provided for each performance venue.
- Some percussion instruments may be provided for the Large Ensemble venue.
- JUDGES
- Qualifications. A judge should
- Be currently teaching, conducting, performing or retired in the area in which they are asked to judge.
- Have at least 5 years experience
- Have a college or music conservatory background in music
- Responsibilities.
- Listen to each repertoire selection.
- Judge based on what is performed.
- Give written comments of encouragement and constructive criticism with a spirit of support.
- Give a rating which supports the given comments independent of any other judge on the panel.
- EVENT CATEGORIES at the Solo and Ensemble Event
- SMALL ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Solo & Ensemble event.
- The Small Ensemble will consist of 2-10 members unless the PML requires more players.
- Ensembles with 2-5 members must not have a director.
- Ensembles with 6 or more members may a director.
- There is no limit to the number of small ensembles a school may enter.
- Live accompaniment is preferred. Taped accompaniment may be used, but ensemble must supply their own playback equipment. The accompaniment track is the only acceptable track to be used. Ensembles may NOT use the tracks with added vocals.
- When possible, Ten minutes maximum will be allowed for set up, tuning, performance, and break-down.
- Small ensembles must perform one selection from the current (Published August 1) UIL PML. Duet Music may be used for duets only. View performance requirement notes for each subsection http://www2.uiltexas.org/music/BandSECodesPerfReq.html
- You may substitute instruments( within reasonable limits) for class 2 and class 3. Parts may be transposed and re-written for other similar instruments but not simplified. The composer’s intent must be respected. Class 1 must be played as listed on the PML.
- Small ensembles will be adjudicated by one judge. ONE Original score must be provided with all measures numbered.
- SOLOS- To be performed at the Solo & Ensemble event.
- Students may only perform a maximum of one solo per instrument.
- There is no limit to the number of solos a school may enter.
- When possible, Ten minutes maximum will be allowed for set up, tuning and performance.
- Piano solos require memorization. All other instrumental solos do not require memorization.
- Piano Solos may be entered as either a Vocal, Band, or String event.
- Guitar Solos may be entered as either a Band or String event, but not both.
- Each soloist will perform one selection taken from the Current (Published August 1) UIL PML Class 1, 2, or 3. View performance requirement notes for each subsection at http://www2.uiltexas.org/music/BandSECodesPerfReq.html.
- Live accompaniment is preferred. Recorded accompaniment may be used, but the student must supply own playback equipment. The accompaniment track is the only acceptable track to be used. If a score has accompaniment, accompaniment must be provided.
- Solos will be adjudicated by one judge. ONE Original score must be provided with all measures numbered.
- EVENT CATEGORIES at the Concert and Sight Reading Event
- LARGE ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event
- Large Ensemble will consist of a minimum of 8 members.
- Large ensemble may not have identical personnel as a small ensemble.
- Students may perform in a maximum of two large ensembles.
- Schools may enter ONE Primary Large Ensemble (Full Orchestra or String).
- Schools may enter one or more Secondary Large Ensemble for adjudication only, provided that a Primary Large Ensemble is entered.
- Full Orchestra must have majority of String Instruments.
- When possible, Maximum time allowed will be 20 minutes for warm-up and 30 minutes for Concert. Time begins when you enter the room and includes set-up, tuning, performance, and break-down.
- Keyboards may be used in the large ensemble only to play parts specifically written for them by the original composer/ arranger, or to substitute for one instrument (bass, vibes, chimes, etc.), not for a whole section of instruments (brass, strings, woodwinds, etc.).
- Large Ensembles must perform three selections:
- Full Orchestras must play 3 selections, at least two must be scored for Full Orchestra.
- One selection taken from the CURRENT (Published after August 1) UIL PML list (921- Full Orchestra or 926- for String Orchestra)
- Primary Large Ensembles must perform a Grade I, II, III, IV, V, or Concerto (Grosso).
- Secondary Large Ensembles must perform a Grade I, II, III, IV, V or Concerto (Grosso).
- Two selections of the director’s choice.
- Large Ensembles may not perform the same selection as another Large Ensemble from the same school.
- Large ensembles will be adjudicated by a panel of 3 judges. THREE Original scores must be provided with all measures numbered.
- SIGHT-READING- To be performed at the Concert & Sight Reading Event Refer to the Sight-Reading Instruction on the Orchestra page on TAPPS.biz for procedure and expectations.
- All Large Ensembles have the option to participate in Sight-reading.
- Large Ensembles that do not sight-read are ineligible for the Sweepstakes award at the State level.
- When possible, Twenty minutes will be allowed for sight-reading which will immediately follow the concert performance.
- TAPPS Music Director will provide Full Orchestra and String Orchestra music.
- Sight Reading will be adjudicated by one judge.
- Music Level
- Primary: Level 2
- Secondary: Level 1
- MEDIUM ENSEMBLE- To be performed at the Concert & Sight-Reading Event
- The Medium Ensemble will consist of a minimum of 8 and a maximum of 24 members.
- Medium Ensembles may be directed.
- Medium Ensembles are restricted to schools without a Large Ensemble with the exception of approved ensembles such as a guitar ensemble or cello choir, etc.
- Schools may enter a maximum of FOUR String Medium Ensembles.
- When possible, Twenty minutes maximum will be allowed for set-up, tuning, performance, and break-down. Time begins when you enter the room.
- This ensemble will perform two selections of the director’s choice.
- Medium ensembles will be adjudicated by a panel of three judges. THREE Original scores must be provided with all the measures numbered.
- RATINGS, POINTS, AWARDS
- RATINGS. Each entry will be given a rating based on performance.
- Ratings for each event will be posted on the by TAPPS as soon as possible so that any mistakes may be caught. Contesting of posted results must be made within one hour of posting time.
- Complaints and rule violations should be made in writing to the Meet coordinator within 48 hours of any alleged violation.
- A rule violation will result in a minimum penalty of a single rating reduction.
- INDIVIDUAL AND ENSEMBLE AWARDS. The following awards will be given for those entries receiving a Division I Superior Rating.
- Large Ensemble - plaque
- Sight Reading - plaque
- Sweepstakes* - plaque
- Medium Ensemble - plague
- Small Ensemble - medals
- Solos - medal
- All-State Honor** - certificate
*The Sweepstakes Award is presented to any Large Ensemble receiving a I-Superior Rating in both Concert and Sight-Reading and given in place of the large ensemble and sight reading plaques.
** All-State Honor Award is presented to any Class 1 solo receiving a I-Superior Rating.
- SCHOOL AWARDS. In recognition of outstanding achievement of a school in their music program, the top four schools will receive an award.
- POINTS.
- For each Division I Superior rating in each category, the school will receive the following points:
- Primary String Large Ensemble.
- Grade 1 = 100 points
- Grade 2 = 125 points
- Grade 3 = 150 points
- Grade 4 = 175 points
- Grade 5 or Concerto (Grosso) =200 points
- Secondary String or Secondary Full Large Ensemble will be for adjudication only, no points.
- Sight Reading = 50 points
- State Sweepstakes = 25 points
- Medium Ensemble = 35 points
- Small Ensemble (3+ members)
- Class 1 = 34 points
- Class 2 = 18 points
- Class 3 = 10 points
- Duets
- Class 1 = 24 points
- Class 2 = 13 points
- Class 3 = 7 points
- Solo
- Class 1 = 10 points
- Class 2 = 5 points
- Class 3 = 3 points
- For a Division II Excellent rating in Primary String Large Ensemble, the school will receive 50% of the value of large ensemble points. No other entry receiving a II-rating will earn points.
- AWARDS.
- Points for all events for both the Solo & Ensemble Event and the Concert & Sight Reading Event are totaled by school and overall school rankings are awarded at the end of the Concert and Sight Reading Event.
- All Schools participating in the String Contest will be ranked in the same division (not by classification).
- Schools must earn a minimum of 50 points to be eligible for overall school awards.
- The top three (3) schools will receive plaques.
- Ties
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- CONTEST ORGANIZATION AND PROCEDURES
- ONLINE MUSIC ENTRY All Entries and will be submitted through the online entry process provided by TAPPS.. Instructions will be provided by TAPPS and describe step-by-step the process of entering all entries.
- TEaMs courses for compliance must be completed by the Fine Arts Director and Orchestra Director before entries may be entered.
- Eligibility Form must be submitted before entries may be entered.
- Entries must be submitted by the deadline on the TAPPS calendar at which time they will be registered.
- Solo and Ensemble Event entries will be registered in a separate meet from the Concert and Sight Reading Event entries.
- Entries must be ACCURATE. Double check spelling, UIL codes, order of performance, accompanist is listed, etc. Mistakes on the entry page transfer to all forms.
- After entries are REGISTERED, view each Adjudication Form for errors and notify the Meet Director of any changes.
- Prior to each event, ALL registered entries must be verified and confirmed before the Scratch Deadline. Certification of students to both Solo and Ensemble Event and the Concert and Sight Reading Event is a commitment by the student and school. Fees shall be paid for all students not scratched prior to the scratch deadline even if they do not participate at the Meet.
- Fees Form. Once entries are REGISTERED for each Meet (Solo & Ensemble then Concert & SR), invoices are available on the Orchestra page on TAPPS.biz. Invoices and fees (made payable to TAPPS) should be brought to each Meet.
- SUPERVISION Parents/adults from each school must assist (no unsupervised students). In addition to the director and/or accompanist of a school, there should be 1 adult for every 10 students at the Music meet. Students should not be left unattended. Chaperone list must be completed through a TAPPS spreadsheet.
- VOLUNTEERS. Each school will be assigned a volunteer time slot a minimum of 1 hour at the State meet (time keeper, stage-set-up crew, room monitor, etc.). All schools will be expected to honor their commitment. Volunteer sign-up must be completed through a TAPPS spreadsheet.
- STAGE SET-UP. It is the responsibility of the school to set-up for performance, tune, perform, and break-down the stage all within the time limits set forth for each ensemble. Chaperones and other school volunteers should aid in setting up their school to keep within the time limits.
- SCHEDULING.
- Schedules will be made based on student participation, not on accompanist availability. Consider having multiple accompanists.
- Monitors shall keep the contest moving by permitting out-of-order appearances using the following:
- First Priority: contestants that are on time and in order.
- Second Priority: late contestants; lowest number first.
- Third Priority: contestants who wish to perform in advance of schedule.
- A scheduled contestant must appear within 30 minutes of the last scheduled performance in any division or they will be considered “scratched” by the Coordinator. NOTE: Accurate ensemble rosters and listing of accompanists enable the coordinator to avoid conflicts in the schedule. Notify monitor of conflicts or delays as soon as possible and make schedule arrangements accordingly.
- CHECK- IN/ CHECK-OUT
- Check-in when you arrive at the Meet.
- Volunteer/Chaperone Form complete with cell numbers so chaperones may be contacted in case of emergency while at the meet.
- State Fee forms and a check for fees (Fees made payable to TAPPS)
- Verify schedule of events.
- Check-out before you leave the Meet.
- Pick up director packet
- All adjudication forms
- Any stray music
- Awards earned
- Sign out verifying your results with ratings and points with the amount of awards given and the amount of awards to be ordered. Fill out an Award Order form if there are some awards not available at the Meet.
One Act Play Plan
Section 250 – Participation
- ELIGIBILITY - SCHOOL
- Each member school may enter one play in the district contest.
- ELIGIBILITY – STUDENTS
- Students must be eligible as shown in Article V of the TAPPS Constitution and subsequent By-Laws on the dates of competition.
- Schools shall certify student eligibility by submission of a Student Eligibility Form prior to the first level of competition.
- PARTICIPATION – SCHOOL
- Schools must include participation on TAPPS Annual Contract
- Schools that include participation on the TAPPS Annual Contract and do not participate in the District competition will receive sanctions and at least double entry fees as determined by the Fine Arts Executive Committee.
- District Registration
- District Deadline shown on TAPPS Calendar
- District Registration through TAPPS database
- Championship Registration
- Championship Deadline shown on TAPPS Calendar
- Championship Registration through TAPPS database automatically advanced once District is certified by District President
- PARTICIPATION – PERSONNEL
- Directors
- One Head Director
- At most two adult Assistant Directors
- Listed on Eligibility form in TAPPS database prior to District Meet
- Complete the TAPPS TEaMs Course for One Act Play prior to District Meet
- Complete the Professional Acknowledgement of Rules as part of TAPPS database testing compliance..
- Head Director must attend OAP Directors’ Meeting
- Student participation is limited as follows:
- Cast – 15 members. Each student may play multiple roles.
- Crew – 5 members.
- Alternates – 5 members.
Section 251 – Organization
- ORGANIZATION
- Divisions
- Division I
- Division II
- Division III
- Districts
- District assignments will be made at the September Executive Board meeting after all TAPPS contracts are received and approved.
- Schools may appeal to move districts in accordance with the TAPPS By-Laws.
- One Act Play Committee
- Appointed by TAPPS
- Comprised of representatives from each of the TAPPS divisions. This committee shall review rules and procedures and submit recommendations to the TAPPS Fine Arts Executive Committee.
- ADVANCEMENT TO STATE
- Advancement to the State OAP competition will be determined by placement at the district contests.
- The Fine Art Executive Committee will determine the number of schools advancing from each district after district assignments are final.
- No more than 8 schools shall compete at the state level of competition in any one division.
- AWARDS – SCHOOL
- District
- Schools shall be ranked to determine advancement to the state competition
- There will be no ties for overall rank
- Plaques will be awarded to the top three places
- State
- Schools shall be ranked based on performance
- There will be no ties for overall rank
- Points shall be earned towards the Henderson Cup and distributed as follows:
- State Champion 10 points
- State Runner Up 8 points
- 3rd Place 6 points
- 4th Place 4 points
- 5th Place 2 points
- 6th Place 1 point
- Ties
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Plaques shall be awarded to the top three (3) places.
- AWARDS - INDIVIDUAL
- District
- Best Actor
- Best Actress
- All Star Cast - 12 Members
- Honorable Mention Cast – 12 members
- All Star Crew - 5 Members
- State
- Best Actor
- Best Actress
- All Star Cast - 12 Members
- Honorable Mention Cast – 12 members
- All Star Crew - 5 Members
- In a contest where the number of possible awards is deemed by the judge and contest manager to exceed the number of personnel that warrant recognition, the number of awards presented may be reduced for Honorable Mention and All Star Cast.
Section 252 – Selection and Standards
- PLAY SELECTION
- TAPPS does not publish a list of approved plays.
- TAPPS coaches may select plays from the provider of their choice.
- TAPPS plays must conform to TAPPS standards.
- TAPPS plays must be approved by the school.
- TAPPS plays must be published or be registered with the U.S. Copyright Office.
- SCRIPTS
- Cutting is permissible for use in TAPPS competition.
- Adaptations are permissible for use in TAPPS competition.
- Cutting and Adaptation should be in keeping with the Publisher’s Licensure. Some plays do not allow changes to gender, time, place, etc. It is the Director’s responsibility to follow all License requirements as presented by the publisher and failure to adhere to licensure is grounds for disqualification and additional sanctions as determined by TAPPS.
- An original published version of the script (no Xerox or digital copies) with final cuttings and adaptations for the judge to review must be submitted as directed by the contest manager by the published deadline for each district and championship meet. If revisions are extensive, an unmarked script should accompany the final version so that the judge may reference it in preparation to view and critique the show. The only time scripts are submitted to the TAPPS office are when a director requests a reading of the script or if TAPPS requires a script for review in case of necessary ruling.
- Directors may submit questions to info@TAPPS.biz. If the director requests or the committee deems that a show be read, the school must submit a $50 reading fee and submit the script to TAPPS by September 15. Rulings of the committee are based on the information given at that time and may not prevent disqualification if actual performance merits review.
- TAPPS STANDARDS
- TAPPS membership includes schools from across the state and with different standards for acceptable content and presentation. While many plays may involve content or themes that reflect a fallen world, directors should consider if the show glorifies those themes or employs them merely for shock value. TAPPS shall determine if the resolution reflects a redemptive process, one in which good triumphs over evil or one which brings social awareness to an issue. Finally, schools should consider if the integrity of the piece remains if permissible cuts or adaptations are made. TAPPS has determined certain subject matter, themes, content, or portrayal including but not limited to the following list, will not be acceptable for performance in TAPPS OAP competition:
- Profanity or using the Lord’s name in vain (in an irreverent or disrespectful manner or as an expletive) even as euphemism is prohibited
- Abortion
- Adultery
- Homosexuality
- Incest
- Suicide
- Teen Pregnancy
- For prohibited technical items, including props, see Section 254.
- Protest: The contest manager and judge(s) shall be responsible for the adherence to standards and guidelines. No protest of a selection or performance shall be allowed regarding the performance by any other persons.
- SCHOOL APPROVAL
- Plays should meet the minimum community standards for the school and TAPPS.
- All plays selected for performance in TAPPS competition must have the Script Submission Form
- Please note that the ultimate responsibility for the appropriateness of a script and performance rests on the director and the school administrator who sign the Script Submission Form. Disqualification and sanctions may still be assessed if TAPPS deems necessary.
- DOCUMENTATION & ROYALTIES
- Documentation is required at each level of competition prior to the school's performance which include the following:
- Proof of Copyright Registration with the U.S. Copyright Office or Publisher's information
- License to perform the production for TAPPS OAP competition
- License to allow cuttings, adaptations, etc., if any.
- Proof of Payment of Royalties
- Music Log
Section 253 – Rehearsal and Performance
- PERSONNEL
- CONTEST MANAGER
- District Directors shall appoint a Contest Manager at the District Competition.
- TAPPS shall appoint a Contest Manager at the Championship Competition.
- TIME KEEPERS
- Official Time Keeper shall keep official time at the competition.
- Back-up Time Keeper shall also keep time at the competition.
- TECHNICAL DIRECTOR
- District shall determine if a Technical Director is needed at the District Competition based on the facility needs and requirements.
- TAPPS shall appoint a Technical Director at the Championship Competition.
- JUDGES
- TAPPS shall provide Judges for all levels of competition.
- District shall have only one critic judge.
- Championship shall have a panel of three critic judges.
- PLANNING MEETING
- A directors’ meeting shall be held prior to each round of competition.
- Meeting attendance is mandatory for each school.
- The CONTEST MANAGER shall conduct the meeting.
- The facility shall be viewed if necessary and all special circumstances reviewed.
- Procedures for the contest shall be discussed.
- Load-In/Load-Out
- Dressing Areas
- Rehearsal
- Performance
- Critique
- Awards Ceremony
- Contest timing will be discussed (the OFFICIAL TIMEKEEPER and BACKUP TIMEKEEPER shall be in attendance).
- REHEARSAL
- District Rehearsals shall be scheduled by the contest manager. State Rehearsals shall be scheduled by TAPPS.
- The rehearsal schedule shall be posted prior to the competition.
- Time
- shall be limited to one hour.
- Time warnings shall be reviewed with each company prior to the rehearsal and adhered to during the rehearsal.
- At most 3 Directors listed on Eligibility form may participate in the rehearsal.
- Cast, crew and alternates may participate in the rehearsal.
- Sound levels must be set during the rehearsal period.
- Light cues must be set during the rehearsal period.
- All props and set should be reviewed by the contest manager,
- CONTEST
- Time
- Setup: 7 minutes
- The OFFICIAL TIMEKEEPER shall determine the beginning of the setup period.
- Audible warnings shall be provided
- Beginning at five minutes.
- Counting Down (5 minutes to go, four minutes to go, etc).
- The director, or director’s designee, shall clearly declare to the OFFICIAL TIMEKEEPER when setup is complete.
- Upon such declaration, all set up activities shall cease by the company.
- Time shall stop when the company stops setting up, reports to the spot designated by the contest manager and the director or the director’s designee declares to the OFFICIAL TIMEKEEPER that setup is finished.
- End setup – Performance: 3 minutes
- ANNOUNCEMENTS shall be made for the play after the setup period has ended.
- At the end of all announcements, a 60 second period shall begin for actors to take the stage and for the performance to begin.
- Performance
- The OFFICIAL TIMEKEEPER shall determine the beginning of the performance period.
- Time shall begin on the first sound, lights or other as presented in the checklist and attested to the contest manager prior to the performance
- Minimum Time: 10 minutes
- Maximum Time: 40 minutes
- The OFFICIAL TIMEKEEPER shall notify the company designee at the 35 minute mark.
- Strike: 7 minutes
- The OFFICIAL TIMEKEEPER shall determine the beginning of the strike period.
- Audible warnings shall be provided
- Beginning at five minutes.
- Counting Down (5 minutes to go, four minutes to go, etc).
- When the company has stopped striking the set and returned to the designated area, the director or director’s designee will declare to the OFFICIAL TIMEKEEPER that the strike is complete and time will stop.
- There are no GRACE PERIODS for time.
- Time limitation for setup and strike may be amended prior to the competition as determined by TAPPS prior to the competition. Any changes will be based upon the limitations of the host facility and all parties will be notified in advance of the date of competition.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
- SETUP
- Set up may be accomplished with the curtain closed or open.
- Cast may place materials downstage after the curtain opens prior to time beginning.
- Assistance from one hand truck or dolly is allowed, provided:
- The company provides the instrument.
- The instrument does not damage the stage or other companies’ spike tape.
- Casters may not be attached to any set pieces or furniture. Furniture originally manufactured with casters are permissible; however, the contest manager may instruct companies to carry the piece to its place to avoid damage to the stage or other companies’ spike tape.
- Audible checks are allowed and sound checks if desired are allowed during the seven minute setup period.
- Visual checks are allowed and light checks if desired are allowed during the seven minute setup period.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
- PERFORMANCE
- PROHIBITED ACTIONS
- Communication between director and cast/crew.
- Prompting actors on or off stage speakers by anyone other than on stage personnel. This includes audible and non-audible prompting.
- Cell phones are not permitted backstage during the performance, in the tech booth or onstage during the performance. If used as props, they must remain powered off at all times onstage and offstage.
- SCRIPTS
- May be used
- off stage for review by actors when not on stage.
- by crew for technical purposes only.
- May not be used
- by off stage speakers.
- on stage.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES .
- STRIKE
- The Strike shall consist of removing all properties, scenery, costumes, etc from the stage.
- The light booth shall be returned to the original position and cleared of company personnel.
- Assistance from one hand truck or dolly is allowed, provided:
- The company provides the instrument.
- The instrument does not damage the stage or other companies’ spike tape.
- Casters may not be attached to any set pieces or furniture. Furniture originally manufactured with casters are permissible; however, the contest manager may instruct companies to carry the piece to its place to avoid damage to the stage or other companies’ spike tape.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
- CRITIQUE
- All district and regional level performances shall receive a critique no longer than 10 minutes.
- The entire company should attend the critique.
- If the facility allows, critiques will be open to all companies and the general audience as an educational opportunity. All listening to the critiques should be attentive and respectful to the judge.
- Recording of the Critique is not permitted.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
- EVALUATION
- All performances shall receive evaluation provided on official TAPPS Evaluation Form
- The judge’s or panel's decision is final and not subject to protest
- The Evaluation shall consist of
- ACTING (60%)
- Characterization
- Physicality
- Vocal Elements
- Ensemble
- Timing
- Performance Effectiveness
- DIRECTING and STAGE MECHANICS (40%)
- Staging and business
- Story Elements
- Theme Style
- Ground Plan, set and properties
- Costume and Makeup
- Lighting
- Music
- RANK
- All performances shall be ranked by the judge
- OVERALL RANK
- Final rankings shall be determined by the contest manager or TAPPS based on Evaluation of Judge/Panel.
- Final ranking shall reflect penalties, disqualifications, and/or reduction in ranks.
- District Rank shall determine advancement to the Championship Competition.
- The Fine Arts Executive Committee will determine the number of schools advancing from each district after district assignments are final after the September Executive Board Meeting.
- No more than 8 schools shall compete at the Championship Competition in any one Division.
- There will be no ties for overall rank.
- Championship Rank shall be determined by the following criteria, in the following order:
- Lowest Sum of Total Ranks [Judge 1 rank + Judge 2 rank + Judge 3 rank = Total Sum]
- Judges' preference [School A (2nd + 5th + 3rd = 10) and School B (4th + 2nd + 4th = 10),
Current tie for 2nd | Judge 1 | Judge 2 | Judge 3 | Total Sum | Overall Rank |
School A | 2nd (+) | 5th (-) | 3rd (+) | 10 | [+ - +] 2nd |
School B | 4th (-) | 2nd (+) | 4th (-) | 10 | [- + -] 3rd |
- If a three -way tie, Lead Judge Rank determines top rank of the 3, then judges preference for remaining two places.
- AWARDS
- DISTRICT
- Plaques shall be awarded for the top three overall places.
- Best Actor
- Best Actress
- All Star Cast- 12 members
- Honorable Mention Cast- 12 members
- All Star Crew- 5 members
- CHAMPIONSHIP
- Plaques shall be awarded for top four overall places
- Best Actor
- Best Actress
- All Star Cast- 12 members
- Honorable Mention Cast- 12 members
- All Star Crew- 5 member
- In a contest where the number of possible awards is deemed by the judge and contest manager to exceed the number of personnel that warrant recognition, the number of individual awards presented may be reduced for All Star Cast and Honorable Mention Cast.
- Any disqualification
- shall be made by the contest manager in accordance with TAPPS rules and criteria after consultation with TAPPS leadership
- The judge or panel shall not disqualify any performance.
- Questions regarding any possible violation of rules
- should be brought to the contest manager or TAPPS officials.
- Directors and the administrator who signed the Play Submission Form are the only persons who may lodge an inquiry into violations to the contest manager.
- Inquiry must be in writing and submitted with $100 cash to the Meet Director.
- SET, EQUIPMENT, and STEWARDSHIP OF VENUE
- Times shall be posted for set drop off/loading in, and pickup/loading out.
- To show appreciation for use of the facility and respect for the hosting staff, participants and audience are expected to comply with rules established for the venue and expectations communicated from the contest manager or hosting staff.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
Section 254 – Set, Props, and Technical Elements
- UNIT SET
- The UNIT SET is defined by TAPPS and will be provided at the Championship meet. These may or may not be provided by district hosts, but schools can bring approved items if needed, making them available to all schools prior to the beginning of the official rehearsals.
- All UNIT SETS will be gray in color.
- The UNIT SET includes the following:
- Two- 4'x8' Platforms
- Two- 4'x4' Platforms
- Four- 1'x1' Platforms
- Two- 4'x4' Ramps
- Two- 4' Step Units
- Two- 2' Step Units
- Two- 8' Pylons
- Two- 6' Pylons
- Two- 4' Pylons
- Four- Trifold Flats
- Four- Bifold Flats
- Two Standard Doors (1 left, 1 right) with extender flat to make 8' tall
- One Standard Window with extender flat to make 8' tall
- One French Door with extender flat to make 8' tall
- Three piece Right triangle Platforms (2', 3', 4' all 1'H)
- UNIT SET Restrictions
- Casters and other rolling devices may not be added to the UNIT SET.
- No more than a total of 40 pounds of standard stage weights or sandbags may be used to stabilize UNIT SET pieces.
- Nothing may be done with the UNIT SET that may:
- Endanger or harm the
- Cast
- Crew
- Audience
- Participants
- Damage the UNIT SET pieces.
- Damage the stage, auditorium or other companies' spike tape.
- Set pieces shall be no higher than 12’ in any configuration - stacked or free standing
- ADDITIONAL SET PIECES
- Additions to the UNIT SET are not allowed.
- No additional unit set pieces or
- Pieces of similar design to those provided in the unit set
- Modifications to the UNIT SET are not allowed.
- Casters
- may not be attached to any set pieces or furniture.
- Exception:
- Furniture originally manufactured with casters are permissible
- if the casters are of appropriate design as to not damage flooring or stage components;
- however the contest manager may instruct companies to carry the piece to its place to avoid damage to the stage or other companies’ spike tape.
- Any additional set pieces ex. furniture, props, etc. must fit in a designated 10ft by 10ft staging area.
- ELEVATED UNIT SET ELEMENTS
- Participants shall not be staged on unit set elements stacked over 6 feet.
- Participants shall not be staged under unit set elements over four feet in height if other participants are staged on the elevated elements.
- The contest manager may restrict or prohibit any use of the unit set which presents a hazard to the set, stage or participants.
- MUSIC
- The music log must be submitted by each director to the contest manager prior to the beginning of rehearsal.
- Total amount of music, live or recorded, shall not exceed 10 minutes.
- Live music, whether onstage or offstage, is permissible if it is dialogue- driven or specifically indicated by the playwright. (Ex. Playwright says, "Ave Maria" is heard in the background.) Musicians or Singers count towards the allotted cast or crew. Musicians or singers from the crew cannot appear onstage. Lyrics for live music must be memorized
- Recorded sound effects are allowed without restriction
- There are no GRACE PERIODS for time.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
- SOUND and INTERCOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
- Sound/Music amplification equipment may be used.
- Intercommunication systems
- are permissible if provided by the host site and available to all companies.
- are not permissible if used exclusively by any one performing company
- If provided by one company for all to use, the other companies should be notified prior to the contest, preferably at the district planning meeting..
- LIGHTING
- Whenever possible as provided by the host facility
- A standard light plot of six, nine or more areas shall be provided
- At least one follow spot shall be provided.
- Additional lighting that is used exclusively by one company shall not be allowed.
- Available lighting information shall be
- made available to competing schools upon determination of host sites for both regional and state contests.
- Prior to the competition
- Permissible Additional Lighting:
- Non-intelligent, conventional or LED lighting instruments may be used.
- One image projection source.
- Conventional instruments not to exceed 1000 watts.
- Must be provided and controlled independent of the light board by the performing company.
- Must be:
- Handheld, or
- Safely mounted to a static light stand.
- Fixtures used to create lighting effects shall count towards the allowable number, if a number is determined by the venue.
- No use of cyc or scrim.
- Red, blue, amber wash is available.
- SPECIAL EFFECTS
- Special effects may be used in TAPPS competitions.
- Special effects shall include but are not limited to
- Fog
When using fog machines the following must be adhered to:
- Fill the machine while it is off stage
- Place the machine in or on a container that will catch liquid should spillage occur
- Your school will be held liable/responsible for any damage or injury that occurs due to your negligence.
- Smoke
- Wind
- Simulated Rain
- Flashes
- Simulated Fire
- Damage and Injury
- Special effects shall be produced in such a manner that no harm shall occur to any person.
- Special effects shall be produced in such a manner that no damage occurs to the stage, theater, or other property.
- The Director will be held personally responsible for any damage to the stage, theater or other property as a result of the use of special effects.
- The following special effects are PROHIBITED
- Use of volatile substances including but not limited to
- Gasoline
- Kerosene
- Sterno
- Propane
- Use of Firearms
- Open flames of any kind
- Liquids
- Water
- Other Substances
- Bubbles
- Confetti
- Snow
- Glitter
- Hay
- Live animals are not allowed.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
- COSTUMES
- Nudity
- Bare Midriff and/or torso are not allowed.
- Modesty
- While we do not want to restrict the creativity of costume design nor the attention to period styles, we expect there to be a reasonable consideration of modesty.
- Leotards or Spandex may not be used to simulate nudity.
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
- PROPS The following items are prohibited whether real or simulated:
- No actual or simulated alcoholic drinks.
- No actual or simulated tobacco products (including items such as pipes or cigarette cases or holders)
- No actual or simulated illegal or recreational drugs or drug paraphernalia.
- The portrayal of legal, non-abusive use and use of props simulating legal medicines whether prescription or non-prescription is permissible.
- Firearms, Explosives, Weapons.
- Firearms and explosives of any kind are not allowed.
- Restriction includes but is not limited to
- Cap guns
- BB guns
- Starter’s pistols
- Pellet guns
- Acceptable weapons would include weapons that are
- Toy
- Stage
- Swords, knives, daggers, etc.
- Actual knives and swords are not allowed.
- Acceptable weapons would include weapons that are
- Toy
- Stage
- See Section 255 for PENALTIES.
- SCENERY
- The following items may not be used in TAPPS competition:
- Altered Ladders
- Rows of Landscaping over 12’ in height
- RESTRICTIONS
- All items other than the Unit Set must be contained in the staging area.
- The staging area shall be
- Marked at the Host Facility prior to rehearsal.
- The area shall be no larger than 10’ X 10’.
- Any exceptions due to locations shall be noted in advance of the contest.
- If not restricted in the TAPPS rules, schools may utilize additional properties and scenery to enhance the production. Any questionable items should be approved prior to the district contest.
- TAPPS makes no allowance for oversized objects. TAPPS cannot guarantee the accessibility for any object which does not fit through a standard doorway.
- APPEALS & ISSUES OF CONCERN
- Directors are encouraged to address any questions to the OAP committee well in advance of any contest. Realize that all committee members also compete and most likely will not be able to address issues and questions other than those regarding disqualification the week or day of contest.
Section 255 – Evaluation and Compliance
- EVALUATION CRITERIA
- The judge’s or panel's decision is final and not subject to protest
- Any disqualification shall be made by the contest manager in accordance with TAPPS rules and criteria. The judge or panel shall not disqualify any performance.
- Questions regarding any possible violation of rules should be brought to the contest manager (or TAPPS officials if the contest manager is unavailable at the moment). Directors, the administrator who signed the Play Submission Form and TAPPS officials are the only persons who may lodge an inquiry into violations to the contest manager.
- All performances shall receive an evaluation
- The TAPPS OAP Evaluation Form shall be used
- The Evaluation shall consist of
- ACTING (60%)
- Characterization
- Physicality
- Vocal Elements
- Ensemble
- Timing
- Performance Effectiveness
- DIRECTING and STAGE MECHANICS (40%)
- Staging and business
- Story Elements
- Theme Style
- Ground Plan, set and properties
- Costume and Makeup
- Lighting
- Music
- Ranking
- All performances shall be ranked by the judge
- Final rankings shall be determined by the contest manager in the event of disqualification or reduction in rank.
- COMPLIANCE
- Failure to compete after submitting entry may result in all or some of the following penalties:
- PUBLIC REPRIMAND – School.
- PUBLIC REPRIMAND – Director.
- School ineligible for TAPPS competition for a period of not less than one year.
- School fine as determined by the Fine Arts Executive Committee.
- Disqualification and PUBLIC REPRIMAND
- Failure to abide by publisher requirements and licensure
- Eligibility
- Ineligible student participation
- Too many participants
- Failure to comply with content, theme, subject matter, portrayal
- Profanity
- Nudity
- Other
- Failure to comply with prop restrictions
- Use of unapproved objects
- Damage to Facility
- Damage to UNIT SET
- Injury to participants, cast, crew audience
- Performance Restrictions
- Director/Assistant Director Assistance
- Improper Assistance
- Prompting
- Disqualification
- Time
- Exceeding Setup Time
- Not achieving Minimum Time
- Exceeding Maximum Time
- Exceeding Strike Time
- Exceeding Rehearsal Time
- Reduction in Rank
- Failure to adhere to load in and pick up times
- Inappropriate actions
- Cast
- Crew
- Director
- Fans
- Failure to adhere to design restrictions
Spirit
Section 260 – Spirit – Cheer Competition
- Organization
The TAPPS Cheer Competition shall be organized by Divisions and tiers, as determined by entries each year.
- Division 1: 5A, 6A - Traditional Large Squad 17 or more members
- Division 2: 5A, 6A - Traditional Small Squad 16 or less members
- Division 3: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A - Traditional Large Squad 13 or more members
- Division 4: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A - Traditional Small Squad 12 or less members
- Division 5: 5A, 6A - Spirit Squad
- Division 6: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A - Spirit Squad
TAPPS reserves the right to split, combine, and delete subdivisions as warrants and/or deemed appropriate.
- Practice Guidelines. Although the Cheer Competition is a team activity, for TAPPS purposes, the following guidelines shall be enforced.
- Cheer Competition shall be a Fine Arts Activity.
- Cheer Squads are not subject to the Fall Dead Week provisions.
- There shall not be a start and end date for practice of this activity.
- There shall be no organized practice or instruction by school personnel on Sunday. This provision is subject to appeal in accordance with Section 3 of the TAPPS Bylaws.
- Eligibility to Compete
- The TAPPS Cheer competition shall be an open qualifier. Schools in good standing and having paid the event and entry fee will be eligible to compete.
- Schools shall indicate participation on the Annual Contract
- The Cheer competition shall be held as listed on the TAPPS Calendar.
- All teams compete both days for a combined score.
- Coach Eligibility
- All Coaches must be registered in the TAPPS database and listed on the Cheer Roster. One coach must be listed as the Head Coach.
- Coaches must complete the TAPPS TEaMs program testing and Acknowledgement of Rules for the current year.
- Coaches must meet all Health and Safety Training Guidelines as presented in Section 142 of the TAPPS By-laws.
- Student Eligibility
- Eligible students must be:
- Entered in TAPPS database
- Included on the submitted TAPPS Cheer Eligibility Form
- Included on the Cheer Roster
- Must be academically eligible based on Article V of the TAPPS Constitution as demonstrated on the latest reporting period of the school year.
- Students not yet in High School:
- May not compete in the TAPPS High School Competition.
- May participate in other school sponsored spirit activities.
- Championship Competition Rules
- TAPPS Cheer Competition shall be governed by the National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) Spirit rules of the current year.
- The TAPPS Cheer Divisions shall have a committee comprised of representatives from each of the TAPPS divisions. This committee shall review contest rules, procedures, and appeals and submit recommendations to the TAPPS Fine Arts Executive Committee.
- Coaching
- A maximum of three (3) eligible coaches shall be allowed to enter the warm-up area and coach on the competition floor.
- Eligible coaches shall be issued a coaching pass that shall be worn and visible during the performance.
- Coaches may not use electronic equipment once they have checked into the competition warm-up area. EXCEPTION: Equipment for music playback ONLY (cd player, mp3 player, phone, tablet).
- Coaches must remain in the designated coaching areas during the warm-ups and competition.
- Coaches should limit coaching to encouragement and assistance while coaching in the competition area.
- Unsportsmanlike conduct shall be met with a penalty not limited to disqualification of any competitor or coach who is in violation.
- Substitution
- There shall be no additional personnel added to the contest roster that increases the number squad members after the entry registration deadline.
- Substitutions which do not increase the number of squad members performing are allowed until 1 hour prior to the scheduled competition time.
- All substitutes must be listed on the TAPPS Cheer Eligibility form submitted prior to the contest.
- After the entry deadline, in the event a squad member is unable to perform and no substitute is eligible, the Cheer squad will compete in the same subdivision as originally registered regardless of the number of students able to perform.
- Competitors Apparel
- Team Uniforms shall be in compliance with the NFHS Spirit Rules.
- No bare midriffs are allowed for TAPPS Competition.
- No jewelry is allowed during warm-up and performance.
- Content
- Movements shall be in keeping with the school and TAPPS standards.
- Movements shall not be sexually suggestive.
- Cheers shall be positive in nature.
- Music shall not contain inappropriate or suggestive language.
- Music with inappropriate language removed, muted, or overdubbed shall not be allowed.
- TAPPS is the final authority in determination of music acceptability.
- Signs shall not be antagonistic or negative
- Video Recording
- The electronic capture of performances is prohibited.
- Prohibition includes the use of but not limited to:
- Cameras
- Video cameras
- Tablets
- Cell Phones
- other similar devices.
- TAPPS shall be the final authority in determining compliance with this rule which applies to but not limited to :
- Competitors
- Coaches
- Managers
- Family Members
- Auxiliary Equipment
- Appropriate equipment may be used including but not limited to
- Poms
- Signs
- All NFHS rules to sign usage shall apply.
- Shall not be thrown off the performance floor during competition.
- Banners
- Flags
- Megaphones
- Point deductions shall be enforced for littering or damage of the performance area (no glitter or confetti).
- Mascot shall be counted as a member of the squad and listed on eligibility form and Cheer Roster.
- Safety Spotters.
- TAPPS does not provide spotters
- Up to five (5) additional people may be used for safety spotters.
- Student safety spotters must be included on the Eligibility form and listed on the Cheer Roster as a Spotter ONLY. Adult safety spotters must be TEaMs certified and approved by the school.
- Safety Spotters shall dress in black shirts with no emblems and do not have to have the identical uniform.
- Safety Spotters may not perform jumps or tumbling, use any equipment including but not limited to signs, props, poms, and megaphone.
- Warm-up
- Warm-up times are assigned based on competition schedule
- Tosses are not permitted outside of the warm-up area.
- Fans are not allowed in the warm-up area.
- Performance
- Each squad will perform twice.
- Round One
- 40% of Overall Score
- Performance order random
- Round Two
- 60% of Overall Score
- Performance order is the same as round one.
- Routine
- Traditional Squad Time Limits
- 1 min 30 sec minimum for routine
- 2 min 30 sec maximum for routine
- 1 min 45 sec maximum for music
- Spirit Squad Division Time Limits
- 1 min 30 sec minimum for routine
- 3 min 00 sec maximum for routine
- 2 min 00 sec maximum for music
- Start
- Prior to beginning the performance announcer will ask "Judges are you ready? Captain, are you ready?"
- Time shall begin with the first movement or the first note, whichever occurs first.
- Time shall end at a freeze or if exit is part of routine, when the last squad member exits the performance mat.
- Music
- Must be provided by the school.
- Schools must provide personnel to begin and end music. TAPPS personnel will not be responsible for playing music for the competition.
- Competition Area
- 42'x54' mat (non-spring)
- Out of bounds is any part of the body touching outside the mat.
- Judging
- Judges shall be qualified to judge the competition as determined by TAPPS.
- A judging panel shall be used in the Cheer Competition.
- Judging panel shall consist of:
- Three (3) Category judges
- One (1) Safety Judge
- One (1) Technique Deduction Judge
- Scoring
- Scoring shall be consistent with the current NFHS Rules book and TAPPS Scoring Categories.
- Each Round Score determined by:
- the average of the three judges scores with
- point deductions subtracted from the average score as determined by the Deduction Judge and Safety Judge.
- Whether or not a deduction or safety violation is caught in Round 1, if a deduction or safety violation occurs in Round 2 it still applies and will be accessed at a Round 1 value.
- Ties for individual round will not be broken
- Overall Scoring shall be determined by:
- Round One 40% performance score
- Round Two 60% performance score
- Overall Score Ties shall be broken by:
- Highest Crowd Involvement score of Round Two
- Least Deductions of Round Two
- Highest Overall Execution Score of Round Two.
- Score sheets, judges ranges, and deduction rubrics will be available to coaches prior to competition date.
- Championship Awards
- Team
- Top 6 Champion Schools in each Division/Subdivision will be recognized based on Overall Score.
- Henderson Cup points honoring top 6 champion schools are as follows:
- Champion 10 points
- Runner-Up 8 points
- Third Place 6 points
- Fourth Place 4 points
- Fifth Place 2 points
- Sixth Place 1 point
- Ties
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- There shall be no Henderson Cup points allotted for a school’s second entry
- Individual
- There shall be no individual skills competition
- All State Teams- Coaches will submit All- State nominations prior to Round One performance.
Section 261 – Spirit – Dance Competition
- Organization
- The TAPPS Dance Competition shall be organized by Divisions, then sub-division by squad size.
- Division I: School Classifications 5A, 6A, Large Squad 15 or more members
- Division II: School Classifications 5A, 6A, Small Squad 3 to 14 members
- Division III: School Classifications 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, Large Squad 6 or more members.
- Division IV: School Classifications 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, Small Squad 5 or less members.
- The competition shall provide five (5) types of genres with each team competing in 2 genres.
- Pom
- Jazz
- Lyrical
- Kick
- Novelty
- TAPPS reserves the right to split, combine, and delete subdivisions as warrants and/or deemed appropriate.
- Practice Guidelines. Although the Dance Competition is a team activity, for TAPPS purposes, the following guidelines shall be enforced.
- Dance Competition shall be a Fine Arts Activity.
- Dance Squads are not subject to the Fall Dead Week provisions.
- There shall not be a start and end date for practice of this activity.
- There shall be no organized practice or instruction by school personnel on Sunday. This provision is subject to appeal in accordance with Section 3 of the TAPPS By-Laws.
- Eligibility to Compete
- The TAPPS Dance competition shall be an open qualifier. Schools in good standing and having paid the event and entry fee will be eligible to compete.
- Schools shall indicate participation on the Annual Contract
- The Dance competition shall be held as a Fall activity, as listed on the TAPPS Calendar.
- All teams compete with two routines for a combined score.
- Coach Eligibility
- Coaches must be registered in the TAPPS database and listed on the Dance Roster. One Coach must be listed as Head Coach.
- Coaches must complete the TAPPS TEaMs program testing and Acknowledgment of Rules for the current year.
- Coaches must meet all Health and Safety Training Guidelines as presented in Section 142 of the TAPPS By-laws.
- Student Eligibility
- Eligible students must be:
- Entered in TAPPS database
- Included on the submitted TAPPS Dance Eligibility Form
- Included on the Dance Roster
- Must be academically eligible based on Article V of the TAPPS Constitution as demonstrated on the latest reporting period of the school year.
- Students not yet in High School:
- May not compete in the TAPPS High School Competition.
- May participate in other school sponsored spirit activities.
- Championship Competition Rules
- TAPPS Dance Competition shall be governed by the National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) Spirit rules of the current year.
- The TAPPS Dance Divisions shall have a committee of representatives from each of the TAPPS divisions. This committee shall review contest rules, procedures, and appeals and submit recommendations to the TAPPS Fine Arts Executive Committee.
- Coaching
- A maximum of three (3) eligible coaches shall be allowed to enter the warm-up area and coach on the competition floor.
- Eligible coaches shall be issued a coaching pass that shall be worn and visible during the performance.
- Coaches may not use electronic equipment once they have checked into the competition warm-up area. EXCEPTION: Equipment for music playback ONLY (cd player, mp3 player, phone, tablet).
- Coaches must remain in the designated coaching areas during the warm-ups and competition.
- Coaches should limit coaching to encouragement and assistance while coaching in the competition area.
- Unsportsmanlike conduct shall be met with a penalty not limited to disqualification of any competitor or coach who is in violation.
- Substitution
- There shall be no additional personnel added to the contest roster that increases the number squad members after the entry registration deadline.
- Substitutions which do not increase the number of squad members performing are allowed until 1 hour prior to the scheduled competition time.
- All substitutes must be listed on the TAPPS Dance Eligibility form submitted prior to the contest.
- After the entry deadline, in the event a squad member is unable to perform and no substitute is eligible, the Dance squad will compete in the same subdivision as originally registered regardless of the number of students able to perform.
- Competitors Apparel
- Team Uniforms shall be in compliance with the NFHS Spirit Rules.
- No bare midriffs are allowed for TAPPS Competition.
- Content
- Movements shall be in keeping with the school and TAPPS standards.
- Movements shall not be sexually suggestive.
- Music shall not contain inappropriate or suggestive language.
- Music with inappropriate language removed, muted, or overdubbed shall not be allowed.
- TAPPS is the final authority in determination of music acceptability.
- Signs shall not be antagonistic or negative
- Video Recording
- The electronic capture of performances is prohibited.
- Prohibition includes the use of but not limited to:
- Cameras
- Video cameras
- Tablets
- Cell Phones
- other similar devices.
- TAPPS shall be the final authority in determining compliance with this rule which applies to but not limited to :
- Competitors
- Coaches
- Managers
- Family Members
- Auxiliary Equipment
- Lighting changes and special effects for lighting are not allowed.
- Appropriate equipment may be used including but not limited to
- Poms
- Signs
- All NFHS rules to sign usage shall apply.
- Shall not be thrown off the performance floor during competition.
- Banners
- Flags
- Additional material as approved by the Spirit Leadership Committee prior to the competition.
- Point deductions shall be enforced for littering or damage of the performance area (no glitter or confetti).
- Warm-up
- Warm-up times are assigned based on competition schedule
- Fans are not allowed in the warm-up area.
- Performance
- Each squad will perform twice.
- Round One- Genre One
- 50% of Overall Score
- Round Two- Genre Two
- 50% of Overall Score
- The intent of TAPPS Dance is to have the same team for both dances. Substitutions or alternates are meant for last minute changes due to inability to perform. All students expected to perform should be listed as 'on team' when registering. 70% of your team must perform both of your dances.
- Routine
- Time
- 1 min 30 sec minimum for routine
- 2 min 30 sec maximum for routine
- Start
- Time shall begin
- with the first movement or
- the first note, whichever occurs first.
- Time shall end at
- a freeze or
- if exit is part of routine, when the last squad member exits the performance floor.
- Music
- Must be provided by the school.
- Schools must provide personnel to begin and end music. TAPPS personnel will not be responsible for playing music for the competition.
- Competition Area
- Performance area will be at least 80' x 40'
- The area may be reduced to accommodate the competition site limitations. If reduced, all schools shall be notified in advance.
- Out of bounds is any part of the body touching outside the boundary.
- Floor shall be marked with a center line and indicating free throw lines.
- Judging
- Judges shall be qualified to judge the competition as determined by TAPPS.
- A judging panel shall be used in the Dance Competition.
- Judging panel shall consist of:
- Three (3) Performance judges
- One (1) Deduction Judge
- Scoring
- Scoring shall be consistent with the current NFHS Rules book and TAPPS Scoring Categories.
- Each Round Score determined by:
- the average of the three judges scores with
- point deductions subtracted from the average score as determined by the Deduction Judge.
- Ties for individual round will not be broken
- Overall Scoring shall be determined by:
- Round One- Genre One 50% performance score
- Round Two- Genre Two 50% performance score
- Overall Score Ties shall be broken by:
- Performance Showmanship score of Round Two
- Least Deductions of Round Two
- Highest Execution Score of Round Two.
- Scoring rubrics for each genre will be available to coaches prior to competition date.
- Championship Awards
- Team
- Top 6 Champion Schools in each Division/Subdivision will be recognized based on Overall Score.
- Henderson Cup points honoring top 6 champion schools are as follows:
- Champion 10 points
- Runner-Up 8 points
- Third Place 6 points
- Fourth Place 4 points
- Fifth Place 2 points
- Sixth Place 1 point
- Ties
- See the TAPPS Tie Breaker Manual for additional information.
- Individual and Small Ensemble
- There shall be no individual skills competition which counts towards the overall championship.
- All State Teams- Coaches will submit All- State nominations prior to Round One performance.
- First Team
- Second Team
- Honorable Mention